Home

WORKABOUT PRO3 with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual

1. 214 6 41 1 Modem Connection Setup 2 ee 215 6 41 1 1 Advanced Modem Settings 0 000 218 6 42 Wireless Manager Icon e 219 6 42 1 Flight Mode Disabling Wireless Components 219 6 42 2 Setting Up A Network Card ee 220 6 42 3 Network Adaptor Cards e 220 6 42 4 Changing Network Card Settings o 222 6 42 5 VPN Connection Setup mo 222 6 42 6 Managing An Existing Connection 0 00 00004 223 6 42 6 1 Editing A Connection 2 2 ee ee 223 6 42 6 2 Changing A Connection Setting Name 223 6 42 7 Selecting A Network 2 e a 224 6 42 8 Proxy Server Setup ee 225 6 42 8 1 Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings 226 6 43Wirel ss Statistics x i e a Se yah a a Queene a es 227 6 44 Wireless WAN Windows Mobile 6 1 Classic Only 227 6 44 1 Softkey BarIcons pan aa s 4 227 6 44 2 Establishing A Connection 2 2 228 6 44 3 Disconnecting From A Network 2 0 229 6 44 3 1 Shutting Down The Wireless WAN User Interface 229 6 44 4 Advanced Informati0N ee 230 6 44 4 1 Entering ASPEN doi tdo A IDO e dra wo EP 230 6 44 42 Error States oaii Godse oe ir PR EOE ASA 230 6 44 5 Tools Menu 2 1 bioa aoia Ta ar a O a
2. Figure 7 10 Quad Docking Station En Note WA4204 G2 is designed for WORKABOUT PRO C models WA4304 G2 is designed for WORKABOUT PRO S models The quad docking station is shipped with a docking manual It is critical that this manual be reviewed for additional information and updates The quad docking station permits each of four docked WORKABOUT PRO s to communi cate with a 10 100 BaseT Ethernet network at greater than 2Mbps It also provides sufficient power to operate and fast charge the batteries in the units 7 23 1 Quad Docking Station Setup After unpacking the unit e Visually inspect the unit for any damage Install the IEC power cord and apply power WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 273 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Quad Indicators 7 23 2 7 23 3 7 23 4 A green indicator in the lower right corner of the front panel lights up to indicate that power is present e Attach a CATS RJ45 network patch cable supplied between your network and the RJ45 jack on the rear of the dock A green LED is illuminated next to the RJ45 connector when a valid network link is established A user application must be loaded onto each WORKABOUT PRO that utilizes the quad dock for communication When the network is connected and this application is loaded the quad dock is ready for use Quad Indicators The quad dock is equipped with a power indicator LED and RJ45 link and traffic i
3. Baud rate Hardware Access Windows Mobile 6 1 automatically manages access to the GPS receiver However some programs may not work with automatic configuration If this is the case WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 157 Chapter 6 Settings Manage Triggers Tap on the Access tab and disable Manage GPS automatically recommended 4 AS GPS Settings Windows Mobile manages access to your GPS device and allows multiple programs to obtain GPS data simultaneously If you clear this check box some programs may not be able to obtain GPS data v Manage GPS automatically recommended Hardware Access You can go to www microsoft com pocketstreets if a map viewing program is not included with your hand held and copy the file to your hand held 6 24 Manage Triggers Manage Triggers allows you to configure how bar code scanners and other devices such as RFID readers are triggered You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single and double click and the double click time Tap on Start gt Settings gt Manage Triggers Double click 0 1000 msec C Show all modules 158 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 6 24 1 A Chapter 6 Settings Trigger Mappings Trigger Mappings A trigger mapping is an association between a particular key on the keyboard and a driver or application the module s sometimes referred
4. 0 00 c cece cece cen ene cee rr 3 Text Conventions seicaerrrewnwree Meow a AAA EASED RR RA IIS 4 WORKABOUT PRO Features 35 2542 d cc4auad sda aria 4 1 3 1 The WORKABOUT PRO C Hand Held 0 0cececececececeseceeeeeeees 6 1 3 2 The WORKABOUT PRO S Hand Held naonnaon naonao onioni nonnen T Chapter 2 Basic Checkout 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 21 2 8 2 9 Preparing the WORKABOUT PRO for Operation oooooooccccoconccccnccnicccncnss 11 21 10 AMB yy oes 855 E S oee cece 11 2 1 2 The Backup Battery o s0c25ssde arenar g0bh55040 00S Ee big eet 11 Turning the WORKABOUT PRO On and Off 0 0c0ccceceee cece cence ee eeees 12 2 2 1 Installing the Battery and Switching the Unit On 0 cece eeeees 12 2 2 2 Switching the Unit Off Suspend 0 cece cece cee eect e een ees 13 Connecting the WORKABOUT PRO to a PC 0 cccececcececececeeeeceeeeeeeeenes 14 Data Transfer Between the PC amp the Hand Held 0 ccc cece eee eee e eee ees 14 2 4 1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync 0c ccc ccc eee eect eee e cent eeennees 14 2 4 2 Using Microsoft Vista 00 cece cece e eee eee eee eee rr 15 Aligning Calibrating the Touchscreen 00 c cess eect eee e eee e ee nne eee eeeeeaee 15 The Getting Started Centre 00 0 e ccc c cence eee cence rr een rr 15 Setting Up a RA2041 Radio Summit Client Utility 0 eee eee eee eee eee 16
5. Address e Type your name company name address telephone number and e mail address EN Note You can type information using the WORKABOUT PRO keyboard or you can tap on the soft keyboard icon in the bottom right corner of the softkey bar to display an onscreen keyboard The Ownership screen has two additional tabs Notes where you can add any pertinent addi tional information and Options where you can specify whether you want the desktop to display your identification information or your note information WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 67 Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 E mail Notification 4 2 4 E mail Notification If you have any e mail it will be indicated in the Today desktop screen To view your e mail tap on the E mail Notification option Refer to Messaging on page 111 for details about setting up your Inbox 4 2 5 Task Notification Tasks lets you create lists of entries representing your responsibilities upcoming projects and so on If you ve assigned any tasks this option lets you know how many active tasks you have AN Note You can synchronize the Task Notification option using ActiveSync so that any tasks are displayed on your WORKABOUT PRO as well as your PC Refer to Synchroni zation on page 90 for details Tap on the Tasks option to display a list of tasks ip Tasks a 46156 X an Tap here to add a ne
6. Slide the WORKABOUT PRO into the cradle and press firmly downward until it locks into place On a vehicle it s a good idea to pull up on the WORKABOUT PRO to be certain that it is secure To remove the unit press firmly on the RELEASE button on the front face of the unit until it releases from it latch The hand held will be slightly raised so that it can be removed Maintaining The Vehicle Cradle Two latches in the cradle hold the WORKABOUT PRO firmly in place Although these latches are designed for robustness and endurance they will wear over time and will no longer lock the hand held securely in the cradle For replacement parts and instructions contact Psion Teklogix Partial disassembly is required WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 277 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Powered Cradle Installation In High Voltage Vehicles 7 29 7 30 7 30 1 Powered Cradle Installation In High Voltage Vehicles Voltages exceeding 60VDC are considered hazardous For powered cradle installations on vehicles with batteries above this voltage ensure the powered cradle power connector is mounted in a dry location on the vehicle or that the connector is insulated with an appropri ate waterproof material after installation The connector must also be installed out of the vehicle operator s reach Exposing an accessible power connector to water or other liquids could create a hazardous situation resultin
7. oooooococcoocrorconrcnrnnn ene rr E 227 6 44 Wireless WAN Windows Mobile 6 1 Classic Only ooooooocoooccccccccnnccrnrs 227 6 44 1 Softkey Bar Icons 0 c cece eee e eee e eee e rr 227 6 44 2 Establishing A Connection 0 c cece cece eee een rr rr 228 6 44 3 Disconnecting From A Network 00 cece cece eee e eee e eee tenn eeeenes 229 6 44 4 Advanced Information 00 ccc cece eee c een cen e once 230 6 44 5 Tools Menu 0 cece ccc cee ronca 231 6 446 SMS Men ii E RELE Pe EEE RANA AAA ER Dee POSEN DES 240 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Fly Carryimg A CCOSSOTIOS amina aer AGS GEOR rr ren pts 249 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Vii viii Contents 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 7 16 7 17 7 18 7 19 7 20 7 21 7 22 Attaching The Hand Strap oooooooccccoocccnnccnnnrrnn nr rr rr rr 250 Attaching The Pistol GTIP ooooooococooccccoccnrnrcnnnnrrrnr rr 251 The Trigger Back Plate Kit With Flush Mount Pistol Grip 0 sees eee e eee 253 Protective Carrying Case 0 c cece cece eect cnc rr rr 257 SoftShell Holstein change S20 25557 2 oR ESC EE ELEN S 257 The Bats shee cases css sit setae teats Pan TE EESE a 259 ERI AN AA Cen sab ee ee EEE EEE ERO RSS 259 Adaptor Cable Options sta suauet aaae arta 261 Chargers And Docking Stations 0 0 ccc ccee eee eee ee
8. Landscape left handed Align Screen Align the screen if it is not responding accurately to stylus taps Tap on the Align Screen button and follow the directions on the screen to align cali brate the screen align screen Tap the target firmly and accurately at each location on the screen The target will continue to move until the screen is aligned Note This window provides two additional tabs ClearType and Text Size Tapping on the ClearType tab allows you to enable the ClearType option to smooth screen font appearance The Text Size tab allows you to increase or decrease the size of the font displayed on the screen 3 5 3 Screen Orientation In addition to screen calibration the Screen icon allows you to determine how your screen will be oriented portrait or landscape right or left handed Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab 48 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO Indicators e Tap on the Screen icon In the General tab tap on the orientation that best suits the way in which you use your WORKABOUT PRO 3 6 Indicators The WORKABOUT PRO uses an LED Light Emitting Diode onscreen messages and audio tones to indicate the various conditions of the hand held the batteries the scans and SO On 3 6 1 The LED A single two coloured LED is located on the upper right side of the keyboard just above the ENTER
9. Data Bits This parameter determines the number of data bits included in each asynchronous data byte Most devices use 8 bit data bytes Double tapping on this option displays a pop up window in which you can choose either 7 or 8 data bits WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 181 Chapter 6 Settings Ports Tab Parity This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the tether port Double tapping on this option displays a pop up window in which you can choose the appropriate Parity me Scanner Settings Yi ok Stop Bits This parameter specifies the number of stop bits 1 5 2 used for asynchronous communication Trigger On Sequence And Trigger Off Sequence If a SICK scanner connected to the WORKABOUT PRO port requires a serial stream of data bytes to trigger the scanner on and another to trigger the scanner off the Trigger On Se quence and Trigger Off Sequence parameters allow you to define these serial streams 182 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Ports Tab Double tapping on Trigger On Sequence or Trigger Off Sequence displays a screen with a hex array of 10 elements Scanner Settings ee TX 1 These parameters work in conjunction with Manage Triggers sending on and off data streams to the trigger module you assigned For example supposed you launch Manage Triggers and choose Decoded Scanner as the
10. My Documents Default1_pfl Le Profile Version 10 Psion Teklogix 75275 Windows Mobile 6 AutoRestore 178 files In the final screen click on View Details to display the backup file on your WORKABOUT PRO 6 34 4 Deleting a Profile Inthe Total Recall home screen tap on Delete Profile me Total Recall Folder All Folders y Type Total Recall Profiles pfl v Defaulti 2 15 9 53 e Locate your backup file and tap on it 192 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings TweakIT A warning pop up screen appears asking if you re certain that you want to delete this file 7 Delete Profile Default1 pfi Are you sure Tap on Yes to delete the file 6 35 TweakIT Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab Tap on the TweakIT Settings icon 2 sel TweakIT Settings TweakIT Settings tx 4 ok Gi interface and Network Settings ti Services Settings Radio Features advanced cer reg Eto This utility allows you to tweak or adjust Advanced system settings interface network and servers User settings font size and docking port message and provides a Registry Editor WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 193 Chapter 6 Settings Advanced Interface And Network Settings 6 35 1 Advanced Interface And Network Settings TweakIT Settings t Yi ok SN Interface and Network Settings 22 1 Enable IPv6 22 2
11. Tap on Yes and type the PIN When authentication is com plete tap on Done WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 53 Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO Pairing a Bluetooth Device After entering the device PIN the Services dialog appears with a list of services available for that device Bluetooth Device Name TORPSG 011 Select service for pairing e Click in the checkbox to the left of the service to activate it e Click on Done Note If you choose a service requiring additional information a dialog box is automati cally displayed where further details can be completed The sample dialog box below is an example of a service requiring additional information in this case the Serial Port Service Bluetooth Serial Profile Select profile options and press Next Encryption Y Mode Port COMO Cancel i Next This dialog box offers a number of additional options such as enabling Encryption and se lecting three different modes Serial ActiveSync and Scanner 54 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 3 11 3 11 1 Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO Inserting the SD MMC Card and SIM Card e Serial is used for simple serial port communication e ActiveSync is for ActiveSync over Bluetooth e Scanner is used to create a seamless connection between the incoming Bluetooth bar code and the WORKABOUT PRO Once you ve completed the informa
12. WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 9 Appendix D Bar Code Settings EAN 13 Enable ISBT 128 To successfully scan this variation Enable ISBT 128 must be set to on Decode Performance If this parameter is set to on one of three decode levels assigned to the Decode Perfor mance Level parameter can be selected Decode Perf Level This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or aggressiveness for Code 128 symbols Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required bar code ori entation this is useful when scanning very long and or truncated bar codes Keep in mind that increased levels reduce decode security When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a decode performance level of between 1 and 3 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 2 7 EAN 13 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 13 Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 2 8 EAN8 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 8 EAN 8 Zero Extend When this parameter is enabled five leading zeros are added to decoded EAN 8 symbols making them compatible in format to EAN 13 symbols Disabling this parameter returns EAN 8 symbols to their normal format D 10 WORKABOUT PRO with Wi
13. 2 8 3 6 Bands 2 9 2 9 1 M GSM 850MHz M GSM 900MHz GSM 1800MHz GSM 1900MHz UMTS 850MHz UMTS 1900MHz UMTS 2100MHz By default all frequency bands are enabled Bands should not be disabled without knowl edge about which bands are used by your network an incorrect setting will prevent the WWAN modem from finding the network Resetting the WORKABOUT PRO Hand Held There are two types of reset available warm and cold reset Performing a Warm Reset On a WORKABOUT PRO running the Windows Mobile operating system a warm reset completely reloads and restarts the operating system Registry settings installed programs and any data files that reside in flash memory are all preserved through the reset Files and data stored in the RAM Drive partition are not preserved during a reset To protect files stored in the RAM Drive through a reset procedure you must create a Total Recall profile refer to Total Recall on page 186 and store it on the flash My Device file system e Press and hold down the FN BLUE key and the ENTER key simultaneously for a minimum of two seconds When the screen goes blank release the keys En Note You do not need to reset your WORKABOUT PRO after configuring the radio WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 31 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Performing a Cold Reset to the Windows Mobile 6 1 OS 2 9 2 Performing a Cold Reset to the Windows Mobile 6 1
14. 4 1 Navigating in Windows Mobile 6 1 and Applications 0 0 cece eee e ee eee ee eees 61 4 1 1 Navigating Using a Touchscreen and Stylus 2 cscs eee cece eee e ee ees 61 ii WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 Contents Windows Mobile 6 1 Desktop Today Screen 0 0 cece cence eee e eee ee eenees 61 4 2 1 Windows Mobile 6 1 Navigation Bar 0 cece cece cece ee eee eee eneees 62 4 2 2 Today s Date Clock and Alarm 0 0 0 cece cece ence ce nett een tenn eeeee 65 4 2 3 Ownership Information 00 cece eee eect eect rr rr rr rro 67 4 2 4 E mail Notification 0 0 0 ccc cece eee cence eee rre rr eee ESEE 68 4 2 3 Task Notifications ossccecs it bons 68 4 2 6 Calendar of Upcoming Appointments 0 ccc eee cece eet e eee e ene ees 70 MAMA o 74 4 3 1 Customising the Start Menu oooooooccooocococncocnnrrnnrr cnc 74 Managing Files and FolderS o ooooooooooocooorrnrnrrconrrrr rr rr rro 75 AA Creating a New Polder 2225225222805 0505550000004 we Dab be nas aana ASE Esi 76 442 RenamingaFlle ooo e adi 76 4 44 37 Copying a Files esi aa e E EEEE EEA ROT Geen ao 76 4 4 4 D leting a Ple ooo idiota A aaa E EE 76 Using MEUS ARA AAN AARARS 77 45 1 PopUp Menus a tdi ceases 77 The Softkey Bat tiu sSochsnqcg oro 78 Programs Using Applications ooooooooocoooccccrcc
15. Appendix D Bar Code Settings Matrix 2 of 5 Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 4 15 Matrix 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Matrix 2 of 5 Minimum Length Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters including check digit s Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page 9 for details D 4 16 Discrete 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Discrete 2 of 5 Standard 2 of 5 Format This parameter allows you to choose a standard format either Identic on 6 start stop bars or Computer Identics 4 start stop bars Check Digit Verification The available options for this parameter are Disabled and MOD 10 Check Check Digit Verification uses the specified algorithm of the option you ve chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting If the data does not contain that algorithm the data is not transmitted Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled D 54 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 4 17 D 4 18 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Telepen Set Length L1 Set Length L2 And Set Length L3 Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 can be set
16. Port Replicator Port Replicator Port Replicator Note A grey box to the left of a Device name indicates that this is a fixed port the COM Port assignment cannot be changed For those ports that can be changed each COM Port has a drop down menu Tap on COM in the Ports column to display a menu from which you can choose the COM Port you want to assign If you assign a conflicting port an asterisk is displayed to the left of device name indicat ing that this port has already been assigned A double dash in the Port column indicates that a COM port has not been assigned Tapping on the drop down menu allows you to assign a port 6 20 Dr Debug Dr Debug is an error diagnostic tool Tap on Start gt Settings Tap on Control Panel followed by the Dr Debug icon A Dr Debug WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 153 Chapter 6 Settings Status 6 20 1 Status Dr Debug No error logs found Dr Debug is on Dr Watson is on This tab indicates the status on off of the tools Tapping on Browse logs displays error logs for your review 6 20 2 Settings Dr Debug Error Level z Log Folder Windows System DrDebug A e Choose an Error Level from the drop down menu To change the location where debug information will be stored tap on the button to the right of the Log Folder option 154 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chap
17. WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 109 Chapter 5 Programs Internet Explorer e To display the slide show tool bar tap anywhere on the photo Previous f Next Close 910 00 6 Flip View 5 13 Internet Explorer Internet Explorer You can connect to Internet Explorer in two ways by connecting the WORKABOUT PRO directly to the Internet or by connecting through your PC while the hand held is attached via ActiveSync see ActiveSync on page 89 5 13 1 Browsing Web Sites There is little difference between the standard Internet Explorer found on your PC and that found on your WORKABOUT PRO sometimes referred to as Pocket Internet Explorer You can enter URLs set a home page turn images on and off e mail links to friends and so on To go to a web site e Connect your WORKABOUT PRO to the Internet If you re not certain how to do this tap on Start gt Internet Explorer to display a blank window Next tap on Start gt Help and follow the steps listed 110 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 5 14 5 14 1 Chapter 5 Programs Messaging Tap on Start gt Programs gt Internet Explorer to open Internet Explorer If Internet Explorer is also from the Today screen tap on Start gt Internet Explorer Internet Explor g 8 26 X Pitti ww psonteldogiccom _ Pis ifojn TEKLOGIX information in motion 1 800 322 3437 Se
18. replaces the soft keyboard icon in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen When a mod ifier key is pressed a square in this icon is highlighted A locked modifier key is displayed in the shift state indicator icon with a black frame around it 6 4 3 Keyboard Macro Keys Settings 4 ei 4 04 bk Buttons Macro Key Sequence A macro has 20 programmable characters or positions The macro keys can be pro grammed to replace frequently used keystrokes along with the function of executable keys including ENTER BKSP and DEL FN BLUE BKSP function keys and arrow keys Recording And Saving A Macro Only the WORKABOUT PRO C is equipped with Macro keys You can program up to 10 macro keys Inthe Macro menu highlight a macro key number for example macro 1 to assign a macro to macro key M1 Tap on the Record button 128 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Keyboard Macro Keys A Record Macro screen is displayed A Settings E 4 4 06 Enter the key strokes to record Stop Recording e Type the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro key You can type text and numbers and you can program the function of special keys into a macro When you ve finished recording your macro sequence tap on the Stop Recording button A new screen Verify Macro displays the macro sequence you created Tap on the Save button to sav
19. 2 4 2 2 5 2 6 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Using Microsoft Vista Using Microsoft Vista If you have Windows Vista your WORKABOUT PRO data transfers do not require Active Sync To transfer data between your PC and your hand held Tap on Start gt Computer to display the drives Your WORKABOUT PRO will be visible here e Open drives files and folders as you would on your PC Aligning Calibrating the Touchscreen Refer to Aligning Calibrating the Touchscreen on page 47 for details The Getting Started Centre The Getting Started centre outlines how to perform basic tasks when initially setting up your WORKABOUT PRO You can access the Getting Started centre from the Today screen or you can tap on Start gt Programs and then tap on the Getting Started icon se Start t Ty 5 Saturday 4 24 AM February 13 2010 ff Phone off Q On Getting Started ng Msg 4 X Getting Started EE Tap here to set owner information A 7 Set date and time i No unread messages MO No tasks Z Set up e mail ogee Set up a device password Live Search 4 ES Set up a Bluetooth headset Set up PC synchronization Set background Set ring tone J Transfer music a Add remove Getting Started Tapping on Getting Started displays a list of the basic setup option you may need to get your WORKABOUT PRO ready for operation WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User
20. 250 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Attaching The Pistol Grip e Stretch the hand strap toward the base of the WORKABOUT PRO and hook the bottom of the strap into the slot near the base of the battery pack A tethered stylus and optional external stylus tube can be attached to the hand strap as illustrated below Tethered Stylus 7 3 Attaching The Pistol Grip There are a number of pistol grips available to you depending on the type of scanner imager installed in your hand held Refer to the table in Section 7 1 on page 249 for a list of pistol grip model numbers and the scanners imagers with which they are compatible RN Note The few steps required to attach the pistol grip to the WORKABOUT PRO are com mon to all types of pistol grips However if you plan to use the Flush Mount Pistol Grip WA6103 you ll need to install a special trigger back plate before following these steps to attach the pistol grip Refer to The Trigger Back Plate Kit With Flush Mount Pistol Grip on page 245 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 251 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Attaching The Pistol Grip The pistol grip is attached to the four threaded inserts on the back of the WORKABOUT PRO Four Phillips head screws are provided with this accessory T AN Note Prior to installation m
21. 276 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 7 25 7 26 7 27 7 28 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Mounting Template of the hand held Also remember to leave at least a 3 clearance at the sides of the cradle to allow activation of the release knobs Refer to the detailed assembly instructions that are packaged with the cradle when selecting a mounting location Mounting Template The vehicle cradle is shipped with detailed mounting instructions including a drill template Wiring Guidelines Before installing cables between the cradle and other devices review the following Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring e Protect cable runs from pinching overheating and physical damage Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal e Use plastic straps and tie downs to secure cables and connectors in their desired loca tion away from areas where they may get snagged or pulled e Keep cables away from heat sources grease battery acid and other potential hazards Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may damage the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle Using The Vehicle Cradle If your WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with a shoulder strap or cover these accessories need to be removed before installing the unit in a vehicle cradle There is no need to remove hand straps pistol grips or tethered devices from the unit
22. 6 33 2 3 Data Handling 6 33 3 This option allows you to choose the code page your WORKABOUT PRO will use to display data Default Local ASCII or ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 Codepage Tapping on this option displays a window in which you can define the code page your WORKABOUT PRO will use E Scanner Settings t Yi ok Codepage Default Local ASCIT 1SO 8859 1 Latin 1 If you choose Default Local ASCII the code page of the local OS is used For example if the local OS uses double byte Chinese characters choosing this option will filter data through the local ASCII of that OS and display it accurately in this example using double byte characters If you choose SO 8859 1 Latin 1 data will be displayed according to the character mapping of this Latin 1 code page ignoring the local OS code page Translations Tab The Translations tab allows you to define up to 10 cases each consisting of up to 10 rules in sequential order Only one case will be applied to a bar code and a case will only be applied WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 177 Chapter 6 Settings Translations Tab if all rules specified in the case are successful if a rule within a case fails the entire case fails Scanner Settings er Y 45 ok Case 2 empty Case 3 empty Case 4 empty Case 5 empty Case 6 empty Case 7 empty Case 8 empty Case 9 empty Case 10 empty To change a setting press space or doubl
23. 8 2 1 Model RA2041 802 11 b g Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS Form factor Compact Flash Type I extended Antenna port Two Hirose U FL connectors for antenna diversity Transmit Power 802 11g 32mW maximum 15 dBm 802 11b 80mW maximum 19 dBm Frequency Range 2 400 2 4897 GHz Channels FCC 11 ETSI 13 TELEC 13 RX Sensitivity 96dBm 1Mbps 90dBm Y 11Mbps 94dBm 6Mbps 75dBm Y 54Mbps Data Rates 802 11g 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54Mbps 802 11b 1 2 5 5 11 Mbps 8 2 2 Model RA3030 G2 GSM GPRS EDGE Radio Quad Band GSM 850 900 1800 1900 MHz EDGE E GPRS multi slot class 12 GPRS multi slot class 12 GSM release 99 Output power Class 4 2 W for EGSM850 Class 1 1 W for GSM1800 Class 1 1 W for GSM1900 Control via AT commands 292 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Hayes 3GPP TS 27 007 and 27 005 SIM Application Toolkit release 99 Supply voltage range Specifications for EDGE data transmission GPRS data transmission CSD data transmission SMS Fax Voice Interfaces 3 2 to 4 3 V EDGE class 12 max 236 8 kbps downlink Mobile station class B Modulation and coding scheme MCS 1 9 GPRS class 12 Mobile station class B PBCCH support Coding schemes CS 1 4 Up to 14 4 kbps V 110 Non transparent mode USSD support Point to point MO and MT SMS cell broadcast Text and PDU mode Group 3 class 1 Triple rate codec for HR FR and EFR Ada
24. Accessing Alpha Keys 0 0 45 3 4 6 1 Choosing a Single Alpha Character 45 3 4 6 2 Creating Uppercase Letters 004 46 3 4 6 3 Choosing Multiple Alpha Characters 46 3 4 7 The Keypad Backlight aaa ee 47 325 The Display o ain tk ve ye hy Be GB oe oe Bee eg Bea tg 47 3 5 1 Adjusting the Backlight 2 ee 47 3 5 2 Aligning Calibrating the Touchscreen 2 2 2 0 eee ee 47 3 6 MICA id pete ee he eS Sch ihe ie AAA A 49 30 LT LEDa 5665 a A Sura BG fe abe Hid SO ay 49 3 7 Audio Indicators ee 49 3 7 1 Adjusting Speaker Volume 2 2 ee 50 3 8 Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time 50 3 8 1 Storing Batteries s s gece a sana ok Sie deg She ae Sw ca wa 51 3 9 Uploading Data in a Docking Station 2 es 51 3 10 Blietooth Radios ponei heh eee Sh a A Pee 52 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 33 34 3 10 1 Pairing a Bluetooth Device o oo o e e 52 3 11 Inserting the SD MMC Card and SIM Card o o o o o o o o 55 3 11 1 Inserting and Removing the Card o o o o oo o 55 3 12 General Maintenance 2 2 o Sf 3 12 1 Caring for the Touchscreen 2 2 ee 57 3 12 2 Cleaning the WORKABOUT PRO cons A ao 57 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO Features of the WORKABOUT PRO 3 1 Features of the
25. Addendum Required When this parameter is set to on the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum Addendum Separator Addendum Separator is a space that is added between the UPC A bar code and the Add on code Addenda When this parameter is set to on the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 9 UPC E Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC E Enabled UPC E1 Set this parameter to on to allow UPC E1 zero suppressed bar code scans Expand This parameter expands the UPC E code to a 12 digit UPC A format Check Digit If you enable this parameter a check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Transmit Number System If this parameter is enabled the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar code data Addendum Add on 2 And Addendum Add on 5 An addendum is a separate bar code supplementary to the main bar code Enabling these parameters defines the length of the addendum bar code to either 2 or 5 characters Addendum Required When this parameter is set to on the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum D 26 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 3 10 Appendix D Bar Code Settings UPC EAN Shared Settings Addendum Separator Addendum Separator is a space that is added between the UPC E
26. D 3 38 Postal Japanese 00ooooooocccconcccconccrnrrnc rr rrr rr rr rr D 41 D3 39 Postal KA A a D 41 D 3 40 Postal Koread ooooooooccoooccconccncnnrr rn rr rr rr rr D 41 D341 Postal Royal iii rro Aaa D 42 Decoded 223 AA ir AAA ESS ESEESE ag oe D 42 D 4 1 Options Decoded Scanner oooooccoccccconccncnncrrrnnrrrrrrr rro D 43 D 4 2 Advanced Options Decoded Scanner 0 2 eee eee eee eee eee eeeees D 43 DAI Code 39 ieccs onceegs acbocccccocdunansnnnnnnssstuvooeeeeseeeueeeeeeeeitabnns D 44 Dias Code A a res D 45 DAS EAN 3 nd dede didas D 47 DAG EAN E AAA AA TA A Ratt D 47 DAT UPCA ocn dd dd dd dd dd dd AA AAA D 48 PAS URC Errar An D 48 D 4 9 UPC EAN Shared 0 cece cece ence cece ARANE rE E E PERESAN SASN D 49 DA LO Code ii A sisas O D 50 DATE Coda bar 4613334258539 2 92555 0 E mtr serene ee eit Add INS D 50 D412 TT D 51 DABA Sich te E O odd deed eee de LEE EEE caco D 52 D 4 14 Interleaved20fS 00oooooocccccocccnnccncnnrrnr E rr D 53 BAR Matrix 2 08 Setde dd ddd dd LS Socratic AAA 8 D 54 D 4 16 Discreta iio D 54 D 4 17 Pele pen 104200932 E AERAR D 55 D 4 18 RSS Code Reduced Space Symbology sees cece eee e eee ses D 55 D 4 19 Composites t 20sc 228k III es D 56 D420 THC 39 orasidi reia AAAA de D 57 PAZI PDEA ot AAA D 58 D 4 22 Micro PDF4 li e D 58 D423 Codablock oia D 59 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual xiii INTRODUCTION 1 1 1 About
27. Enable key lock sequence Z Key sequence Scancode Remapping Lock Sequence e To lock the keyboard tap in the checkbox next to Enable key lock sequence Tap in the checkbox next to Keyboard locked at startup Inthe Key sequence drop down menu choose the key sequence you need to type to unlock the keyboard Note It is useful to leave the Show popup ease enabled default so that anyone attempting to use the WORKABOUT PRO keyboard will see the key sequence they will need to enter to unlock the keyboard displayed on the screen 134 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 6 5 6 5 1 Chapter 6 Settings Input A locked keyboard icon is displayed in the softkey bar when the keyboard is locked Start gt 4 aa Thursday 7 16 PM December 11 2008 ROGERS On Getting Started Tap here to set owner information No unread messages No tasks B No upcoming appointments Locked Keyboard Icon Type the key sequence to unlock the keyboard Input The Input applet provides access to text input options you can use to tailor the soft keyboard block recognizer letter recognizer and transcriber along with voice recording options Input Method Tab E Input er d 5 48 bk eros Block Recognizer Keyboard Letter Recognizer ep spacelTranscriber A drop down menu next to Input method allows you to tailor your methods of input Block Recognizer
28. IATA Note This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and A the WORKABOUT is mounted in a fixed position otherwise Low Power Timeout is not used Parameter Scanning Setting this parameter to Enabled allows decoding of parameter bar codes Same Read Validate The data is only transmitted after repeated reads give the same result The value assigned at this parameter determines the number of reads required from 0 to 10 times WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 43 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 39 D 4 3 Same Read Timeout Prevents the same bar code from being read more than once The value assigned determines after what time period the scanner will timeout from 0 to 2550 msec Diff Read Timeout Prevents unwanted reading of other bar codes on the same label The value assigned deter mines after what time period the scanner will timeout from 0 to 2550 msec Add AIM ID Prefix The AIM ID Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility is an international bar code identifier When this parameter is enabled the AJM JD is inserted at the beginning of the decoded bar code Code 39 Enable Setting this parameter to on enables Code 39 Full ASCII If this parameter is enabled the characters and are used as escape characters The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent ASCII character Re
29. Skip to beginning Indicator M eD ld Doe New E Menu Tap on the Record button a beep alerts you that your device is now ready to record Begin speaking into the microphone on the WORKABOUT PRO or move the hand held to within a few feet of the source of the sound you want to record e Tap on the Stop button when you ve completed your recording Tap on OK to save the note A speaker icon is displayed in the note indicating the presence of a recording within the note 4 46 4 26 bk OO Dd at New E Menu To play the recorded note tap on the speaker icon WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 107 Chapter 5 Programs Synchronizing a Note 5 11 5 Synchronizing a Note Like Tasks Contacts and so on the Notes program can be synchronized with Outlook on your PC In this way all notes recordings and drawings created in the Notes program are copied to your PC and can be edited in Outlook s Notes module To review the steps required to synchronize a note with a Note page opened tap on Start gt Help Follow the steps in the WORKABOUT PRO help file to synchronize your note 5 12 Pictures amp Videos g Pictures amp Videos Pictures amp Videos is a photo and video viewing program This program also provides a number of tools that allow you to crop adjust picture contrast and brightness zoom in and out of photos and save your adjustments AN Im
30. e Choose the amount of time that the unit can remain idle before you are prompted to enter your password Inthe Password type drop down menu choose the type of password you prefer to assign Simple PIN allows you to enter a minimum of four numeric characters Strong alphanumeric requires a minimum of 7 characters and must contain at least three of the following uppercase and lowercase alpha characters numbers and punctuation Tap on the Hint tab to enter a word or phrase that will remind you of your password The WORKABOUT PRO will display the hint after the wrong password is entered five times Tap on OK A dialog box asks whether or not you want to save you password settings Tap on YES to save your password assignment WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Menus 6 7 Menus Tap on Start gt Settings gt Menu icon to display options to help customise menus 6 7 1 Start Menu Tab This tab allows you to define the items that will be listed in your Start menu ied Menus wy AE ok Checked items appear in the Start menu Others appear in Programs OS ActiveSync OE calculator ME Calendar v 3 Contacts O Demo Scanner ow File Explorer O te Games LlesBubble Breaker O Solitaire s Getting Started Help In the Start Menu dialog box tap on the items you want to appear in your Start menu The checked items will be listed in your Start menu WORKA
31. music thebuenavibrasoundsystem folq music allgoodthings drive wma music allgoodthings folder jpo mxip initdb vol pim vol Finalize My Documents Default1 pf1 6 34 2 Restoring A Profile To manually restore a profile Inthe Total Recall home screen tap on Restore Profile Tap on the button to the right of the Profile field and locate your backup file Folder All Folders y Type Total Recall Profiles pfl bd Tap on the backup profile you want to restore 190 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Viewing a Profile In the Profile restore screen click on the gt Next button Total Recall Profile My Documents Default1 pfl E Profile Version 10 Psion Teklogix 75275 Windows Mobile 6 In the final screen click on Restore Profile to restore the files to your WORKABOUT PRO 6 34 3 Viewing a Profile To view a profile In the Total Recall home screen tap on View Profile Tap on the button to the right of the Profile field and locate your backup file Total Recall Profile Total Recall Folder All Folders y Type Total Recall Profiles pfl ba Name 4 Default1 2 Tap on the backup profile you want to view WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 191 Chapter 6 Settings Deleting a Profile Inthe Profile view screen click on the gt Next button Total Recall Profile
32. 2 7 1 Assigning the IP Address 00 cece cece cece eet e eect rro 16 2 7 2 Using the SCU to Connect to the WLAN 0 cece eens eee eee ee eee e ees 17 The Phone Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional Only 2 0c cccee eee eee eee ees 20 2 8 1 The Phone Keypad ve cccnesccacgiadadetadenaatan eats ee os 20 2 8 2 Send amp End Calls Using the WORKABOUT PRO Keyboard 24 2 8 3 Managing Phone Settings 0 c cece cence cee eee eee en eee eneeeennees 26 Resetting the WORKABOUT PRO Hand Held 0 0000c0cecceeeceseeeeeeeees 31 2 9 1 Performing a Warm Reset 0 ccc cece cece reece eee e ene eeenneeeenes 31 2 9 2 Performing a Cold Reset to the Windows Mobile 6 1 OS 0 eee eee 32 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual i Contents Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO 3 1 Features of the WORKABOUT PRO oo ccc ccecceccecececcuteeeeueeseueeuneneens 35 B22 The Batteries da II Aaa 37 32 1 Battery Safety cuida atado 37 3 2 2 Removingthe Battery Pack occ td da 38 32 3 Battery Swap Tie e cabana 38 324 Charging the Battery rona i o 39 3 3 Switching the Hand Held On and Off 0 cece cece eee e eee n eee enes 40 3 4 The Keyboard umi od 41 3 4 1 The WORKABOUT PRO GA E eedend 41 34 2 Modifier Keys aia 41 34 3 TEKA A ooo 43 3 44 Alpha Keyboard Accessing KeyS oooooooocoococccorncccnnccnrnnrr raro 45 3 4 5 QWERTY Keyboard Acc
33. 7 Tap on the Next button 5 Settings P gr 4 2 56 My Connection 1 User name Password Domain If provided by ISP or network administrator Advanced Finish 8 Type the User Name Password and Domain Name as provided by your ISP or network administrator Note Generally you will not need to change any of the Advanced settings For information about the Advanced settings refer to Advanced Modem Settings on page 218 Changes to Advanced settings are only required in the following instances To change the baud rate settings dialing string commands or credit card options To change port settings To enter TCP IP settings because the server to which you are connecting does not dynamically assign addresses 9 Tap on the Finish button If you need to edit the Advanced settings refer to Advanced Modem Settings in the next section WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 217 Chapter 6 Settings Modem Connection Setup 6 41 1 1 Advanced Modem Settings TCP IP Settings Tab If your server assigns IP addresses dynamically you will not need to change these settings If you need to make changes contact your ISP or network administrator for addresses Advanced Use server assigned IP address Use specific IP address Use slip Use software compression y Y Use IP header compression Server Settings Tab If your
34. D 53 internal scanner decoded D 2 Internet connection 2 4 Internet Explorer 0 browsing web sites 1 0 Internet Sharing 02 ISBN Conversion 24 D 47 ISBT Concat Any Pair D 46 ISBT Concatenation 23 ISBT Concat Transmit D 46 ISBT 128 D 10 D 46 ISM band Bluetooth radio 201 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 code page 177 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Index K keyboard alpha keyboard 45 one shot mode 27 options 136 QWERTY 45 Scancode remapping 131 Unicode Mapping 130 keyboard soft onscreen 83 keyboard keys 41 45 DEL key accessing BKSP 43 Macro keys 44 128 modifier keys locking amp unlocking 42 modifiers 41 one shot mode 27 punctuation accessing 43 Scancode Remapping 3 shift state indicator icon 41 42 78 Unicode Mapping 130 WORKABOUTPRO3C 43 keypad phone 20 keys alpha keys accessing 45 L landscape orientation 48 Laser On Time D 2 D 20 D 43 LED functions 49 Length Mode D 51 D 53 D 55 Length Restriction bar code scanning D 8 Field Size D 9 Maximum Size D 9 Minimum Size D 9 Letter Recognizer 86 Letter Recognizer options Input Methods tab 136 LIF Low Insert Force port pinout B Linear Predefined preset C 3 Linear and PDF Predefined preset C 3 Linear Decode D 3 Linear Security Level D 4 Linear Transmission only Decoded Composite D 57 Linear Transmission only TLC 39 D 57 Index linking hand held to PC 74 Lock Sequence 134 Low light Predefined preset C 3 Low lig
35. EFFECT The Global settings tab allows you to define radio and security settings that apply to all pro files along with settings that apply specifically to the SCU WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Appendix A Summit Client Utility SCU Global Settings Tab The Global settings in the table below can be edited in the SCU Global Setting Roam Trigger Description If RSSI from AP is less than roam trigger value radio performs roam scan or probes for an AP with stronger signal Value dBm 50 55 60 65 70 75 Custom Default 75 Roam Delta Roam Period BG Channel Set Amount by which second AP s RSSI must exceed the moving average RSSI for the current AP before the radio will attempt to roam to a second AP Following an association or roam scan with no roam the number of seconds the radio collects RSSI scan data before considering roaming Defines the 2 4 GHz channels to be scanned when the radio is set to roam and needs to determine what APs are available dBm 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Custom Seconds 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 Custom Full all channels 1 6 11 1 7 13 Custom Full DFS Channels Reserved Off On Off Aggressive Scan When this setting is On and the current connection to an AP becomes unrelia ble the radio scans for available APs more aggressively Aggressive scan ning complements and works
36. Emergency calls only No network found GPRS not avail able or GPRS not allowed 6 44 5 4 Driver Mode Configuration y Wireless WAN a 46254 Dk WWAN Driver Mode Enable driver Enable automatic port detection Select port Driver version By default the Wireless WAN driver is enabled the Enable driver checkbox is checked The driver must be disabled in order to access the modem directly e g dial up data fax or in order to manually submit AT commands to the modem for development testing approv als etc In most cases the Virtual WWAN serial port can be used and it is not necessary to disable the WWAN driver If the Enable driver checkbox is not checked the driver is shut down as soon as the OK button in the Driver Mode dialog box tapped If on the other hand the Wireless WAN driver is not running and the Enable driver check box is checked the Wireless WAN driver is started as soon the Driver Mode dialog box is closed using the OK button En Note When the driver is not running no network status or signal strength can be displayed Since all currently supported modems are automatically detected the Enable automatic port detection checkbox should always be checked If this checkbox is not checked a serial port WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 237 Chapter 6 Settings Tools Menu can be selected manually This experimental feature allows the driver to
37. Refer to Managing Phone Settings on page 26 for details about this option 6 11 Sound amp Notifications This icon allows you to specify when your WORKABOUT PRO will emit sounds WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 143 Chapter 6 Settings Sounds 6 11 1 Sounds Sounds Notifications Sounds amp Notifications Enable sounds for Events warnings system events Programs M Notifications alarms reminders Screen taps O Sok 8 Loud Hardware buttons O Soft Loud e Tap in the checkboxes and radio buttons to enable the event s that will cause your unit to emit a sound 6 11 2 Notifications Sounds amp Notifications Event Phone Incoming call Ring type Ring M Ring tone Ring WindowsMot gt m Tap here to play your ring choices Tap here to end the ring test Sounds Notifications This tab allows you to determine how you are notified about different events e Choose an event from the Events drop down menu e Choose the type of reminder a special sound a message or a flashing light from the drop down menu next to Play sound 144 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Today Screen 6 12 Today Screen This option allows you to tailor the appearance of the Today screen the desktop screen 6 12 1 Appearance Today Select a theme for
38. This docking station can only be used to charge Psion Teklogix approved 7 10 1 Charging A Battery Installed In The WORKABOUT PRO e Insert the DC power cable to the DC IN socket on the desktop docking station Plug the pronged end of the cable into an AC outlet Slide the hand held into the docking station making certain that the LIF Low Insertion Force port on base of the WORKABOUT is securely seated on the docking station connector pins An icon is displayed briefly in the navigation bar at the top of the hand held screen indicating that the unit is pro The LED on the WORKABOUT PRO light perly installed in the station fg s up indicating that the unit has external power and battery charging will begin It is safe to leave the unit in the desktop docking station while it is not in use the battery will not be overcharged 7 10 2 Charging A Spare Battery e Insert the battery in the spare battery charge well at the back of the docking station aligning the contacts on the battery with the contacts in the spare battery charge well WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 265 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Battery Charge Duration 7 10 3 7 10 4 Battery Charge Duration A fully discharged battery can take up to 5 hours to charge The desktop docking station stops applying power to the battery when it is fully charged there is no risk of overcharge if the battery remains i
39. To change a setting press space or double click Tap on the symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 11 Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Removing A Custom Preset e Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change For a parameter that can take a range of values Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click the parameter An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed a 42 ok Minimum Length Enter value from 0 to 48 Type a value in the field provided e Fora parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click on the parameter Either method toggles between the two available values e When you ve completed your edits tap on OK The parameter list is displayed the new value for the changed parameter is shown Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes C 4 6 Removing A Custom Preset e Highlight the custom preset you want to delete and tap on the Remove button A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation C 4 7 Configuring The Bar Code De
40. Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled Transmit Number System If this parameter is enabled the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar code data Convert To EAN 13 If this parameter is enabled a UPC A bar code is converted to EAN 13 Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 4 8 UPCE Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC E Enable UPC E1 Set this parameter to on to allow UPC E1 zero suppressed bar code scans Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled Transmit Number System If this parameter is enabled the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar code data Convert To UPC A This parameter converts UPC E zero suppressed decoded data to UPC A format before transmission After conversion data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A pro gramming selections e g Check Digit D 48 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 4 9 A Appendix D Bar Code Settings UPC EAN Shared Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details UPC EAN Shared The setting assigned to the Addendum parameter associated with this option is shared across all UPC and EAN bar codes Addendum An addendum is a separate bar code supplementary to the main bar code This
41. Type All data Results Advanced Inthe Search for field type the item for which you re looking e To narrow your search tap on the Type drop down menu and choose from a list of pre existing programs To search through all files leave this option at 4 1 Data WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 115 Chapter 5 Programs Task Manager 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 21 116 Task Manager Task Manager The Task Manager lists all running tasks applications or processes This applet provides a number of options to manage these Refer to Task Manager on page 171 for details Tasks Tasks This program helps you stay ahead of your schedule by managing your tasks appointments and so on For details about Tasks refer to Task Notification on page 68 Windows Live Ly Windows Live This applet provides access to group of Windows Live services from your WORKABOUT PRO such as Hotmail Messenger Maps and so on Tapping on this icon displays a setup wizard that will walk you through setting up a Windows Live ID Windows Media o Windows Media Windows Media Player Mobile allows you to play music and videos on your WORK ABOUT PRO You can use Windows Media to play digital audio and video files that are stored on your device or on the Web To work with this applet tap on Start gt Programs gt Windows Media To find detailed inst
42. key When you press ENTER the LED flashes green to indicate that the unit has been powered up The LED table following outlines the behaviour ofthe LED while the unit is docked in a charger Keep in mind that the application running on the WORKABOUT PRO can dictate how the LED operates Review the documentation provided with your application to determine LED behaviour If the unit is attached to an external power supply the hand held LED reflects the battery charge status Figure 3 6 WORKABOUT PRO LED Behaviour LED Behaviour Charge Status Solid Green Charge complete Flashing Green Charge in progress Battery charged to less than 80 capacity Slow Flashing Green Battery charged to greater than 80 of capacity Solid Red Battery fault battery is not charging Fast Flashing Green Battery temperature condition Battery temperature is greater than 45 C the battery will not charge Older WORKABOUT PRO s using Keyboard micro and Power micro firmware earlier than version 2 3 603 indicate the battery temperature condition using a Flashing Red LED 3 7 Audio Indicators The audio speaker provides a variety of sounds when a key is pressed a keyboard character is rejected scan input is accepted or rejected an operator s entry does not match in a match WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 49 Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO Adjusting Speaker Volume 3 7 1 50 field o
43. reduced Scan Rate 35 5 35 5 104 12 scans sec bi scans sec bi scans sec directional directional bi directional 308 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications SE1223HP LR And SE955HP Specifications Scan Engine SE 1223HP SE 1223LR SE 955HP Scan Pattern Linear Linear Linear Wavelength 650nm 650nm 650nm Input Voltage 5 0 VDC 10 5 0 VDC 10 3 0 5 5 VDC 10 Input Current 110 mA typical 115 mA typical 65 mA typical Standby 130 pA typical 70 uA max 8 uA max Current Operating 40 C to 60 C 30 to 55 C 20 to 60 C Temperature _40 F to 140 F 22 F to 131 F 4 to 140 F Print Contrast Minimum 20 Minimum 40 Minimum 25 absolute absolute absolute dark light reflec dark light reflec dark light reflec tance measured tance measured tance measured at at 650 nm at 650 nm 650 nm Dimensions 1 93 cm max H 1 93 cm max H 1 21 cmH x 2 16 x 3 84 cm max x 3 84 cm max cm W x 1 55 cm W x 3 51 cm W x 3 51 cm max max D max D 0 47 in Hx 0 85 0 76in max Hx 0 76in max Hx in Wx0 6l in D 1 51 im max W 1 51in max W max x 1 38 in max D x 1 38 in max D Symbologies UPC EAN Code UPC EAN Code UPC EAN Code 128 Code 39 Code 93 12 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 Codabar MSI UCC EAN 128 TriOptic Code 39 128 Code 39 Code 93 12 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 Codabar MSI UCC EAN 128 TriOptic Code 39
44. 1 User Manual 229 Chapter 6 Settings Advanced Information 6 44 4 Advanced Information In most cases when a GSM GPRS radio and SIM are installed in your hand held setup is automatic Follow the steps outlined under the heading Establishing A Connection on page 228 to make a connection The information in this section is for advanced setup purposes 6 44 4 1 Entering A PIN If a PIN is required a PIN entry dialog box is displayed Type your PIN and press ENTER Note If you exceed the number of allowable attempts a PUK entry window is brought to the foreground You ll need to enter a new PIN number Once the correct PIN or PUK is entered or if none was required the modem is instructed to perform a GSM network registration followed by a GPRS attach The main Wireless WAN dialog box reflects the progress of the initialization Searching for modem e Initializing modem e SIM is ready e Searching for network e Registered on network e Searching for packet data e Ready to connect If the modem loses the connection to the GSM network the following states are repeated Searching for network Registered on network Searching for packet data and Ready to connect 6 44 4 2 Error States The following temporary error states states that may disappear without interaction may be displayed e Emergency calls only The modem has found a network but is not allowed to register e g no roaming agreement between netwo
45. 10 2 Charging A Spare Battery ee 265 7 10 3 Battery Charge Duration o o e 266 7 10 4 Charger LED Indicators o ee 266 7 11 Troubleshooting The Charging Operation Of The Dock 266 7 12 Linking A WORKABOUT PRO To APC 266 7 13 Linking A WORKABOUT PRO To An Ethernet Network o 267 TAB Network Acceso a ts da 267 7 14 Troubleshooting The Docking Station Operations 268 7 15 AC Wall Adaptor Model PS1050 G1 o o o o oo mo 268 7 16 Automotive Adaptor Model WA3113 G2 0000 269 7 17 Single Battery Charger Model FWA3001 Gl 2 0000 269 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 245 7 17 1 Inserting A Battery In The Single Battery Charger 270 7 17 2 Battery Charge Duration o o e 270 7 17 3 Charge Indicators Single Battery Charge LED 270 7 18 Quad Battery Charger Model WA3004 G1 o o o o o oo ooo 271 7 19 Charging Batteries ns op toda o BaP ale A a 271 7 20 Battery Charge Durati0M o 271 7 21 Charge Indicators The LEDS o o e e 271 7 22 Troubleshooting 0 2 sok alee t si A 272 7 22 1 Excessive Charge Duration 2 o ee 272 7 22 2 Indicator Flashing Red o 272 7 22 3 Power LED Does Not Light Up o o a 272 7 22 4 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Ins
46. 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 12 A PRO is switched on or off in a docking station or a cradle Even when the main battery reaches its Suspend Threshold refer to Suspend Threshold on page 167 and the hand held shuts down the backup battery will continue to draw a trickle charge from the main battery to protect the data stored in the unit until a charged main battery is installed Note The backup battery takes approximately 3 to 4 hours to fully charge from a fully dis charged flat state generally the same amount of time it takes to fully charge the main battery While you can continue to use the WORKABOUT PRO replacing the main battery while the backup battery is not fully charged is not recommended because you risk losing the data stored on the unit Backup Battery Gas Gauge To safely replace the main battery and preserve the data stored in the WORKABOUT PRO the backup battery should contain a minimum of 80 of its charge capacity The Battery tab in the Power applet displays a gas gauge to indicate the charge remaining in the backup battery from 0 to 100 To check the backup battery capacity Tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on System tab Tap on the Power icon For more details about replacing batteries refer to Removing the Battery Pack on page 38 and Battery Swap Time on page 38 Turning the WORKABOUT PRO On and Off Installing the Battery and Switching the Unit On Important Before op
47. 40 in 101 6 cm 55 in 139 7 cm dependent on width of bar code 8 5 2 SE1524ER Scanner Specifications Parameter Light Source SE1524ER Laser 650nm Programmable Parameters Laser on time Aim duration Power mode Trigger mode Bi directional redundancy Symbology types lengths Data format ting Serial parameters Beeper tone Scan angle Scan Angle 13 5 0 7 Scan Pattern Single line Scan Rate 35 5 scans sec bi directional Technology Laser WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 311 Chapter 8 Specifications SE1524ER Scanner Specifications Parameter SE1524ER Undecoded Decoded only Ambient light immunity Artificial 450 ft candles 4 844 Lux Sunlight 4 000 ft candles 86 112 Lux Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Operating Current Scanning current 210 mA typical 240 mA max Motor on cur rent 150 mA typical 170 mA max Standby current 60 uA Operating Temperature 22 to 140 F 30 to 60 C chassis temperature Power Supply Voltage Input voltage 3 3 VDC 10 Storage Temperature 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C 312 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications SE1524ER Scanner Specifications 8 5 2 1 SE1524 Scanner Decode Zone Decode Zonos for SE 1524ER wW in cm i Note Typical performance at 7S 4 F 23 C 12 305 E on high qu
48. A T OGERE 275 The Vehicle Cradle oi bin 276 7 24 1 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations 00 cece eee e eee es 276 Mounting Templates a 277 Wiring Guidelines mic istede eE ENANAR EEEIEE EE ESEE 277 Using The Vehicle Cradle eneen nae E E ea 277 Maintaining The Vehicle Cradle 0 0 ccc cece cence teen een e eee e ee enneeeenes 277 Powered Cradle Installation In High Voltage Vehicles 00 0 0 cece ee eeeeeeees 278 Powered Vehicle Cradle Installation 0 c cece c eee e eect e eee e eee nneeeenes 278 7 30 1 Wiring Vehicle Power To The Cradle 0 0 cece cece eee e eee ee nner ee 278 The Port Replicator ui E A adnan 279 Scanners And magers 00 ccc eee eee e eee cnn rr rr rr rr rr rr 280 732 1 Scanning Techniques 22 s222202 ae28erueeategas Do ARHAN 280 7 32 2 Troubleshooting di eran est eee ieee LLL eso Do 281 7 32 3 Operating One Dimensional 1D Laser Scanners 00eeceee eee ee 281 7 32 4 Operating Two Dimensional 2D Imagers 00 c eee e eee e ee ee eee 282 Bluetooth Peripherals 0 0 00 cece cece cece eee e eee eee e eee e rr rro 283 Chapter 8 Specifications 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 Hand Held Computer Specifications 0 cece ec cece cence cence eee e tenn eeeenes 287 Radio Specifications iia 292 8 2 1 Model RA2041 802 11 b g Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS 292 8 2 2 Model RA3030 G2 GSM GP
49. Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Interleaved 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Interleaved 2 of 5 Reading Range This parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned The default setting Extended allows for increased reading distance Check Digit Verification The available options for this parameter are Disabled MOD 10 Check and French CIP Check Digit Verification uses the specified algorithm of the option you ve chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting If the data does not contain that algorithm the data is not transmitted Note French CIP French pharmaceutical is only used with bar codes containing 7 characters Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled Set Length L1 Set Length L2 And Set Length L3 Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Length Mode You can chose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1 L2 L3 as Fixed Length Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 53
50. EAN 128 is deacti vated to avoid any confusion ISBT Concat Transmit The codes are not concatenated by default You need to choose one of the options provided for this parameter to send concatenated code Choosing Only Concatenated Codes transmits only concatenated codes single codes will not be transmitted Choosing Concatenated or Single transmits single codes or concatenated codes If only one code of a pair is read that code will be transmitted as a single code If both codes in a pair are detected they will be concatenated provided that ISBT Concat Any Pair see below is enabled ISBT Concat Any Pair Enabling this parameter causes all code pairs that can be to be concatenated even if they do not comply with Section 4 1 of the ISBT 128 Bar Code Symbology and Application Speci fication for Labeling of Whole Blood and Blood Components June 2000 Version 1 2 1 Reading Range Determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned The default setting Extended allows for increased reading distance Check Digit Verification The available options for this parameter are Disabled or French CIP This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you ve chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting Ifthe data does not contain that algorithm the data is not transmitted ETA Note French CIP French pharmaceutical is only used with bar codes containing 7 charact
51. For additional information about tailoring text entry using the soft keyboard the transcriber the block recognizer and the letter recognizer refer to Input on page 135 You can enter text using either the soft keyboard or the WORKABOUT PRO keyboard You can also use the Transcriber to handwrite information directly on the touchscreen using your stylus e Open an existing document or create a new one tap Start gt Office Mobile gt Word Mobile and tap on New in the softkey bar to create a new document If you re using the WORKABOUT PRO keyboard to enter text there are no special steps Just begin typing the text spaces etc will appear in the document Soft Keyboard The soft keyboard is laid out just like the keypad on a PC keyboard By tapping the stylus on letters and modifier keys like the SHIFT key you can enter text in a document f Word Mobile 46 6 04 bk Soft Keyboard If the soft keyboard is not already displayed Tap on the soft keyboard icon in the softkey bar Tap on the letters in the keyboard to enter text in your document To switch to a numeric keyboard Tap on the 123 key in the upper left corner of the soft keyboard Tap on this key again to return to the standard keyboard WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 83 Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 The Transcriber 4 10 2 The Transcriber To access the Transcriber with your document ope
52. If a link is established between a WORKABOUT PRO and a host the application on the host and on the hand held must have a recovery mechanism in the event that the WORK ABOUT PRO is removed from the dock and the link is interrupted Battery Charging LED Behaviour The quad docking station supplies DC power to enable the WORKABOUT PRO internal fast charger Charge status is displayed on the hand held LED the LED turns red while the battery is being charged and turns green once the charge is complete If the battery is fully charged when the unit is inserted in the docking station the LED flashes red for less than a second and then turns green Battery charging continues whether the WORKABOUT PRO is switched on or off It can take up to 4 hours to fully charge the internal battery Troubleshooting The indicators applications and drivers required to use and monitor the docking station are installed on the WORKABOUT PRO no indicators or applications are present on the docking station itself Network Link Unsuccessful If a network link fails the WORKABOUT PRO application alerts the operator that the link was unsuccessful Hand Held LED Does Not Light When Docked Check that the quad docking station has power is the Power LED on the docking station illuminated Try inserting the WORKABOUT PRO in another well in the quad dock e Check for dirt or contamination on the docking contacts at the bottom of the WORKA BOUT PRO
53. Manual Contents C 42 Setting The Active PreSet oooooooocoooocccrncconnnrrnn eee rr C 9 C43 gt Viewing A Presta IRA AAR ab C 10 C 4 4 Creating A Custom Preset 00 cect cece rererere eee eeenneeenees C 10 C 4 5 Modifying A Custom Preset 00 c cece cence ete ee cee eee eneeeenees C 11 C 4 6 Removing A Custom Preset 00 cece cece ec ee ence cent ee nneeenees C 12 C 4 7 Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Symbologies 0oooooomomomoo C 12 C 4 8 Setting The Active Preset 0 0 cece cece cnet e eee rr eet eee teen rreo C 13 G49 Viewing A Prestar aires C 13 C 4 10 Creating A Custom Preset 00 cece cece cence ence tenn ee eenneeenees C 14 C 4 11 Modifying A Custom Preset 00 ccc eee c cece eee eee e eee eneeeenees C 15 C 4 12 Removing A Custom Preset 0 0 00 c cece ccc eee ence ee eect eneeeenees C 16 C 4 13 Configuring Symbologies in the Teklogix Imagers Applet C 16 C 4 14 Filter Tab Manipulating Bar Code Data 00 cece cece e eee eens C 17 C 4 15 Translation Tab Configuring Rules 0 0 cece eee eee e eee eee ees C 19 C416 Advanced Tab ARAS ARRRRRRRRAR NAA C 19 C 5 Teklogix Scanners Applet ooooooocococccconcocnorrnrnrrr rr ee rr rr C 21 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Dil Scanner Menti erered onse aa R EEE EEEE E ETETE AERE OERE D 1 D 2 Decoded Internal Scanner ooooooocooccocoocrnnnrnnnrrrn rr r
54. Manual 15 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Setting Up a RA2041 Radio Summit Client Utility 2 7 2 7 1 16 e To get instructions about an operation tap on an option in the Getting Started list Follow the instructions provided Getting Started en Y e 3 Set up a Bluetooth headset You can set up a Bluetooth headset in Settings gt Connections tab gt Bluetooth The following steps explain how to prepare your headset and device to set up Bluetooth 1 Turn on your headset and place it within a few feet of your device 2 Set your headset to visible This allows your device to detect it and establish a connection 3 On the Bluetooth page in Settings e Where applicable a link to an associated screen is provided Tap on the link to display the screen and complete your task e To go back to the Getting Started menu tap on the Back softkey in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen Setting Up a RA2041 Radio Summit Client Utility This section describes the steps required to set up the RA2041 Summit Radio using the Summit Client Utility SCU To review details about the option within the SCU tabs Main Profile Status Diags and Global Settings review Appendix A Summit Client Utility SCU Assigning the IP Address Before launching the SCU you need to configure the method by which the IP address will be obtained Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections tab gt Wireless Manager icon
55. Modem Logging k Services Settings Radio Features advanced Var Rea eo 5 Enable IPv6 Interface and Network Settings X 1 Enable IPv6 Enable 1Pv6 ox cance pefaur This option allows you to enable Internet Protocol version 6 that has been published to use 128 bit IP address replacing version 4 Modem Logging Interface and Network Settings X 2 Modem Logging Enable Li ing to File O ogging Cancel Default When this option is enabled the WORKABOUT PRO logs AT commands e g dial out information password string etc that the administrator can monitor for debugging pur poses Modem commands are stored in MdmLog txt 194 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Advanced Services Settings 6 35 2 Advanced Services Settings TweakIT Settings er 247 ok dk Interface and Network Settings gt te Services Settings 1 SNTP Server Radio Features SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol Server 1 SNTP Server SNTP Server Name ox cancer Defaui The SNTP Server Name typed in this dialog box is used to synchronize WORKABOUT PRO time with that of the time server A warm reset must be performed once the server name has been entered WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 195 Chapter 6 Settings Radio Features 6
56. Settings Preset Custom preset Options Code 39 Trioptic Code disabled Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A UPC E UPC EAN Shared Settings Code 93 To change a setting press space or double click Tap on the symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings e Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change Fora parameter that can take a range of values WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 15 Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Removing A Custom Preset Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click the parameter An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed PTS Imager Settin Y qe H4 ok Minimum Length Enter value from 0 to 48 Type a value in the field provided Fora parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click on the parameter Either method toggles between the two available values When you ve completed your edits tap on OK The parameter list is displayed the new value for the changed parameter is shown Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes C 4 12 Removing A Custom Preset Highlight the custom preset you want to delete and
57. Speed Dial o o o ooo ooo 21 2 8 2 Send amp End Calls Using the WORKABOUT PRO Keyboard 24 2 8 3 Managing Phone Settings o e 26 28 32 1 Phone Tab oasa Aa A O eB Ske os 26 2 8 3 2 Security Tabu rs e ota a A Al iaa 27 2 8 3 3 Services Tab o o o ooo ee 29 2 8 3 4 Network Tab is iba a a A Ba wes 30 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 9 2 830 Datar Lab A a Bos A a ada 2283336 BS a a da ee 31 2 9 Resetting the WORKABOUT PRO Hand Held 004 31 2 9 1 Performing a Warm Reset 2 2 2 222 ee ee 31 2 9 2 Performing a Cold Reset to the Windows Mobile 6 1 OS 32 10 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 ELA 2 1 2 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Preparing the WORKABOUT PRO for Operation Preparing the WORKABOUT PRO for Operation The Main Battery Before charging the battery it is critical that you review the battery safety guidelines in the WORKABOUT PRO Hand Held Computer Warranty amp Regulatory Guide PN 8000126 The WORKABOUT PRO C and WORKABOUT PRO S can be powered with one of the following lithium ion battery packs e High Capacity Model No WA3006 and e Super High Capacity Model No WA3010 Charging the Main Battery Important Before opening the battery cover on your WORKABOUT PRO press the Power button to turn off the hand held Important Before replacing a battery
58. Storage temp cycling Vibration resistance IEC68 2 14 Test BS2011 Part 2 1 FDC IEC68 2 37 600C 2C for 1 hour T1 200C 2C for 1 hour 3 minutes Max allowed for change between T1 and T2 Cycle 10 times No explosion no fire no vent and no leakage After standard charge tested under the follow ing conditions Random vibration 5Hz 500Hz ASD 0 02g2 Hz in 3 axis for 15 mins After which carry out a standard discharge charge discharge No parting joints cracks or damage to connectors No leakage or critical damage Impact shock resist ance 3 cycles of 50G 11ms 1 2 sine pulse accelera tion applied in 6 directions 18 shocks total ESD protection Accordance with EN61000 4 8 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 301 Chapter 8 Specifications Super High Capacity Model WA3010 8 3 2 8 3 2 1 Electrical Specifications Super High Capacity Model WA3010 Note The electrical specifications apply for ambient temperature TAMB of 0 to 40 C unless otherwise stated Item Description Specification Remark 1 Interface Chipset Maxim DS2762 2 Rated Voltage 3 7V Typical 3 Rated Capacity 4400mAh Typical 4 Rated Charge Current 1 2A Maximum 5 Charge Voltage 4 2 0 05V Maximum 6 Discharge Cut Off Voltage 2 6V Typical 7 Charge Method Constant voltage Current limited 8 Discharge Current 0 5C 20 C to 60 C Typical 9 Internal Resistance 150 mo Maxi
59. Store message in Outbox field a new message can be stored in the Outbox before being sent If no storage space is available or the modem does not support the storage of outgoing messages this checkbox is disabled 240 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings SMS Menu 6 44 6 2 Inbox 5 Wireless WAN er 4 10 01 ok Tapping on Inbox opens the list of received messages Reading 50 messages for example from the SIM can take about 30 seconds By default the list of messages is sorted with the most recently received message first The list can be sorted by any other column by clicking on the corresponding column heading Clicking the same column heading twice reverses the sort order Pressing any letter or digit moves the highlight to the next message whose address begins with that letter or number Note The date and time formats can be changed through the Regional Settings in the Con trol Panel For a new date or time format to take effect the Inbox has to be closed and re opened The Open button opens the selected message in a new window such that the entire message can be read including the original formatting line breaks are replaced by spaces in the Inbox message list Pressing the Reply button opens the new message dialog as described above except the destination phone number is already filled in Pressing the Delete button erases the message WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mob
60. This appendix provides details about each tab in the Summit Client Utility SCU For quick setup instructions for the 802 11b g Summit radio using the Summit Client Utility SCU refer to Setting Up a RA2041 Radio Summit Client Util ity on page 16 A 1 SCU Tabs This section provides a detailed description of each of the tabs available in the SCU Main Profile Status Diags A 2 Main Tab and Global The Main tab is displayed when you tap on the Start gt Programs gt SCU icon 75 Summit Client Utility lt 7 Y 4 ok gt a da LALA DATA COMMUN Active Profile Status Radio Type Reg Domain Auto Profile Driver v2 01 Default y LEAP Authenticated BG ETSI Oo Ojor Lst 17 SCU v2 01 12 rate Seas Sees Sema e Enable Disable Radio Enables or disables the radio This is a toggle button when the radio is enabled this button reads Disable Radio and when the radio is disabled the button reads Enable Radio Active Profile Lists the name s of the active configuration profile s When a profile is chosen from the Active profile drop down menu the settings for that profile become active WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual A 1 Appendix A Summit Client Utility SCU Profile Tab If ThirdPartyConfig is selected after the WORKABOUT PRO goes through a power cycle WZC is used for configuration of the radio See ThirdPartyConf
61. To recharge the backup battery you must fully charge the WORKABOUT PRO with the main battery installed in the unit Chargers and Docking Stations Important FOR DETAILED INFORMATION about chargers and docking stations refer to Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Lithium Ion battery packs must be charged before use These batteries can be charged with a variety of chargers and docking stations These include AC wall adaptor Model PS1050 G1 operates as an AC power source and when plugged in also charges the battery installed in the unit Desktop Docking Station Model WA4003 G2 operates as both a charger and a docking station Operating as a charger both the battery installed in the hand held and a spare battery can be charged simultaneously Quad Docking Station Model WA4204 G2 for WORKABOUT PRO C amp Model WA4304 G2 for WORKABOUT PRO S can charge the battery of up to four WORKABOUT PROSs inserted in the docking station Single Battery Charger Model WA3001 G1 charges a single battery e Quad Battery Charger Model WA3004 G1 charges up to four spare High Capacity or Super High Capacity WORKABOUT PRO battery packs WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 39 Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO Switching the Hand Held On and Off It can take up to 4 hours to charge a battery The WORKABOUT PRO intelligent charging system protects the battery fr
62. WORKABOUT PRO Figure 3 1 Front of WORKABOUT PRO Speaker LED Light Emitting Diode WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 35 Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO Features of the WORKABOUT PRO 36 Figure 3 2 Back of WORKABOUT PRO Stylus pointing tool am Back Cover Battery Latches WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO The Batteries Figure 3 3 Ports Low Insertion Force Port LIF DC IN Socket 3 2 The Batteries The hand held operates with a Lithium Ion battery pack Preparing the unit for operation re quires that a battery pack be charged and installed in the WORKABOUT PRO Two levels of battery packs are available for the WORKABOUT PRO e High Capacity Model No WA3006 and e Super High Capacity Model No WA3010 3 2 1 Battery Safety AN Important Before attempting to install use or charge the battery pack it is critical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines in the quick reference guide entitled WORKABOUT PRO Hand Held Computer Regulatory amp Warranty Guide PN 8000126 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 37 Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO Removing the Battery Pack 3 2 2 A 3 2 3 3 2 3 1 Removing the Battery Pack Important Always switch the unit off before opening the battery cover to remove the battery When the cover is removed a power off switch
63. Wipe the contacts with a damp cloth if necessary e Check the pogo pins inside the dock cradle for dirt Gently wipe with a damp cloth if they appear to be dirty or discoloured e Check that the pogo pins are not bent or damaged Remove and reinsert the WORKABOUT PRO in the cradle and check that the latch is holding the unit in place the pogo pins must be compressed for proper contact Make certain that the battery installed in the WORKABOUT PRO is not defective WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 275 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories The Vehicle Cradle 7 24 The Vehicle Cradle The vehicle cradle is a highly ruggedized single station dock Although it provides quick in sertion and removal the cradle holds the WORKABOUT PRO securely even when operated in high vibration environments Note Shock and vibration specifications for the WORKABOUT PRO are verified using Psion Teklogix approved RAM mounts and mounting hardware Use of non certified Psion Teklogix mounting hardware is not recommended and may void warranty coverage The model number for vehicle cradles varies depending on the type of hand held WORKABOUT PRO C Model WA1210 G2 WORKABOUT PRO S Model WA1310 G2 A port replicator option is available for powered vehicle cradles Refer to The Port Replica tor on page 279 for details 7 24 1 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations Before mounting a vehicle c
64. You can begin using the Bluetooth phone connection for example to send and receive e mail browse the Internet with Internet Explorer and so on WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 211 Chapter 6 Settings Connection Properties 6 40 Connection Properties This applet is used to set up serial modem connections 212 Tap Start gt Settings and then tap on the Connections tab z Ls Connection Propartias Bluetooth wo y Connections Domain Enroll My B USB to PC Wireless Manager Connections B Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections tab gt Connection Properties icon Settings Yi ok Connection Properties Select an existing connection USB y Edit Properties Choose a connection from the drop down menu and tap on Edit Properties WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 6 40 1 Chapter 6 Settings Port Settings Port Settings Connection Properties Baud rate Data bits Par Stop bits Flow control L Use terminal window before dialing Use terminal window after dialing Enter dialing commands manually Port Settings Call Options Baud Rate In the Baud rate drop down menu choose a new baud rate Check your modem documen tation for the appropriate baud rate Data Bits This parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port Possible values are 4 5 6 7 8 Parity Th
65. a value from 1 to 15 Data Options Decoded Internal Scanner Transmit Code ID Char A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type In addition to any single character prefix already selected the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a transmit code None AIM or Symbol WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 5 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 39 Scan Data Format This parameter allows you to change the scan data transmission format Double tapping on Scan Data Format displays the following options from which you can choose a data format data as 1s data S1 data S2 data S1 S2 P data P data S1 P data S2 and P data S1 S2 Prefix P Suffix S1 And Suffix S2 A prefix and or one or two suffixes may be appended to scan data for use in data editing When you double tap on these parameters a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 255 Delete Char Set ECls Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to delete any escape sequences representing Character Set ECIs Extended Channel Interpretations also known as GLIs from its buffer before transmission When this parameter is enabled the scanner transmits data from PDF417 and MicroPDF417 bar codes containing Character Set ECIs even when the ECI Protocol is di
66. ara Ea NS 231 120 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 6 44 5 1 Data Connection Configuration 232 6 44 5 2 Security Configuration 200040 235 6 44 5 3 Network Configuration 0 20000 236 6 44 5 4 Driver Mode Configuration 04 237 6 44 5 5 Modem Information 0 0 0 000 238 GALO SMS MEE si ice a A ERAS Rede SR a a 240 6 44 6 1 New SMS a Grote dy dh AA 240 6 44 62 o od geet ad eG A Bld Ss ak ee Soe ces 241 CAOS DUDO Gh koi RG AA lt a AMO AAA BORG 242 6 44 6 4 SMS Configuration 2 ee ee ee 242 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 121 Chapter 6 Settings Settings 6 1 Settings The Settings screen is divided into three tabs Personal System and Connections Note Keep in mind that the Phone applet is only available when your hand held is equipped with Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional Tap on Start gt Settings to display this screen Figure 6 1 Settings Tabs r Buttons NN 4 Menus Microphone KK a Owner Phone Sounds amp Information Notifications faY Toda i pecan cores pez 6 2 Personal Settings The Personal tab allows you to tailor the general behaviour of your WORKABOUT PRO such as defining input methods Start menu options owner information password assign ment sound specifications and so on WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 123 Chapter 6 S
67. are then removed Pharmaceutical This is a numeric 0 9 fixed length barcode used by Italian pharmacies It is also referred to as Code 32 Pharmacode and is a form of Code 39 D 22 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 3 5 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Trioptic Code Full ASCII If this parameter is enabled the characters and are used as escape characters The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent ASCII character Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Trioptic Code This code is used for labelling magnetic storage media Note If you are scanning Code 32 Pharmaceutical codes Trioptic Code must be off Enabled Setting this parameter to on enables Trioptic Code Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Code 128 Enabled Setting this parameter to on enables Code 128 ISBT Concatenation These codes are not concatenated by default You need to set this parameter to on to send concatenated code WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 23 Appendix D Bar Code Settings EAN 13 Settings Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human read
68. ccc cece eect eee rr rr rra rr rr D 24 DIF EAN Si iaa D 25 A UPC A A eee Rees D 25 D 3 9 UPCE Settings iii aaa dans daa aaa EEE D 26 D 3 10 UPC EAN Shared Settings 0oooocooooocooccncrncrnnnnrrrnrrr rro D 27 DIA A DD DDDDDD DD ORANE EERE SEES EEE EEES D 27 D31 Codabarsioce save cig 2a RA A Aaa D 27 D313 MSI Plessy issir ririo as D 29 D 3 14 Code tier rosat a LLL LLL ERRER eror E Eiaa D 29 DIGAS Interleaved 2 ofS 2c 2442 ninin e EEE eA aise EEEE EA Eie eua D 30 DILO MARDI e IN D 31 DST TATA DOS dat tartera llanto L A LLL L123 A D 31 D 3 18 Discreto eb D 32 DI dd 0 dd D 32 D 3 20 RSS Code Reduced Space Symbology 00 cece ceee eee ee eee eeees D 33 D 3 21 PosiCode Reduced Space Symbology 0 cece ceeee ee ee eee eenees D 33 D3 22 Composite 2ccc62ccxad Soden dhe ec ntene dd eee ees ce es D 34 DIZ TEC Oir A a D 35 DIDAPDE aaa D 35 D325 Micro DEA Wa a annie E EE AEE EET RRARRRRARAR ENA D 35 D326 Code TK NN E S N D 36 PIJ Coded ea ial ao eo REELE ieni D 36 D 3 28 Codablock 00054101 doo EEE E E TEE AIREAREN A oas D 37 D329 2D Data Matik ei D 37 D330 2D0 0R Cod leo D 38 D33 2D Manco vc bs D 38 D332 DAA eee anna D 39 D 3 33 Postal PlaANET oi aa D 39 D 3 34 Postal POstNET o aaa D 39 D 3 35 Postal AustraliaM ooooooooocoocccnncccronrrncrnrrrr rr tenet eenneeenees D 40 D 336 Postal Candi IA cc D 40 D 3 37 Postal Ca ads D 40 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 4 Contents
69. characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 48 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 19 Telepen Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Telepen Output If you choose AIM Output the imager reads symbols with start stop pattern 1 and decodes them as standard full ASCII start stop pattern 1 If you choose Original Output the imager reads symbols with start stop pattern 1 and decodes them as compressed numeric with op tional full ASCH start stop pattern 2 Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 60 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 32 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Appendix D Bar Code Settings RSS Code Reduced Space Symbology D 3 20 RSS Code Reduced Space Symbology D 3 21 Enable Setting this parameter to on enables RSS Code scanning capability Enable RSS Limited RSS Limited
70. checkbox is checked power is applied to the modem and the drivers are loaded when the hand held is turned on Power is removed from the modem when the WORKABOUT PRO enters suspend mode To enable a modem module that is built into the unit Tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on the System tab followed by the Power icon For a modem module that is built into the WORKABOUT PRO the settings can be found under the Built in Devices tab In this case one of the following power modes can be selected e Disabled No power is applied to the modem and no driver is loaded Enabled Off in Suspend 238 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Tools Menu Power 1s applied to the modem and the drivers are loaded when the hand held is turned on Power is removed from the modem when the terminal enters suspend mode e Enabled Always On When the WORKABOUT PRO enters suspend mode the modem remains powered indefinitely Enabled Keep on for 5 min Enabled Keep on for 15 min Enabled Keep on for 30 min Enabled Keep on for 1 hour Enabled Keep on for 2 hours When the hand held enters suspend mode the modem remains powered If the WORK ABOUT PRO is not turned on again during the configured time the unit briefly wakes up from suspend mode shuts down the modem and enters suspend mode again The default mode is Enabled Keep on for 1 hour At the cost of a slig
71. codes that require the AJM ID prefix you can disable AJM JD and highlight the bar codes to which you want an AJM ID prefix applied using the Prefix Exception parameters D 3 3 Code 39 Enabled Setting this parameter to on enables Code 39 Strip Start Stop Chars Codabar uses the characters A B C and D as start and stop characters Thus the first and last digits of a Codabar message must be A B C or D and the body of the message should not contain these characters Setting this parameter to on strips the start and stop characters from this bar code Check Char When this parameter is set to Validate only the integrity of a Code 39 symbol is checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms If Check Char is set to Validate and Transmit the check character is validated and trans mitted with the data Setting this parameter to None disables this function Minimum And Maximum Length Minimum and Maximum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 48 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Append If this parameter enabled any Code 39 bar code that contains a space as the first character will be stored in memory Once a Code 39 barcode containing a non space first character is scanned this bar code will be appended to the bar codes containing the spaces and the imager will transmit the ALL the data The spaces
72. contacts in the charge well 7 20 Battery Charge Duration A fully discharged battery can take up to 4 hours to charge The quad battery charger stops applying power to the battery when it is fully charged there is no risk of overcharge if the battery remains in the charge well The 75 charge indicator is handy if you need a quick recharge a quick charge often takes less than one hour 7 21 Charge Indicators The LEDs Each battery charge well is equipped with an LED to indicate the charge status of the bat tery When a battery is inserted in the charger the colour and behaviour of the LED WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 271 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Troubleshooting associated with the charge well in use indicates the status of the charge Refer to Table on page 270 for details 7 22 Troubleshooting 7 22 1 Excessive Charge Duration The charger is equipped with a recalibration function a function that fully discharges and then fully recharges the battery This process is necessary to recalibrate the battery capacity gauge internal to the battery The charger attempts recalibration when e the battery capacity is at less than 30 and e the battery has undergone more than 40 partial charge cycles since the last full discharge The recalibration function extends the charge time by up to 2 hours 7 22 2 Indicator Flashing Red If the indicator flashes red e Remove all batterie
73. destructive backspace moves the cursor one character to the left erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke The DEL key FN BLUE BKSP erases the character at the cursor position The CTRL and ALT Keys The CTRL and ALT keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application dependent These keys are printed in blue type on the keys to the left and right of the SCAN key at the top of the keyboard They are accessed using a key combination FN BLUE followed by the CTRL or the ALT key The TAB Key Typically the TAB key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward The ESC Key Generally this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu dialog box or activity and return to the previous one On the QWERTY keyboard a key combination is re quired to access the ESC key Press FN BLUE TAB The Windows a START Key This key displays the Start menu WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 43 Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO The Keys The SPACE Key Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters In a Windows dialog box press ing the SPACE key enables or disables a checkbox On the WORKABOUT PRO S numeric keyboard this key is accessed by key combination FN ORANGE 0 zero The SCAN Keys The WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with a SCAN bar located just below the display and two SCAN keys situated on the left and
74. executable keys like the ENTER key the BKSP key any function key and arrow key and so on Alphanumeric keyboards have ten macro keys M1 to M10 These keys are colour coded in orange print above the numeric keys To access a macro key Press the FN ORANGE key followed by the appropriate numeric key from 1 to 0 44 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 3 4 4 3 4 5 3 4 6 3 4 6 1 A Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO Alpha Keyboard Accessing Keys To access macro key M1 press FN ORANGE 1 To access macro key M2 press FN ORANGE 2 and so on Alpha Keyboard Accessing Keys The alpha and numeric keys on WORKABOUT PRO C units are directly accessible from the keyboard no key combination is required QWERTY Keyboard Accessing Numeric Keys Alpha keys on a QWERTY keyboard are directly accessible Numeric keys are printed in orange type above some of the alpha keys and require a key combination to access them To access a numeric key Press the FN ORANGE key followed by the appropriate alpha key in the left hand panel of the keyboard To access 1 press FN ORANGE W To access 2 press FN ORANGE E and so on Numeric Keyboard Accessing Alpha Keys While numeric keys are directly accessible on the numeric keyboard all alpha characters are printed on the unit plastic in orange typeface above the numeric keys An indicator in the left comer of the ta
75. gt Office Mobile and then tap on Word Mobile 98 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 5 5 3 1 5 5 3 2 Chapter 5 Programs Word Mobile If you ve already create a Word Mobile document it will be listed in the Word Mobile window IS 4 10 05 X 3 All Folders y Name y mSystemProperties 8 15 p 445b m Word Mobile Tem 9 42 p 7k Tap on New in the softkey bar to create a new Word document Using Word Mobile Help If you need help using this application you can review the instructions in the associated help files To display Word Mobile help files e Launch the Word Mobile program Tap on Start gt Help and review the instructions provided Data Entry Modes In addition to the soft keyboard you can enter text using Block Recognizer Letter Recog nizer or Transcriber Refer to Entering Text on page 83 for details You can also use the WORKABOUT PRO keyboard for data entry Sharing Documents with Your PC Documents created on a PC are recognized by your WORKABOUT PRO However some formatting is lost when a Word document is converted to a Word Mobile document This loss also occurs when you open a doc file and change it on the WORKBOUT PRO WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 99 Chapter 5 Programs PowerPoint Mobile A 5 5 4 5 6 Important To avoid translation problems you can work on copies of doc files In addi tion keep in mind that you can use
76. in con junction with the standard scanning that is configured through the Roam Trigger Roam Delta and Roam Period settings It is recommended that Aggressive Scan is left On unless there is significant co channel interference because of overlapping coverage from APs on the same channel Off On CCX features Activates three CCX features AP assisted roaming AP specified maximum transmit power and radio management Optimized Full Off Optimized WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual A 9 A 10 Appendix A Summit Client Utility SCU Global Settings Tab Global Setting Description Value Default WMM Use Wi Fi Multimedia Extensions also On Off Off know as WMM TX Diversity Defines how to handle antenna diver Main only Use main Main only sity when transmitting data to AP antenna only Aux only Use auxil iary antenna only On Use diversity RX Diversity Defines how to handle antenna diver On Start on Main On On Start on sity when receiving data from AP startup use main Main antenna On Start on Aux On startup use auxiliary antenna Main only Use main antenna only Aux only Use auxil lary antenna only Frag Thresh Packet is fragmented when packet Integer from 256 to 2346 size in bytes exceeds threshold 2346 RTS Thresh Packet size above which RTS CTS is An integer from 0 to 2347 required on link 2347 LED A
77. is detected to reduce power consumption Another benefit is that when Radio Power Management is enabled even when no activity is detected the access point does not disassociate the WORKABOUT PRO 6 35 4 User System Setting 1 Docking Port Message Docking Port Message User System Settings 1 Docking Port Message lDisable Popup Messages cana Bota Checking this box blocks the message that normally pops up on the display when the WORKABOUT PRO is docked WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 197 Chapter 6 Settings Registry Editor 6 35 5 Registry Editor 6 36 6 37 198 TweakIT Settings Yi ok Path HKLMY Mw HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT B HKEY_CURRENT_USER B HKEY_USERS This option is reserved for senior administrators who have a strong understanding of registry keys and values Careless registry editing can cause irreversible damage to the WORKABOUT PRO Windows Update v Windows Update This program checks for software updates and if found downloads updates to your WORK ABOUT PRO You can choose to have updates checked automatically or if you prefer you can determine when your unit will check for updates Connections Tab This tab is used to setup connections using Bluetooth 802 11 radios and you can also set up Wireless WAN connections The Wireless WAN icon is only visible when Windows Mobile 6 1 Classic is ins
78. is restricted in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs global trade item number that begin with either a 0 or a 1 It is not stackable and is not designed to be read omni directionally Enable RSS Expanded RSS Expanded uses the same application identifiers as UCC EAN 128 codes but they can be split into sections and stacked several rows high reducing the length of the symbol while increasing the capacity of data that can be stored RSS Expanded code can be omni direc tionally scanned Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 1 to 74 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details PosiCode Reduced Space Symbology Enable Setting this parameter to on enables PosiCode scanning capability PosiCode PosiCode is a position based symbology A position based symbology de couples the widths of the bars from their positions The centers of the bars are specified to be laid out on a grid of equally spaced parallel lines The distance between these grid lines is called the G dimension and is analogous to the X dimension of conventional bar codes WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mo
79. key to use as a trigger source y Manage Triggers 4 4 52 New Trigger Key Press a key to use as a trigger source Cancel Trigger Press Type You can enable either an Up Down or Double Click response to a trigger press Normally when a trigger keyboard key etc is pressed and released a trigger down event is sent to the owner that is the application receiving the trigger press information followed by a trigger up If Double Click is chosen in this menu when the trigger is pressed released and then pressed again a double click event will occur If a mapping with the Up down type has also been configured for the same source it will only receive the first set of trigger events Module To Trigger This identifies the driver or application receiving the trigger presses Show All Modules By default inactive owners are not shown By checking this checkbox all owners both active and inactive are displayed Managed Programs Managed Programs lets you view download and install applications that are deployed by the System Center Mobile Device Manager a server side solution that helps enable IT to have control of their device deployment with respect to security management and access to the corporate network To access Managed Program WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 161 Chapter 6 Settings Memory Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab gt Mana
80. module to trigger Next you assign a trigger key for this example period To define the serial stream of data bytes to control the on and off function of the trigger key enter a hex value in the Trigger On Sequence and the Trigger Off Sequence fields When you press the trigger key the Trigger On Sequence is sent and when you release the trigger key the Trigger Off Sequence is sent turning the trigger key on and off WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 183 Chapter 6 Settings Ports Tab 6 33 4 2 Port Replicator Ports A B And C Scanner Settings er Yi ok Tether Port Sdevice COM21 Enabled off Baud 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Trigger On Sequence 00 00 00 Q Trigger Off Sequence 00 00 00 4 Port Replicator Port B COM6 Port Replicator Port C COM7 To change a setting press space or double click Pore The following COM ports are available COM5 COM6 and COMZ Note Each port provides identical parameters to help you set up the port you choose They are described in this section Enabled This parameter allows you to turn this port on enable and off Baud Double tapping on this parameter displays a pop up window in which you can choose an ap propriate baud rate Scanner Settings t Yi ok 184 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Ports Tab Data Bits This parameter determines the number of da
81. no fire no vent and no leakage Vibration resistance BS2011 Part After standard charge tested under the following 2 1 conditions Random vibration 5Hz 500Hz ASD FDC IEC68 0 02g2 Hz in 3 axis for 15 mins After which carry 2 37 out a standard discharge charge discharge No parting joints cracks or damage to connectors No leakage or critical damage Impact shock resist ance 3 cycles of 50G 11ms 1 2 sine pulse acceleration applied in 6 directions 18 shocks total ESD protection Accordance with EN61000 4 8 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 307 Chapter 8 Specifications Scanner Imager Model Numbers 8 4 Scanner Imager Model Numbers Scanner Imager Engine Kit Model No Form Factor 1D Laser SE955 WA9102 G1 End Cap without GSM WA9112 G1 End Cap with GSM WA9002 G1 Pod 1D Laser SE1223HP WA9000 G1 Pod 1D Laser SE1223LR WA9005 G1 Pod 1D Laser SE1524ER WA9009 End Cap includes a trigger back plate so that it can interface with the Flush Mount Pistol Grip WA6103 1D Imager EV15 WA9103 G1 End Cap without GSM WA9113 G1 End Cap with GSM WA9003 G1 Pod 2D Imager SX5400 WA9008 Pod 2D Imager HHP 5180 WA8010 G1 End Cap without GSM WA9212 G1 Slim Pod 8 5 Scanner Specifications 8 5 1 SE1223HP LR And SE955HP Specifications Scan Engine SE 1223HP SE 1223LR SE 955HP Scan Angle 42 2 230 2 47 3 default 35 3
82. o 191 6 34 4 Deleting a Profile o e ee 192 el A A EE A RAR 193 6 35 1 Advanced Interface And Network Settings 194 6 35 2 Advanced Services Settings ee 195 6 35 3 Radio Features 196 6 35 4 User System Setting mee 197 6 33 93 Registry Edito u sa d r a le tee eA 198 6 36 Windows Update ee 198 Navigation Bar Connectivity Hotkeys o o e 199 6 37 Connections Tabs eii e Bree hE ii 198 6 38 BEAM o nre i a a Ane E a eae ao 201 6 39 Bluetooth Setup ee 201 6 39 Pared Tabs tise ead ed Ss et a wy OMe Se aod Wwe a E a a a 202 6 39 2 Device Tabs ns at deer neon be ace ds 204 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 119 6 39 2 1 Discovering and Removing Devices 204 6 39 2 2 Filtering By Class of Device COD 205 6 39 2 3 Device Pop up Menu 2 2 ee 205 6 39 2 4 Pairinga Device ee 206 6 393 Servers Tabs oe cpa e Spee eh ee ee eee ne OS 208 6 39 4 Mode Taba Soe A oe Pea A er ls eS 209 6 39 5 About LADOS E ig E Seed amg ete Mer RORE ash Ge BS HR 210 6 39 6 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone o eee 210 6 40 Connection Properties e 212 6 40 Port Settings isc A a Td a 213 6 40 2 CalP Options sre ia a A ee Pe 214 6 41 Connections Connecting To The Internet
83. of an attachment not recommended or sold by the battery charger manufacturer may result in fire electric shock or personal injury To reduce risk of damage to the electric plug and cord when unplugging the charger pull the plug rather than the cord Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on tripped over or otherwise subjected to damage or stress Do not operate the charger with a damaged cord or plug Replace immediately Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow been dropped or otherwise damaged in any way it should be inspected by qualified service personnel WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 7 10 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Desktop Docking Station Do not disassemble the charger it should be repaired by qualified service personnel Incorrect reassembly may result in electric shock or fire To reduce risk of electric shock unplug the charger from the outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary Use of an improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock If an extension cord must be used make sure The plug pins on the extension cord are the same number size and shape as those on the charger The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition and that the wire size is larger than 16 AWG e e Do not expose the charger to
84. on the Menu option in the lower right comer of softkey bar and tap on Sort By You can choose from Status Priority Subject Start Date or Due Date The tasks are ar ranged in the list according to the criterion you chose Limiting the Tasks Displayed in the Task Screen Tap on Menu in the lower right corner of softkey bar and tap on Filter WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 69 Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Calendar of Upcoming Appointments 4 2 6 4 2 6 1 You can choose All Tasks Recently Viewed No Categories Active Tasks or Completed Tasks The tasks are displayed on the screen according to the preference you chose Calendar of Upcoming Appointments This option is used to map out all your upcoming appointments meetings and so on in the weeks months and years ahead MI Note You can synchronize the Calendar using ActiveSync so that any meetings appoint ments and so on are displayed on your WORKABOUT PRO Today screen as well as on your PC Refer to Synchronization on page 90 for details Tap on the Upcoming Appointments option in the Today screen or tap on Start gt Cal endar to display the calendar If your unit is running Windows Mobile 6 1 Classic you can tap on Calendar in the Softkey Bar Calendar Feb 12 10 SMT W Ti geen 2 Feb 12 10 SMTWT IE 3 ME Month Agenda The default calendar displays an Agenda of a
85. parameter provides two options Not Required but Transmitted if Read or Required and Transmitted Double tap on Addendum to display a dialog box listing your options Highlight an item and tap on OK When Addendum is set to Not Required but Transmitted if Read the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists appends it to the main bar code When the parameter is set to Required and Transmitted the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum Addendum Add on 2 And Addendum Add on 5 Enabling these parameters sets the length of the addendum bar code to either 2 or 5 characters Addendum Security If you tap on Addendum Security a dialog box is displayed in which you can define the security level of add on 2 or add on 5 with a value from 0 to 100 As security levels in crease the scanner decode speed decreases GTIN Compliant GTIN global trade item number processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14 character EAN UCC GTIN To use GTIN processing you must activate the EAN 128 symbology Important When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated it is not possible to read normal EAN 128 Codes Reading Range This parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned The default setting Extended allows for increased reading distance WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 49 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 93 D 4 10 Code 93 En
86. period To define the serial stream of data bytes to control the on and off function of the trigger key enter a hex value in the Trigger On Sequence and the Trigger Off Sequence fields When you press the trigger key the Trigger On Sequence is sent and when you release the trigger key the Trigger Off Sequence is sent turning the trigger key on and off Total Recall Total Recall is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to back up restore applications and settings Note In Windows Mobile 6 1 the registry and installed programs are stored in the Flash file system and are not lost on reset However in special cases where Psion Teklogix personnel find it necessary to perform a clean start this will reset not only the regis try settings to factory defaults but will also erase any files or applications stored or installed on the built in Flash file system including any Total Recall profiles This is why any data that needs to be protected must be stored on a SD MMC card or exter nally to the device on a USB memory stick or on a PC WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 6 34 1 Chapter 6 Settings Creating A Backup Profile Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab Tap on the Total Recall icon Total Recall Creating A Backup Profile Total Recall Create Profile Restore Profile View Profile Delete Profile Current AutoRestore Profile none In the start up screen y
87. pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified Activating Modifier Keys amp the Shift State Indicator When a modifier key is pressed it is represented in the shift state indicator icon in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen making it easier to determine whether or not a modi fier key is active If the shift state indicator icon is not visible you can only see the soft keyboard icon you may need to take a few steps to display the shift state indicator icon Tap on Start gt Settings followed by the Buttons icon Tap on the One Shots tab at the bottom of the screen WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 41 Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO Modifier Keys Tap in the check box next to Show modifier key state to display the shift state indicator icon Figure 3 4 Shift State Indicator Icon Word Mobile ex di 9 50 bk Word Mobile 4 46 9 39 lok Activating Modifiier Keys Activating Modifiier Keys Shift State Indicator Icon replaces Soft Keyboard Icon Soft Keyboard Icon 3 4 2 2 Locking Modifier Keys Note The locking behaviour of the modifier keys can be changed so that for example pressing a modifier key once will lock the key on Refer to One Shots on page 127 for details Note too that by default the FN ORANGE key is locked on when pressed only once When a modifier key is locked on it will remain active until it is pressed again
88. recognize Tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on the System tab followed by the Teklogix Scanner icon 1234 Teklogix Scanners Advanced Options 2D Scanning Options Data Options Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPCA UPC E To change a setting press space or double click 174 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 6 33 1 A 6 33 2 Chapter 6 Settings Bar Code Settings The Scanner Menu Bar Code Settings The Scanner Menu The drop down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose from one of the following Decoded internal Decoded HHP and Decoded Intermec ISCP The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the bar codes 1t supports Important Appendix D Bar Code Settings provides descriptions of the bar codes listed in the scanner menus Options Tab This tab allows you to tailor the double click parameters and the display options associated with your scanner Scanner Settings t Yi ok Internal scanner Non configurable Data handling To change a setting press space or double click opeons Trino Pore 5 6 33 2 1 Double Click Parameters Click Time msec This parameter controls the maximum gap time in milliseconds for a double click If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time it is con sidered a doub
89. reset to OS bypass BooSt 32 communication ActiveSync 14 89 data transfer 14 Ethernet connection desktop dock 267 Ethernet connection quad dock 273 Vista 15 WORKABOUT to PC 14 266 COM Port Manager 152 Composite D 18 34 D 56 Concatenation 28 connecting to a server with 1 4 connection cancelling modem 2 4 Connection Properties serial modem 2 2 Connections 198 editing settings 223 Internet 2 4 Index managing 223 modem setup 2 5 network selecting 224 network cards setting up 220 Proxy Server setup 225 VPN setting up 222 connections managing 222 Connections Internet 2 4 connectivity hotkey 63 Continuous Scan Mode D 3 D 20 D 43 Control Panel Predefined presets C 2 Conv UPC E To UPC A D 2 Conv UPC E1 To UPC A D 12 Convert To Code 32 D 7 Convert To EAN 13 D 16 D 47 D 48 Convert To UPC A D 48 Copyright information operating system 147 cradle See also Picker cradle 276 credit card wait for modem setup 2 4 Custom preset C D Data Bits 8 185 Data Bits modem setup 2 3 data entry modes handwriting 99 typing 99 Data Handling code page 177 Data Matrix 2D 37 date setting 65 debug error handling 153 Decoded HHP Scanner 20 Decoded Internal Scanner D 2 Decoded internal scanner parameters D 2 Decoded Intermec ISCP parameters D 42 decoded scanner D 2 Decode Performance D 8 D 10 Decode Performance Level D 8 D 10 Decoding symbology Predefined symbology C 2 Default Pred
90. roles a Push Server and a Push Client Push Server is the device that provides an object exchange server Push Client is the device that pushes and pulls objects to and from the Push Server OBEX OPP contains the following unique menu option Send File displays an Open File dialog box where the file to be sent can be selected When the transmission begins another dialog box tracks the progress of the file transmission WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 203 Chapter 6 Settings Device Tab 6 39 2 6 39 2 1 HSP HFP Headset Profile Hands Free Profile Service Commands The ASP Headset Profile allows users to connect their device to Bluetooth enabled head sets and other audio devices HSP HFP services provide the following unique menu options e Connect Audio establishes an audio connection to the Bluetooth headset e Disconnect Audio disconnects the audio connection from the Bluetooth headset Volume Control displays a dialog box where the headset and microphone volume can be adjusted Device Tab i Bluetooth Select device to start pairing Name Address TORPSG 011 001E37AE4D96 This tab discovers and displays Bluetooth devices Discovering and Removing Devices Scan discovers Bluetooth devices in range of the WORKABOUT PRO and lists them in this tab Any existing devices previously discovered and listed will also be displayed Clear removes all Bluetooth devices liste
91. s esii a Ra Pw ee a 109 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 87 88 5 12 3 Deleting Photo o a a a ee 109 5 12 4 Editing a Photo ce ae doce Seek wy Rh chy hs Rd sd wR OE 109 5 12 5 Creating a Slide Show 1 109 5 13 Internet Explorer e 110 5 13 1 Browsing Web Sites 0 0 110 IA Messaging a ed a a A A a al 111 AGA Folders a a a A dd 111 5 14 2 Synchronizing E mail with Outlook 112 5 14 3 Changing Synchronization Settings o o o 113 5 15 Remote Desktop Mobile o e 114 5 15 1 Connecting to a Terminal Server 2 2 2 o 114 5 15 2 Disconnecting without Ending a Session 000 114 5 15 3 Ending a Sessione see gcd wees ea eee Gh hoe hw Rael 114 5 16 Summit Client Utility SCU 2 2 ee ee ee ee 115 Sly Search sa swe ket IA AS le ea A ee 115 5 18 ask Manager ida cents cee ei Fh ee eh a ee a deed ee 116 O A ext ts ett fe E fae dads eas he Sag ob tiple aids ag tah geek Hook 116 5 20 Windows lave ie be epee eles Gerke ee A ee eed Gee ae 116 5 21 Windows Media gi sani fe eh a ee Eb Swe Sod eee 116 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 5 Programs Programs 5 1 Programs The Programs menu provides access to all the applications available on your hand held Tap on Start gt Programs to display this screen T
92. security is enabled you will be prompted to enter a PIN before you are allowed to use the phone AN Note Whenever this option is enabled or disabled you will be asked to enter your PIN 28 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Managing Phone Settings 2 8 3 3 Services Tab To access settings for a service select it from the following list and tap Get Settings Call Barring Caller ID Call Forwarding Call Waiting Voice Mail and Text Messages Fixed Dialing Phone Services The Services tab allows you to customize the behaviour of your phone You can for exam ple block all incoming calls tailor to whom your caller ID will be transmitted set up call forwarding and so on Tap on the service you want to set up Tap on Get Settings The service dialog boxes allow you to tailor your available services to meet your require ments Remember that when a particular service dialog box you ve chosen is displayed you can always tap on Start gt Help to get additional information Voice Mail Setup If your service includes Voice Mail a temporary passcode is automatically assigned It is mailed to you as a text message Tap on Start gt Messaging to display your temporary passcode To activate your voice mail From a land line dial your wireless phone number Allow the WORKABOUT PRO to ring until it is automatically picked up by the voice mail ser
93. tap on the Remove button A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation C 4 13 Configuring Symbologies in the Teklogix Imagers Applet All changes made in the Symbologies Presets in the Imagers Applet are also made in the Scanners Applet The Scanner Applet will reflect the settings of whichever Symbologies Preset is made active in the Imager Applet C 16 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 4 14 Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Filter Tab Manipulating Bar Code Data Configuring Symbologies In The Teklogix Scanners Applet When a symbology is enabled or configured using the Teklogix Scanners applet the changes are also made in the My Default preset My Default automatically becomes the active bar code symbology preset None of the other bar code decoding predefined presets is changed Configuring Symbologies In The My Default Preset When My Default is the active preset In this case the changes to the symbology configuration are also made in the Teklogix Scan ners applet When My Default is not the active preset In this case the changes to the symbology configuration are not made in the Teklogix Scan ners applet Filter Tab Manipulating Bar Code Data To configure rules for manipulating bar code data Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon and then tap on the Filt
94. the Power dialog box Tap on the Built in Devices tab and tap in the checkbox next to Enable Bluetooth e Next tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections tab gt Bluetooth icon Tap on the Mode tab and check Turn on Bluetooth Tap OK Turn your Bluetooth device on and place it within a few feet of your WORKABOUT PRO e Ifneeded set your Bluetooth device to visible discoverable so that the hand held can detect it and establish a connection Pairing a Device To pair devices Follow the manufacturer s instructions to place the remote device in pairing mode 52 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO Pairing a Bluetooth Device e Choose the Devices tab and tap on the Scan button to scan for devices in the area e When the scan is complete tap and hold the stylus on the device to which you want to pair In the pop up Device menu tap on Pair An Authentication dialog box is displayed Bluetooth Authentication Enter a passcode to establish a secure connection To proceed without authentication press Next Cancel Next e Ifthe remote device has authentication enabled type the PIN in this dialog box To proceed without authentication tap on Next Note Ifa remote device has authentication enabled and you ve skipped the authentication process a pop up screen will ask if you want to allow the remote device to connect to the WORKABOUT PRO
95. the WORKABOUT PRO This is a view only screen WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 165 Chapter 6 Settings Built In Devices 6 27 4 Built In Devices Enable audio power savings Enable Bluetooth Built in Devices Built In Devices Power Status This section of the dialog box allows you to enable provide power to the device s installed in your unit Keep in mind that the content of this screen varies depending on the devices in stalled in your hand held Tapping on OK activates your selections 6 27 5 Card Slots Slot Power Status CF SummitDC 802 11g_SC_CF SDIO Empty Slot Apply car Sr Slot Power Status When you select one or more of the card slots listed power is supplied to the enabled slot s Clicking on the Apply button activates your selections Keep in mind that if the characters on this button appear in grey typeface the checked slots have already been enabled 166 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Suspend Threshold 6 27 6 Suspend Threshold This applet allows you to determine the amount of battery power that you want to reserve in the main battery to protect the data stored in the WORKABOUT PRO Maximize Maximize backup operating time Main Battery Status Good Estimated Battery Backup Time 20h Card Slots Suspend Threshold Wakeup Kaa S 6 27 6 1 Suspend Threshold And Est
96. the identity of the servers with which you can connect Personal Tab ne Settings omg Yi Z lok Manage Certificates Use personal certificates to positively identify yourself to others Issued By Expires The Personal tab lists the name of the certificate issuer and the expiration date e To view additional information about a personal certificate tap on a certificate in the list e To delete a certificate tap and hold the stylus on the item you want to delete until a pop up menu is displayed Tap on the Delete command 150 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Certificates Intermediate Certificates The items in this list help identify intermediate certification authorities Settings cg Yi ok Manage Certificates Use intermediate certificates to positively identify intermediate certification authorities ma o Root Certificates Settings mg Yi lt lok Manage Certificates Use root certificates to positively identify root certification authorities Thawte Server CA 12 31 20 Thawte Premium Server 12 31 20 Starfield Class 2 Certific 6 29 2034 Secure Server Certificati 1 7 10 http www valicert com 6 25 19 GTE CyberTrust Global 8 13 18 Go Daddy Class 2 Certifi 6 29 2034 GlobalSign Root CA 1 28 14 GeoTrust Global CA 5 20 22 Equifax Secure Certificat 8 22 18 To view details about a certificate who issued the certificate to whom
97. the right sides of the unit SCAN keys acti vate the scanner beam For units that do not have internal scanners these keys can be remapped to serve other functions Volume Keys UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW The volume keys are located above the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW The UP ARROW key the increase volume key is labelled with a plus symbol y The _ DOWN ARROW key the decrease volume key is labelled with a minus symbol Y The Function Keys With the exception of the QWERTY keyboard which has 10 function keys the WORK ABOUT PRO keyboard is equipped with a total of 14 function keys On the alpha and numeric keyboards function keys F 1 to F4 are located across the top of the keyboard to the left a right of the Scan key these function keys are directly accessible a key combina tion is not required Ten additional function keys are colour coded in blue print on the unit body these keys are accessed by executing a key combination FN BLUE followed by the appropriate key For example to access function key F7 on a numeric keyboard e Press the FN BLUE key followed by the 7 key the numeric key to which function key F7 is mapped e To access function key F8 press FN BLUE 8 and so on The Macro Keys WORKABOUT PRO C Only WORKABOUT PRO C hand helds are equipped with a series of macro keys that can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes along with the function of
98. to as trigger consumer s of the trigger source Along with keyboard keys trigger sources can also be grip triggers external hard ware triggers or software based When the specified key is pressed the trigger consumer for example a decoded scanner is sent a message Important It is not possible to have two or more identical mappings for example F1 cannot be mapped to the Non Decoded Scanner twice even if the trigger type is different A keyboard key that is used as a trigger source will no longer generate key data or perform its normal function For example if the space button is used as a trigger source it will not be able to send space characters to applications Double Click When a key is pressed and released then pressed again within the configured time between 0 to 1000 milliseconds a double click occurs See also Trigger Press Type on page 161 Show All Modules By default the trigger mapping list only shows active mappings Mappings for drivers or applications that are not currently active are not normally displayed By checking this checkbox all mappings both active and inactive are displayed Add Tapping this button brings up the Add mapping dialog see below so that you can add new trigger mappings Edit Tapping this button brings up the Edit mapping dialog so that you can edit existing trigger mappings Remove Tapping this button removes an existing mapping OK The OK but
99. to unlock or turn it off To help you identify when a modifier key is locked on the key is represented in the shift state indicator icon with a black frame around it Figure 3 5 Shift State Indicator Icon Locked Modifier Key Once a modifier key is unlocked or turned off it is no longer displayed in the shift state in dicator icon 42 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 3 4 3 Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO The Keys The Keys The SHIFT Key The SHIFT key is used to display uppercase alpha characters and provide access to the symbols above the numeric keys You can lock this key on so that when you press an alpha key an upper case character is displayed When you press a numeric key the associated symbol on the numeric key is displayed on the screen If you press the SHIFT key twice it is locked on essentially acting as a CAPS key dis playing uppercase characters In this state if you type a numeric key the number rather than the symbol above it is displayed Press SHIFT again to turn the CAPS function off The Arrow Keys The grey Arrow keys are located near the top of the keyboard directly below the SCAN bar The arrow keys move the cursor around the screen up down left and right The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you type will appear The BKSP DEL Key The BKSP key sometimes referred to as
100. using the Teklogix Scanner applet are synchronized only with the My Defaults bar code symbology preset For details refer to Configuring Symbologies in the Teklogix Imagers Applet on page C 16 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 21 APPENDIX D BAR CODE SETTINGS D 1 Scanner Menu A Teklogix Scanners sE Scanner Settings r Y ok Scanner Decoded internal F Advanced Options 2D Scanning Options Data Options Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A UPC E 7 To change a setting press space or double click Barcodes Opts Trandate Pore The drop down menu to the right ofthe Scanner option allows you to choose from one of the following scanner types used with your WORKABOUT Decoded in ternal Decoded HHP or Decoded Intermec ISCP The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the bar codes it supports A Important To improve the decode speed and performance enable only those codes that are required by the application Keep in mind that some bar code types are only available when an internal imaging scanner is installed All internal scanners can be configured using the Barcode dialog boxes WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 1 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Decoded Internal Scanner D 2 Decoded Internal Scanner Advanced Options 2D Scanning Options Data Option
101. you ve completed your edits tap on OK C 18 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Translation Tab Configuring Rules C 4 15 Translation Tab Configuring Rules Translation rules enable the automatic processing of bar code data Up to 10 cases can be de fined each consisting of up to 10 sequential rules Note Changes made to the translations configuration using the Teklogix Scanner Con trol Panel program are synchronized with changes made here Changes made in either place affect both translation tables Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon and then tap on the Translation tab PTS Imager Settim Y 47 Fy 42 ok eRe Css Case 2 empty Case 3 empty Case 4 empty Case 5 empty Case 6 empty Case 7 empty Case 8 empty Case 9 empty Case 10 empty Filter Translations Advanced About 4T For instructions on adding editing and removing translation rules refer to the Translations Tab on page 177 C 4 16 Advanced Tab C 4 16 1 File Locations For Captured Images To configure the location for saved images open the dialog box as follows Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon and then tap on the Translation tab To define the location where imager files will be stored WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 19 A
102. you need to choose a port from the Select Port drop down menu before you can enable Printer Port WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 209 Chapter 6 Settings About Tab 6 39 5 6 39 6 About Tab js Bluetooth Device Name WORKABOUTPRO3 Local Address 0026B63B8D87 HCI Version 3 3164 LMP Version 3 3164 Component 2 1 0 Profiles Serial Client Server OBEX Client Server HSP HFP HID host DUN DT MEMENTO Device Name displays the broadcasted name of the WORKABOUT PRO The name can be changed in the About applet tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab gt About icon Tap on the Device ID and change the name Local Address displays the MAC address BD_Addr of the Bluetooth chip HCI Version amp LMP Version display the version of the chip firmware Component indicates the version of the Psion Teklogix Bluetooth Subsystem the manager drivers etc Profiles lists the supported profiles on this specific WORKABOUT PRO The Bluetooth GPRS Phone Once you ve completed the Bluetooth settings you can go ahead and set up communication through your Bluetooth equipped phone 210 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings The Bluetooth GPRS Phone Before you begin make certain that the Bluetooth phone is turned on that the Bluetooth radios in your WORKABOUT PRO and phone are enabled turned on and that the hand held and phone are within 10 metr
103. you to log onto a Windows Terminal Server and run the desktop pro grams from the server on your WORKABOUT PRO Connecting to a Terminal Server Tap on Start gt Programs gt Remote Desktop Mobile In the Server dialog box type the Terminal Server name or TCP IP address or choose a server from the drop down menu e Tap on Connect Inthe Remote Desktop Connection window type your user name password and domain if required Tap on OK Disconnecting without Ending a Session Important These commands are accessed from the Start menu in the Terminal Services screen used to access the PC s commands Do NOT use the Start menu on your WORKABOUT PRO Inthe Remote Desktop Connection window tap on Start gt Shutdown e Tap on Disconnect gt OK Ending a Session Inthe Terminal Services Client screen tap on Start gt Shutdown Tap on Log Off gt OK 114 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 5 Programs Summit Client Utility SCU 5 16 Summit Client Utility SCU scu The SCU provides the utilities you will need to configure the Summit 802 11g Compact Flash radio module model number RA2041 so that it can communicate through a wireless LAN network effectively and securely Refer to Using the SCU to Connect to the WLAN on page 17 for setup details 5 17 Search P Search Tap Start gt Programs and then tap on the Search icon a q 8 12 Search for
104. your device Guava Bubbles ikon Windows Default Windows Mobile 6 1 Windows Mobile Green Oo Use this picture as the background Appearance Items This screen allows you to customize the background displayed on the Today screen e Choose the background you want to use from the list 6 12 2 Items This tab allows you to choose and to sort the item s that you want listed in the Today screen Tap in the checkbox to the left of the item s you want displayed in the Today screen WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 145 Chapter 6 Settings System Tab Settings 6 13 6 14 146 To rearrange the list of items highlight the item you want to move up or down and tap on the Move Up or Move Down button Keep in mind that the Date cannot be moved System Tab Settings To display the icons grouped in the System tab Tap on Start gt Settings and tap on the System tab H Q j About Device Backlight Certificates Clock amp Encryption Alarms Managed Memory Power 5 Y Remove Screen Programs it Teklogix Scanners Error External GPS Manage i Triggers Tsk Managed Memory Personal System Connections Total Recall Personal System Connections l About B About Tapping on Start gt Settings gt System tab and then the About icon displays a grouping of tabs that provide device information Version Tab This tab outlines the Win
105. your text input method To use your stylus to handwrite on the screen tap on the pen icon p pa AN Important Refer to Entering Text on page 83 for text entry details 5 11 2 e Compose your note using the method you ve chosen Tap on OK when you re done Your note is automatically saved The file name is the first line of the note if you used the keyboard otherwise it s named Notel Note2 and so on Converting Handwritten Notes to Text When you use the pen tool you can write notes in your own handwriting and keep them as is if you like You can also teach the WORKABOUT PRO to recognize your handwriting and convert it into printed text To convert handwriting into text 104 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 5 Programs Converting Handwritten Notes to Text Tap on the pen tool VA and compose a note using your stylus y Notes 42 4 3 31 ok re Cogniter Tap on Menu gt Tools gt Recognize The text in the note is converted from handwritten to printed text Note To convert only a specific portion of your handwritten note into printed type tap the stylus just before the first letter of the text pause for a second and then drag your stylus across the text you want to select Then tap on Tools gt Recognize to convert only the highlighted text Failed Conversions The Recognize tool sometimes gets the conversion wrong If some
106. 0 7 17 2 Battery Charge Duration 200500 te A R ee ew eee ds 270 7 17 3 Charge Indicators Single Battery Charge LED 0 0 ce cce cece eens 270 Quad Battery Charger Model WA3004 G1 0c cece cence eee e eee e ene eenes 271 Charging Battenes 23 Juve do de ded teysdassdos sss eee e obo Se 271 Battery Charge Duration 00 cece ec cece ence n ee ce eee ee rr 271 Charge Indicators The LEDs ysi sosincs iE rE EEEE EA adi 271 Troubleshooting lt lt lt ccs a 272 7 22 1 Excessive Charge Duration 000 cc cece c eect e eee e eee e tees eeeneeees 272 7 22 2 Indicator Flashing Red cee cee ccc eee rieel 272 7 22 3 Power LED Does Not Light Up 0 cece cece eee c nee nora 272 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 7 23 7 24 7 25 7 26 7 27 7 28 7 29 7 30 7 31 7 32 7 33 Contents 7 22 4 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed 0 cece eee 272 Quad Docking Station WA4204 G2 amp WA4304 G2 0 cece cece eens 273 7 23 1 Quad Docking Station Setup 00 cece cee ect eee eee eee enn teen eees 273 7 2352 Quad Indicators oii oor nie L a CORNES 274 7 23 3 Inserting A WORKABOUT In The Quad Docking Station 274 1 234 NetWork ACCESS seanda oia EEEE EEEE Ee solide pile E EEI 274 7 23 5 Battery Charging LED Behaviour ooooooococoocoronncrcnnrrrrrrrr 275 7 23 6 Troubleshoot es oct EE
107. 1 12 18 24 36 48 54 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual A 3 Appendix A Summit Client Utility SCU SCU Security Capabilities Radio ated Attrbut Description Value Default Radio Used by 802 11g when interact B rates only 1 2 5 5 amp 11 BG rates Mode ing with access point Mbps optimized G rates only 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 and 54 Mbps BG rates full All B and G rates BG rates optimized 1 2 5 5 6 11 24 36 amp 54 Mbps Auth Type 802 11 authentication type used Open shared key or LEAP Net Open when associating with access point work EAP EAP Type Extensible Authentication Protocol None LEAP EAP FAST PEAP None type used for 802 1X authentica MSCHAP tion to access point To use EAP TLS you must use WZC Credentials Authentication credentials for the User Username or Domain User None selected EAP type name up to 64 characters Refer to EAP Credentials on Password up to 64 characters page A 6 For PEAP CA Cert CA server certificate filename Encryption Type of encryption used to protect None Manual WEP Auto WEP None transmitted data generated during EAP authenti cation WPA PSK WPA TKIP WPA2 PSK WPA2 TKIP WPA2 AES CCKM TKIP For Manual WEP Up to four static WEP keys For PSK ASCII passphrase or hex PSK EAP Type Encryption Security settings These settings allow you to enhance the
108. 12 RS232 RTS 13 RS232 DSR 14 RS232 DTR 15 RS232 DCD 16 RS232 RI 17 Ground 18 Ground B 2 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual B 3 B 4 Appendix B Port Pinouts Battery Contact Pinout WA3006 WA3010 PIN Signal Name 19 Ground 20 Ground Battery Contact Pinout WA3006 amp WA3010 PIN Signal Name Function 1 P Power Pin for Battery Pack Negative 2 DQ Maxim DS2762 Data 3 TH GND Ground 4 P Power Pin for Battery Pack Positive 5 PS Power Switch Sensor Plastic Rip 6 P Power Pin for Battery Pack Negative Positive Female Battery Connector HHHH uD putt Plastic Rip WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual B 3 APPENDIX C TEKLOGIX IMAGERS APPLET C 1 C 2 The Teklogix Imagers applet is used to create modify delete and activate imager settings The principle uses of the applet are to decode bar codes and to capture images A Demonstration Application is provided to demonstrates how the imager works Refer to PTSI Imager Demo on page 101 for details Required Applets In order to configure imaging the Manage Triggers and Teklogix Scanners applets must be present in the Settings gt System tab along with the Teklogix Imagers applet Presets There are two methods that can be used to configure an imager using the Teklogix Imagers applet e Use a predefined preset e Create a custom preset base
109. 128 Code 39 Code 93 12 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 Codabar MSI Plessey WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 309 Chapter 8 Specifications SE1223HP LR And SE955HP Specifications 8 5 1 1 8 5 1 2 310 SE 1223HP Decode Zone Minimum 4 844 Lux to 86 112 Lux Maximum Range Width of Field Range Width of Field Mil Size Inches Inches Inches Inches 5 2 75 1 25 7 3 TS 2 25 1 11 4 10 1 75 0 5 15 75 6 UPC 2 1 22 9 15 2 1 25 10 20 2 1 30 12 5 40 3 75 56 23 55 5 66 25 SE 1223LR Decode Zone 4 844 Lux to 86 112 Lux Minimum width of Field Maximum width of Field Range Range Mil Size Inches Inches Inches Inches 10 11 2 24 5 15 7 5 1 39 8 20 7 5 1 48 10 40 10 2 90 19 55 10 2 120 24 70 reflective 48 200 40 100 reflective 60 240 48 High quality symbols in normal room light WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 8 5 1 3 SE 955HP Decode Zone 4 mil Chapter 8 Specifications SE1524ER Scanner Specifications Decode Zone Typical 1 0 in 5 5 in 2 54 cm 13 97 cm 5 mil 1 25 in 8 in 3 18 cm 20 32 cm 7 5 mil 1 5 in 13 25 in 3 81 cm 33 66 cm 10 mil UPC 100 1 5 in 17 5 in 3 81 cm 44 45 cm 1 5 in 23 5 in 3 81 cm 59 69 cm 15 mil 1 5 in 29 5 in 3 81 cm 74 93 cm 20 mil 1 75 in 35 5 in 4 45 cm 90 17 cm 40 mil 55 mil
110. 17 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Matrix 2 of 5 Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Matrix 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Matrix 2 of 5 Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 1 to 80 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details IATA 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable IATA 2 of 5 Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 1 to 48 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 31 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Discrete 2 of 5 D 3 18 Discrete 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Discrete 2 of 5 Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable
111. 170 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Task Manager e Tap Start gt Settings gt System tab and then tap on the Screen icon A Important Refer to Aligning Calibrating the Touchscreen on page 47 for details 6 31 Task Manager The Task Manager screen lists all running tasks applications or processes This applet pro vides a number of options to manage these Tap on Start gt Settings Tap on the System tab and then the Task Manager icon the Task Manager screen is opened Task Manager Messaging Task Manager End Task ES To shut down an application highlight the program in the list and tap on the End Task softkey in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen Task Manager Menu The Task Manager menu provides additional options to help you manage your applications WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 171 Chapter 6 Settings Task Manager Tap on the Menu softkey in the taskbar E Task Manager ing Y do Xx Application Mem cru ActiveSync 744K 15 Word Mobile Task Manager 156K Switch To End All Tasks View Sort By Refresh Exit End Task ES Menu e Switch To Makes the highlighted application active End All Tasks Shuts down all applications listed e View Allows you to list either all running applications or all processes Sort By Allows you to sort active applications or processes based on Memory size
112. 2 19 PDF 417 Enable Setting this parameter to on enables PDF 417 two dimensional 2D coding Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 18 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Appendix D Bar Code Settings Micro PDF 417 D 2 20 Micro PDF 417 Enable Setting this parameter to on enables Micro PDF 417 bar code scanning Micro PDF 417 is a multi row symbology that is useful for applications requiring greater area efficiency but lower data capacity than PDF 417 Code 128 Emulation When this parameter is enabled the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF 417 symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols If Code 128 Emulation is enabled the following Micro PDF 417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes C1 if the first codeword is 903 907 912 914 915 C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 CO if the first codeword is 910 or 911 If Code 128 Emulation is set to off the Micro PDF 417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes E3 if the first codeword is 903 907 912 914 915 L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 JES if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windo
113. 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Interleaved 2 of 5 Set Length L1 And Set Length L2 Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 can be set for Any length Length within a range One dis crete length or Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 4 to 14 Check Digit Verification When enabled this parameter checks the integrity of an I 2 of 5 symbol to ensure it complies with a specified algorithm either USS Uniform Symbology Specifica tion or OPCC Optical Product Code Council Transmit Check Digit If this parameter is enabled the check digit is included with the bar code data Convert To EAN 13 If this parameter is enabled the I 2 of 5 bar code is converted to EAN 13 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 2 16 Discrete 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to
114. 35 3 Radio Features Fe TweakIT Settings Pdi a ok a Interface and Network Settings Services Settings es AAA 22 1 AP Density 24 2 Radio Power Managemen 4 scvenced ur Reon cano AP Density Radio Features 1 AP Density AP Density z This option allows you to determine the signal strength at which the WORKABOUT PRO radio will begin searching for a new Access Point AP High Medium or Low If this option is set to High the radio will begin searching for a new Access Point while still at a fairly strong signal strength Setting AP Density to Low will cause the radio to wait until the signal strength is significantly low before attempting to connect to another Access Point Depending on your site configuration for example the shelving the Access Point cover age etc a higher setting may improve through put increase and maintain signal strength and reduce missed transmissions Radio Power Management Radio Features 2 Radio Power Management o Enable Radio Power Management Cancel Default When this option is enabled access points that support it will use Radio Power Management guidelines to control the WORKABOUT PRO radio Access points determine how often 196 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings User System Setting the WORKABOUT PRO radio enters sleep mode when no activity
115. A A A ee eS 166 6 27 6 Suspend Threshold o o 167 6 27 6 1 Suspend Threshold And Estimated Battery Backup 167 6 27 7 Wakeup Keys Tabir c rins a bo aa avin a WOR EW Reh Me ee 168 6 27 8 Suspend Mode 3 23 028 etek a ck ee Mo a Res 168 118 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 6 28 R gional Settings orcos ia ii Mee EAS Rise Ae io 169 6 29 Remove Programs ooo deis we ke Bh nd oa Ae sic aoe 170 6 30 Screen co ita A ds eee an dt a de o do as 170 6 31 Task Manage 171 6 32 Teklogix Imagers Settings ooo a a 173 6 33 Teklogix Scanners Settings ee 174 6 33 1 Bar Code Settings The Scanner Menu aooaa aaa aa 175 633 2 Options Tabi 4 ou p ye ce Re a ae Bo BE a ee ae N 175 6 33 2 1 Double Click Parameters 175 6 33 2 2 Display Parameters 176 6 33 2 3 Data Handling ee ee 177 6 33 3 Translations Tab iii wee A be Be Be a aE es 177 6 33 3 1 Case Rules 2 ee 179 6 3354 Ports Tab il Stn tee Ge Pee he ae he RA Ge 180 6 33 4 1 Tether Port A device COM21 o o o o ooo 181 6 33 4 2 Port Replicator Ports A B AndC 184 6 34 Total Recall 20 0 6 3 t4 ye eae aed YE wn Gk we ae oe ee OS he eS 186 6 34 1 Creating A Backup Profile 187 6 34 2 Restoring A Profile si mir cara Be eee e ia 190 6 34 3 Viewing a Profile
116. ABOUT PRO One Note With PC OneNote Connect the WORKABOUT PRO to your PC using either a USB cable or Bluetooth When the connection is complete take one of the following steps WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 97 Chapter 5 Programs Word Mobile In Microsoft ActiveSync on your PC choose Sync or On your WORKABOUT PRO tap on Start gt ActiveSync and then tap on Sync During synchronization the notes you created on your WORKABOUT PRO are copied to a new Office OneNote 2007 notebook called OneNote Mobile on your PC When synchroni zation is done you can drag the transferred notes into any other sections and other notebooks on your PC RN Note Ifyou prefer to synchronize WORKABOUT PRO notes automatically you can set up ActiveSync so that synchronization is continuous or occurs on a schedule In ActiveSync on your PC in the Tools menu tap Options and then tap on the Schedule tab 5 5 3 Word Mobile mw Word Mobile If you ve used Microsoft Word on your Mac or PC Word Mobile will be familiar to you Keep in mind however that Word Mobile is designed for a small screen and limited memory nN Note Keep in mind also that a Word document created on your PC can lose key formatting features such as styles and tables if you make changes to it on your WORKABOUT PRO Tap on Start gt Programs gt Office Mobile gt Word Mobile If Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu tap on Start
117. Attendees No attendees Status Busy Sensitivity Normal X Appointment Notes If you want to be reminded in advance of an appointment Inthe Reminder field choose Remind me from the drop down menu WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 71 Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Calendar of Upcoming Appointments Inthe second Reminder field tap on the number in the field to display a drop down menu where you can define a numeric value of 1 5 10 15 30 Tap on minute s to display a drop down menu from which you can choose the time unit for your reminder minute s hour s day s or week s e Tap OK to finish You are returned to the view you were in before adding the reminder Tap on the appointment in the Calendar screen to display it in a summary screen The reminder is indicated by the small bell icon g Calendar Lunch 12 00p 1 00p Sat 2 13 2010 4 2 6 3 Using Categories Categories help you organize and track the different types of data you keep on your hand held To assign an appointment to a category Tap on an appointment in the Today screen In the Calendar screen tap on the appointment again 72 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Calendar of Upcoming Appointments Tap the Categories field to display the Categories screen Tap in the checkbox next to the category to which you
118. BOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Index EAN 8 D 10 25 D 47 IATA 2of5 31 Interleaved 2 of 5 D 16 30 D 53 Matrix 2of5 31 D 54 MSI Plessey D 14 29 D 51 UPCA D II 25 D 48 UPCE D II 26 D 48 Translation tab 177 bar code reader integrated scanner operation of 280 batteries a description of 259 backup 11 battery cover secure 259 battery cover standard version 12 Battery Details tab 165 battery hotkey 64 Battery info tab 164 battery power managing 163 Battery Power tab 148 battery settings 164 charging 11 39 installing 37 installing main battery 12 main battery 11 pinouts B 3 removing 37 run time 50 storing 51 swap time 38 battery charger safety instructions 262 263 battery cover secure 259 battery cover standard version 12 battery power managing 163 battery specifications 296 high capacity WA3006 296 super high capacity WA3010 302 Baud 81 154 Baud Rate modem setup 2 3 beeper beep conditions 49 volume adjustment 50 Bi Direction Redundancy D 5 Block Recognizer 85 Bluetooth 52 pairing devices 52 Bluetooth devices pairing 206 Bluetooth microphone adjusting volume 142 Bluetooth radio ISM band 20 Bluetooth setup peripherals 283 Bluetooth setup 201 Device tab 204 GPRS setup 2 0 Mode tab 209 Paired tab 202 Servers tab 208 Bluetooth specs 296 BooSt menu accessing 3 boot reset 31 Built In Devices tab 166 Built in Devices tab 166 built in microphone adjusting volume 142 Butt
119. BOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 141 Chapter 6 Settings Microphone 6 8 Microphone Microphone t Yi ok Built in Microphone y Default Default an Use this dialog box to adjust the gain for the specific microphones associated with your hand held Tap on the drop down menu and choose the microphone for which you want to adjust the gain Microphone er Yi ok Built in Microphone Built in Microphone Headset Microphone Bluetooth Microphone T Slide the tab at the top of the dialog box to the left to decrease the gain and to the right to increase the gain Tapping on the Default button sets the current microphone you ve chosen to the default gain Tapping on Default All sets all microphones listed to their default gain 142 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Owner Information 6 9 Owner Information Owner Information This icon allows you to add your personal information to the WORKABOUT PRO Some of this information will be displayed in the desktop Today screen AN Important Refer to Ownership Information on page 67 for details about this option 6 10 Phone Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional Only Q This option allows you to adjust phone settings such as the ring type and tone choose phone services such as barring calls and you can also determine network selections AN Important
120. CPU or application or process Name e Refresh Updates the list of applications or processes Exit Closes the Task Manager 172 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Teklogix Imagers Settings 6 32 Teklogix Imagers Settings The Teklogix Imagers applet is used to create modify delete and activate imager settings The principle uses of the applet are to decode bar codes and to capture images Note This icon is only when displayed when the appropriate imager is installed in your hand held To launch this applet Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab and then tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon fis Taklogix Imagers PTS Imager Settim Y a e ok Camera Presets hd Low light near View Add Activate R Read W Write A Active sco Barcoding Fier Transiter E A Important Refer to Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet for details about this applet A PTSI Imager demo applet is also provided to illustrate how the imager works WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 173 Chapter 6 Settings Teklogix Scanners Settings Tap on Start gt Programs and then tap on the PTSI Imager icon eeu PTS Front Imager PTS 6 33 Teklogix Scanners Settings The Teklogix Scanners icon in the Settings menu provides access to dialog boxes in which you can tailor bar code options and choose the bar codes your scanner will
121. Carrying Case for WORKABOUT PRO C Model Number varies depending on the type end cap installed on the hand held WA6090 G2 with a belt clip works with scanners WA6094 G2 with GSM or 802 11b g end cap WA6095 G2 with 1D Scan or 1D Imager end cap WA6096 G2 with 2D scan or 1D imager end cap WA6097 G2 with universal end cap case s top open Protective Carrying Case for WORKABOUT PRO s Model Number varies depending on the type end cap installed on the hand held WA6190 G2 with a belt clip works with scanners WA6194 G2 with GSM or b g end cap WA6195 G2 with 1D Scan or 1D Imager end cap WA6196 G2 with 2D scan or 1D imager end cap WA6197 G2 with universal end cap case s top open Soft Shell Holster WA6050 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 249 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Attaching The Hand Strap A Important Do not use adhesives such as Loctite to secure screws on carrying accesso ries These chemicals may damage the plastic casing 7 2 Attaching The Hand Strap The hand strap can be attached to the back of the WORKABOUT PRO to provide a secure means for operators to carry the hand held The hand strap is attached to the back of unit using two Phillips head screws provided with this accessory e Use a Phillips screwdriver to attach the strap to the two threaded inserts on the back of the WORKABOUT PRO near the top of the unit
122. Docking Station Operations The indicators applications and drivers required to use and monitor the desktop docking station as a dock as opposed to a charger are installed on the WORKABOUT PRO no applications are present on the docking station itself 7 15 AC Wall Adaptor Model PS1050 G1 268 The AC wall adaptor available for your WORKABOUT PRO allows you to operate your hand held using AC power while charging the battery inserted in the unit Adaptor plugs suitable for use in the following countries are shipped with the AC wall adap tor United Kingdom Australia Europe and North America Universal AC Power Supply Adaptor Plugs DC Power Plug e Choose the adaptor plug that is suitable for use in your country Slide the adaptor plug into the Universal AC power supply snapping it into place These two pieces coupled together are referred to as an AC wall adaptor Insert the DC power plug into the DC IN socket at the base of WORKABOUT PRO located between the tether and LIF ports e Plug the pronged end into an AC outlet WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 7 16 7 17 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Automotive Adaptor Model WA3113 G2 Automotive Adaptor Model WA3113 G2 Important Itis critical that you review the safety instructions outlined in the quick start guide enclosed with your automotive adaptor before using the accessory The automotive adaptor allo
123. E dete ede 123 Personal SEMEN ri 123 iv WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 18 6 19 6 20 Contents App Launch Keys ici 124 Buttons Cr E id 126 6 4 1 Up Down Control 0 ccc cece cence ee ee eee ene e ee enneeeeneeenes 126 GAD ONESHO aseeton ENEE E EEEE EEEE AAEN 127 6 4 3 Keyboard Macro KeyS cee cece eee cee cece eee eee rr 128 6 4 4 Unicode Mapping 0 cece eee cee rr rr 130 6 4 5 Scancode Remapping 00 cece cece cece ee cee rr rr 131 O 4 6 gt Lock Sequence 3 55 08s sesesandcdedecenate E E a e E o e 134 puie LA AAA AAA AA AAA Geena 135 6 5 1 Input Method Talaia 135 6 5 2 Options Additional Choices 00 cece cece eee e eee cence tenet een eeees 139 O 140 MEUS ERA eens 141 6 7 1 Start Menu Tab ooococcocccoccnnccncnnon cnc rr rr 141 Microphones cs prrrie ad 142 Owner Information CL nos 143 Phone Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional Only 0ooooooooccooccccrnccncnrrnrs 143 Sound amp Not CAOS scort IEEE Aa atada 143 6111 Sounds cana ERRA 144 6 11 2 UNOMP CATIONS S Aar rana E EE E AAAA 144 Today Screen ioio eiee e EARE A REEE 145 6 121 Appearance me eee e ennnen E n EEEE EE R A 145 EI E O IA 145 System Tab SONES cti Ad 146 PAD OUL A A 146 About Devices 147 Backlitiiii 2 28 822298 waite 5S Slain ae note nese ge WSL EN Ra habe 147 6 16 Battery Powe
124. EE OOS 201 6 39 Bluetooth SAU s A A A COR EEEREELERS A 201 6 39 1 Paired Tabe wccccwscewe and 202 6292 DEVICE Fabascns sanaeanaee cconnnnnsomasonncs r AE te Oana eR neh ida 204 6 39 3 Servers Tab A tee taes ihe eeveavs sees ao eaa oani 208 6039 4 Mode Tab vin AIR A e 209 0395 A DOUE TA AA EEE 210 6 39 6 The Bluetooth GPRS Phon oooocooccoocooccnocnncnnn coronar rar 210 6 40 Connection Properties lt 2 A eaaa ea 212 6 40 15 Port Settings o00ctn50555 550005 500555 5 T babes py ee ae anacaansoces 213 6040 2 Call Options ccoo nina doin Enn ARE OOO AEEA EErEE Eier E E LETERE 214 6 41 Connections Connecting To The InterMet 0ooooooooocoroocccrnccrnrrrcrnrrrnns 214 6 41 1 Modem Connection Setup ooooocoocccconocnroncconrrrrrrrr rr 215 6 42 Wireless Manager Icon oooocoooocccooccccnrrnrn ron nr rr rr 219 6 42 1 Flight Mode Disabling Wireless Components 0eec eee e eee ees 219 6 42 2 Setting Up A Network Card 0 0 c cece ccc eee eee ene ee rr 220 6 42 3 Network Adaptor Cards 0 cece cece cece ence cence nee e tenn estan rert 220 6 42 4 Changing Network Card Settings 0 0 cece eee e eee e eee teen eeeaes 222 6 42 5 VPN Conn ction Di boe 222 6 42 6 Managing An Existing Connection ooooooocoooocconcrnrnrrrnr rr 223 6 42 7 Selecting A Network 0oooooocooccoccoccnnrcnnnrrrn rr rr 224 0 42 87 RTOXY NEVEL UD Ll to KESSEL EGS Bye 225 6 43 Wireless StatiStiCS
125. F card adaptor setup details refer to Setting Up a RA2041 Radio Summit Client Utility on page 16 When the network card is inserted in your unit for the first time the Network Settings screen is displayed automatically so that you can configure the card If it does not appear or if you want to change settings Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections 220 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Tap on the Network Cards icon Configure Network Adapters My network card connects to C Tap an adapter to modify settings Summit WLAN Adapter Bluetooth PAN Driver USB Ethernet Series Adapter Marvell CFS385PN Wireless Card NE2000 Compatible Ethernet Driver Remote NDIS Host AsyncMac NDISWAN Miniport Microsoft RNDIS Miniport Driver Virtual Ethernet Intermediate Miniport PPTP NDISWAN Miniport L2TP NDISWAN Miniport Chapter 6 Settings Network Adaptor Cards e Ifyou need to specify server information double tap on the appropriate adaptor and then tap on the IP Address and or Name Servers tab Summit WLAN Adapter 8 Use server assigned IP address Use specific IP address w access Ware See Cancal Settings Summit WLAN Adapter Name server addresses may be automatically assigned if DHCP is enabled on this adapter aroNs ae vans Cancel Note Because most networks use DHCP you should not need to change these settings unles
126. Fiter traia LU This window lists all the presets both predefined and the custom Presets are identified as follows e Predefined presets are marked as read only For a description review Predefined Pre sets on page C 2 Custom presets are marked as read and write One preset either predefined or custom is marked as active Note The top portion of the window displays the bar code decoding camera presets The top port of the window displays the bar code decoding camera presets Selecting A Camera If your WORKABOUT has more than one built in camera one camera must be selected for configuration To select a camera Tap on the Camera Presets drop down menu to view the camera options e Choose a camera specifically Front Imager which is located at the top of the unit Setting The Active Preset An active preset has an A to the right in Figure C 2 on page page C 9 the active preset is Defaults To set an active preset Highlight the preset and tap on the Activate button WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 9 Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Viewing A Preset C 4 3 Viewing A Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset Highlight a preset and tap on the View button The associated preset window is displayed PTS Imager Settim Y 7 fy 4 ok Preset Default Image Corrections Auto Exposure Manual Exposure Windowing Predefined setti
127. Inthe Wireless Manager dialog box tap on the Settings button In the Configure Network Adaptors dialog box Tap on Summit WLAN Adapter in the adaptor list The Summit WLAN Adapter dialog box is displayed You have two options Tap on Use server assigned IP address to have an address assigned automatically or WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 2 7 2 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Using the SCU to Connect to the WLAN If you want to use a particular IP address tap on Use specific IP address and type the pre ferred address If you tap on the Name Servers tab you can statically configure the DNS servers however if you use DHCP for IP address assignment DNS is usually supplied by the same server that supplied the IP addresses Using the SCU to Connect to the WLAN This section provides a quick set of steps to create a profile referred to as a Profile De tailed information about each of the SCU tabs Main Profile Status Diags and Global Settings is provided under Appendix A Summit Client Utility SCU To launch the SCU so that your hand held can connect to a wireless LAN Tap on Start gt Programs and then tap on the SCU icon scu i Summit Client Utility 7 Y lt lt ok LEAP Authenticated BG Reg Domain ETSI Auto Profle C On 8 Of List Driver v2 01 17 SCU v2 01 12 rae Ses dees Gems WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manu
128. Keyboard Letter Recognizer and Transcriber WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 135 Chapter 6 Settings Input Method Tab Block Recognizer Block Recognizer teaches you how to conform your handwriting to what the hand held can recognize AN Important Refer to Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer on page 85 for additional details Keyboard Options 4 q 5 50 bk Input method El X O Large keys 8 Small keys ep Space ry Shift key e Backspace Y Enter This screen is displayed when you choose Keyboard in the Input method drop down menu You can use it to customize the soft keyboard You can choose Large Keys or Small Keys to increase or decrease the size of the keys displayed on the soft keyboard If you enable Use gestures for the following keys these keys are removed from the soft key board Gestures are handwriting shortcuts for the keyboard keys Letter Recognizer Options Letter Recognizer teaches you how to conform your hand writing to what the hand held can recognize AN Important Refer to Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer on page 85 for additional details To display additional letter recognition options tap on the Options button in the Letter Recognizer screen 136 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Input Method Tab Figure 6 2 Letter Recognizer Quick Settings Settings a q 5 53 bk i a 465 55 bk Input L
129. New Workbook Components Columns Address of selected text Status bar Formula drop down menu Toolbar Sheet drop down menu Menu bar e Ifthe toolbar is not visible tap on the View gt Toolbar You can enter data work with rows and columns and create formulas as you would when working with Excel on your PC Using Excel Mobile Help If you need help using this application you can review the instructions in the associated help files To display Excel Mobile help files e Launch the Excel Mobile program Tap on Start gt Help and review the instructions provided WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 91 Chapter 5 Programs OneNote Mobile 5 5 2 OneNote Mobile fn OneNote Mobile You can use OneNote Mobile to take notes wherever you are and then synchronize your notes with a notebook section in the OneNote version on your PC For example you can Snap pictures of business cards on your WORKABOUT PRO and then bring them into OneNote on your PC e Create short text notes and voice recordings on your WORKABOUT PRO to remind you about important meetings ideas etc and synchronize them with your notes Prepare information in OneNote on your PC and then transfer it to your WORKABOUT PRO where it will be available to you wherever you and your WORKABOUT PRO go A Important Remember that you must have Microsoft Office OneNote 2007 and the latest version of ActiveSync i
130. O To An Ethernet Network To link the WORKABOUT PRO to a PC Insert the hand held in the desktop docking station Insert the USB cable into the docking station Client USB connector Attach the other end of the cable to a USB port on the PC Linking A WORKABOUT PRO To An Ethernet Network An USB Ethernet adaptor cable model number WA4010 G1 is used to connect the WORKABOUT PRO to an Ethernet network through a desktop docking station Figure 7 6 USB Ethernet Adaptor Cable Ethernet Port USB Connector Insert the adaptor s USB connector into the Host USB port on the desktop docking station e Connect your network Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the adaptor cable Network Access The hand held unit automatically detects insertion into the desktop dock and loads the ap propriate drivers to communicate with the USB Ethernet converters Network Addressing The host application uses standard TCP IP protocol to name locate and communicate with a specific WORKABOUT PRO on the network If a link is established between a WORK ABOUT PRO and a host the application on the host and on the hand held must have a recovery mechanism in the event that the WORKABOUT PRO is removed from the dock interrupting the link WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 267 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Troubleshooting The Docking Station Operations 7 14 Troubleshooting The
131. OS A cold reset in Windows Mobile is almost identical to a warm reset except that some lower level hardware PCon is also reset before the operating system boots For this reason a cold reset should only be used in rare critical situations To perform a cold reset and launch the Windows Mobile 6 1 operating system bypassing the BooSt menu Press and hold down the SCAN FN BLUE and ENTER keys simultaneously for a minimum of two seconds After a cold reset the BooSt menu appears listing possible BooSt commands Type 1 to load the Windows Mobile 6 1 operating system 32 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual GET To KNow WORKABOUT PRO 3 3 1 Features of the WORKABOUTPRO ooo 35 3 2 The Batteries uta tai Gy Bea 37 3 2 2 Removing the Battery Pack 0 0 oo o 38 3 2 3 Battery Swap TiMe e 38 3 2 3 1 Safely Swapping the Main Battery o 38 3 2 4 Charging the Battery o o e 39 3 2 4 1 Chargers and Docking Stations 39 3 3 Switching the Hand Held On and Off o e 40 3 4 The Keyboards oss rs Ben ble A ta a ed 41 3 4 1 The WORKABOUT PRO Keyboard 2 0 00 oo 41 34 2 Modifier Keys ii ane A al Se as 41 3 4 2 1 Activating Modifier Keys amp the Shift State Indicator 41 3 4 2 2 Locking Modifier KeyS 42 E REVS a es ON 43 3 4 6 Numeric Keyboard
132. P 5180 WA8010 G1 WA9212 G1 2D Imager SX5400 WA9008 It is critical that you review the safety information in the WORKABOUT PRO Hand Held Computer Regulatory amp Warranty Guide PN 8000126 before proceeding 7 32 1 Scanning Techniques e Hold the scanner at an angle Do not hold it perpendicular to the bar code Do not hold the scanner directly over the bar code In this position light can reflect back into the scanner s exit window and prevent a successful decode Scan the entire bar code If you are using a 1D or PDF laser scanner make certain that the scan beam crosses every bar and space on the bar code including the margins on either end of the symbol 280 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 7 32 2 7 32 3 e e Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Troubleshooting If you are using a 2D imaging scanner make certain the red oval shaped framing mark is centred within the bar code you want to scan When using imaging scanners do not move the scanner while decoding the bar code Movement blurs the image Hold the scanner farther away for larger bar codes Hold the scanner closer for bar codes with bars that are close together A bar code icon appears on the screen during a scan While the scanner beam is active the onscreen message states SCANNING If you want to turn off the onscreen message disable Scan Indication in the Options tab of the Scanner Settings menu in t
133. Pings Important For details about the Status dialog box refer to Status Tab on page A 7 in Appendix A Summit Client Utility SCU WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 19 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout The Phone Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional Only 2 8 The Phone Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional Only WORKABOUT PRO s running Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional are equipped with phone capabilities nN Note Remember that you can use the Help feature to find more details about phone options Help screens are context sensitive that is the help displayed is generally specific to the dialog box you have opened To further narrow your search tap on the Search softkey in the Help screen and type the topic about which you require additional information 2 8 1 The Phone Keypad The phone keypad provides phone services like those you use on your cellular phone You can use the phone keypad provided with your WORKABOUT PRO to for example send and receive phone calls make conference calls view a list of your phone calls call history set up speed dial numbers etc 2 8 1 1 Send amp End Phone Calls Using the Phone Keypad To display the phone keypad In the Today screen tap the Phone softkey in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen Phone setting Network emergency number jul 411 Assistance 2 5 Directory Assistance me oe _ a E File ae Speed Dial os m tuvS Q Call Histo
134. RS EDGE Radio eisereen 292 8 2 3 Model RA3040 G2 Siemens HC25 UMTS Modem 00ee ee 294 EZA Bluetooth as A elk ee BRU a eE LI Le OURS 296 Battery Specifications co csgcohes cade cannes wacueeseeee nooo E TOA 296 8 3 1 High Capacity Model WA3006 0 cece cee eee c eee e eee eeeeneeeees 296 8 3 2 Super High Capacity Model WA3010 0 cece cece e ence ence enes 302 Scanner Imager Model Numbers 0 ccc cc ceee cece eee ee eee ee eet enneeeneeees 308 Scanner Specifications ico e e EN e el de cde ee de 308 8 5 1 SE1223HP LR And SE955HP Specifications 0c cece cee e eee eee ee 308 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual ix x Contents 8 5 2 SE1524ER Scanner Specifications 0 cece eee 8 5 3 EV15 Imager Specifications 0 cece eee eee eee ees 8 5 4 SX5400 Imager en e EEEE REER EAA 8 5 5 HHP5180 Imager cece ccc eee eee ene E Appendix A Summit Client Utility SCU AT SCU EN A Main Pabisicecdicacdcndticceiieeeee cc iggiet se dcadsadeaceeeeee renee acnee AB Profile Tai anar A 3 1 SCU Security Capabilities 0 c cece cece eee eens A 3 2 EAP Credentials 00 cece cece cece eee eect eeeeeenees A 33 ThirdPartyContie 2 202 02cccacasesesiasdsaeesnnennnnnnnp a AA Status Tab did ALS Diags Tab wiccssoscnnicacncigrreaer 228 en E AASA A 6 Global Settings Tab 00 ccc cnet e ee ee nett rr
135. Settings gt Connections gt Wireless Power icon Wireless Manager Wireless Manager vag Tx d ok Wi Fi Available Bluetooth Enabled visible GSM GPRS Disabled GPS Disabled Flight mode is on when all wireless components are disabled Flight mode status Off Disable All 6 42 1 Flight Mode Disabling Wireless Components To disable all wireless components when for example you are taking your hand held onto a plane where wireless connections need to be shut down Tap on the Disable All button To enable wireless components e Tap on Enable All WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 219 Chapter 6 Settings Setting Up A Network Card To disable a particular radio connection rather than all connections e Highlight an Available enabled radio listed in this dialog box and then tap on the Disable button 6 42 2 Setting Up A Network Card Network 802 11 cards are used to connect to a network so that you can browse the Internet download e mail and so on You can connect to an existing network or you can set up a new connection on your WORKABOUT PRO AN Important The WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with context sensitive Help Files If you find that you re unsure how to proceed with a network connection at any point during setup tap on the question mark icon in the navigation bar at the top of the screen 6 42 3 Network Adaptor Cards AN Important For RA2041 Summit C
136. State Indicator Icon The softkey bar can also display the shift state indicator icon This icon indicates active modifier keys SHIFT ALT CTRL FN ORANGE and FN BLUE WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 The Softkey Bar Tap on Start gt Settings gt Buttons gt One Shots Tap in the checkbox next to Show modi fier key state to replace the soft keyboard icon with the shift state indicator icon Word Mobile mg Ti ok Shift state indicator icon When a modifier key is pressed it is displayed in the shift state indicator icon In the example above the FN ORANGE key was activated To distinguish a locked modifier key a key that has been locked on from a modifier key that is only active until the next key is pressed locked keys are encircled in a black frame in the shift state indicator icon Refer to Activating Modifier Keys amp the Shift State Indicator on page 41 for details Note You can still access the soft keyboard while the shift state indicator icon is displayed Tapping on this icon displays the soft keyboard Tapping on the shift state indicator icon again removes the soft keyboard WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 79 Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Programs Using Applications 4 7 Programs Using Applications Tap Start gt Programs to display the programs installed on you
137. T PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual A Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Using the SCU to Connect to the WLAN To configure encryption Tap on the Encryption drop down menu and choose the appropriate type of encryption Manual WEP Auto WEP WPA PSK WPA TKIP WPA2 PSK WPA2 AES CCKM TKIP CKIP Manual or CKIP Auto If you choose Manual WEP WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Tap on the WEP PSK Keys button For Manual WEP choose up to four static WEP keys For PSK type an ASCII passphrase or hex PSK Configure any other settings that are supplied by the network administrator for the SSID to which you will associate e Make certain that you tap on Commit following each change Once you ve completed the configuration Tap the Main tab Tap on the Active Profile drop down menu your new profile will be listed in the drop down menu When you tap on the profile you created the 802 11b g radio module attempts to connect to the network using the following steps 1 Associate with SSID 2 Authenticate to network 3 If EAP authentication is being used derive dynamic encryption keys 4 If DHCP is being used by the network obtain an IP address If the 802 11b g is not connecting properly Tap on the Status tab The Status dialog box lists the IP and MAC address and indicates the current state of the radio the signal strength channel and so on You can also use the Status screen for DHCP renewal and ICMP Echo Requests
138. T PRO3 146 navigation bar 62 Battery hotkey 64 connectivity hotkey 63 Start button 62 volume control 64 network selecting 224 network card settings changing 222 setting up 220 New menu customizing 74 Note creating 104 recording a message audio 106 renaming 106 synchronizing 108 text converting handwriting into 104 Notes 103 Notification setting 144 NOTIS Editing D 4 O Off amp On buttons 40 On amp Off button 40 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual One Check Digit D 5 30 one dimensional internal scanner 28 One Shot Mode 127 One Shot tab modifier keys 127 onscreen soft keyboard 83 Options tab bar codes 175 orientation screen 48 Outlook email synchronizing Messaging 112 Output Telepen 32 Owner Information 143 ownership information defining 67 P Paired tab Bluetooth 202 pairing Bluetooth devices 206 Parameter Scanning D 3 22 24 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 41 42 D 43 D 44 D 45 D 46 D 47 D 49 D 50 D 52 D 53 D 54 D 55 Parity 182 185 Parity modem setup 2 3 PC connecting WORKABOUT to 266 PC linking to WORKABOUT 4 PDF and linear Predefined preset C 3 PDF 417 D 8 35 D 58 Pharmaceutical 22 phone keypad 20 phone keys on WORKABOUT PRO3 keyboard 24 using Windows Mobile 6 Professional 20 picker cradle installing cable 277 Pictures deleting 109 editing 109 opening 109 slide show creating 109 Pictures and Videos 108
139. This Mama 3 1 2 Text Conventos 4 1 3 WORKABOUT PRO Features ee 4 1 3 1 The WORKABOUT PRO C Hand Held ooo 6 1 3 2 The WORKABOUT PRO S Hand Held 2 2 0 0 000000000 7 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 1 1 1 Chapter 1 Introduction About This Manual About This Manual This manual describes how to configure operate and maintain the WORKABOUT PRO Model Numbers 7527C G2 and 7527S G2 hand held computer Chapter 1 Introduction provides a basic overview of the WORKABOUT PRO hand held Chapter 2 Basic Checkout describes the steps required to get the unit ready for operation Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO describes the features and outlines how to charge and maintain the battery This chapter also provides information about indicators SD MMC card installation and general maintenance Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 describes the Microsoft Windows Mobile 6 1 Today screen and how to use it This chapter also outlines basics like moving around a window displaying menus and so on Chapter 5 Programs provides a description of the Windows Mobile 6 1 Programs options and how to use them Chapter 6 Settings provides details about Windows Mobile 6 1 Settings options and how to use them Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories describes the peripherals and accessories available for your hand held Chapter 8 Specifications details radio hand held computer scanner a
140. Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be decoded by your scanner Scanner Settim 6 04 Dk Set Code Lengths O Any length Length within a range O One discrete length O Iwo discrete lengths Enter value s from 2 to 55 E 5 Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 1 to 55 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 7 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 39 Check Digit Verification When this parameter is enabled set to on the integrity of a Code 39 symbol is checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms AN Note Only those Code 39 symbols that include a Mod 43 check digit are decoded when this parameter is enabled Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must to enabled Full ASCII If this parameter is enabled the characters and are used as escape characters The combination of an escape character and the next character is conv
141. Volume No tasks t No upcoming appointrr On Live Search O pir Windows Mobile 6 1 Classic Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional Battery Capacity Tapping on the Battery hotkey displays the Battery tab allowing you to view the remaining battery capacity in the main battery and the backup battery 4 46 1 12 bk Main battery Lilon Recharging state Charging aT 0 Backup battery 0 oe Geo 64 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 4 2 2 Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Today s Date Clock and Alarm Today s Date Clock and Alarm This option displays the current date If you need to adjust the date or set an alarm In the Today screen tap on today s date The Clock amp Alarms screen is displayed Clock amp Alarms Time Zone Date 2 13 2010 Y Time 8 22 09 AM a M Sync to current time zone Notify me when time is updated Time Tab Tap on the Time Zone drop down menu to set the GMT e Next tap in the Date and Time drop down menus to set the current date and time Note A checkmark next to Sync to current time zone automatically adjusts to the time zone and a checkmark next to Notify me when time is updated displays a notifica tion message if the time is adjusted WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 65 Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Today s Date Clock and Alarm Alarms Tab To set an alarm Tap on t
142. WORKABOUT PRO Hand Held Computer With Windows Mobile 6 1 Classic amp Professional Model No 7527C G2 7527S G2 User Manual February 22 2010 Part No 8100200 A ISO 9001 Certified Quality Management System TEKLOGIX O Copyright 2010 by Psion Teklogix Inc Mississauga Ontario 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario Canada L5N 7J9 http www psionteklogix com This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Teklogix Inc is issued in strict confidence and is not to be reproduced or copied in whole or in part except for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Psion Teklogix manufactured goods and ser vices Furthermore this document is not to be used as a basis for design manufacture or sub contract or in any manner detrimental to the interests of Psion Teklogix Inc WORKABOUT PRO is a trademark of Psion Teklogix Inc Windows and the Windows Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries E Bluetooth The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Psion Teklogix Inc is under license All trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective holders Return To Factory Warranty Psion Teklogix Inc provides a return to factory warranty on this product for a period of twelve 12 months in accordance with the Statement of Limited Warranty and Limitati
143. Windows Mobile 6 1 Windows Mobile 6 1 Navigation Bar Connectivity The Connectivity hotkey provides a shortcut to the Connections tab in the Settings window This tab provides access to Bluetooth network network card and internet connection setups Wireless Manage Connected ride 6 00PM 7 00PM Meeting Room A Phone Settings If you re hand held is running Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional it is equipped with a phone option A hand held in which a SIM card and GSM radio are installed can access phone set tings along with the Wireless Manager from this pop up bubble Any active connections are also listed here 27 a 12 38 PM Connected Wireless Manager Contacts WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 63 Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Windows Mobile 6 1 Navigation Bar Volume Control Tapping on this icon displays a sliding tab that allows you to adjust the speaker volume or turn the speaker on and off On units running Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional two volume adjustments are provided one for the speaker volume and the other for the phone dialer volume start sE Start en Yy AE m gt Tuesday a Saturday 8 19 AM October 24 2006 volume s February 13 2010 Volume Tap here to set ownei E Phone off B On Getting Started Tap here to set owner Phone No unread messages No tasks I Conf K 6 00PM 7 00PM Meet a No unread messages i Dialer
144. a a VPN O Work Settings Tapping on Connect in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen will automatically connect to a network that s already been set up Tapping on Settings in the network bubble will launch the Wireless Manager applet If you prefer not see this notification bubble you can tap on the Menu button in the softkey bar and choose not to display the notification bubble Multiple Notifications If more than one item is detected all the items can be accessed by tapping on the small mul tiple notification icon shaped like a word bubble in the Navigation Bar Tapping on it WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 6 38 6 39 Chapter 6 Settings Beam displays a group of notification icons in the sample screen below a missed call icon and a new voice message icon Multiple Notification Icon Oey lt Missed Call Icon v ao New Voice Message Icon Bluetooth Connection Properties a Domain Network Enroll Cards di Wireless Wireless Manager Statistics Connections Tapping on any of these icons displays an associated notification bubble with information about and access to the missed call s or voice message s Beam Beam If your unit is equipped with an IrDA end cap tapping on Beam allows you to enable Receive all incoming beams so that your unit can accept incoming data from other IrDA devices Bluetooth Setup 3 Bluetoo
145. a command Tap on Menu to display the commands associated with it and then tap on the command you want to execute 4 5 1 Pop Up Menus Pop up menus are available in many screens and programs They offer quick access to a group of useful commands in addition to those available in the menu bar To display this menu gently press and hold the stylus on the screen A ring of dots is displayed on the screen followed by a pop up menu f Word Mobile 4 4 5 08 5k Activating Modifier Keys Select All Font Paragraph Spelling Insert Date Tap on the command you want to execute WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 77 Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 The Softkey Bar 4 6 78 The Softkey Bar The WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with a softkey bar at the bottom of the screen It dis plays softkeys that allow you to access menus and commands It also displays the soft keyboard icon fe Word Mobile e Word Mobile Soft lab icon Soft ES Softkey Bar Softkey Tapping on a softkey displays information associated with the softkey for example in the sample screen above the Menu softkey displays the commands associated with Word Mobile The View softkey lets you to tailor how the Word document will be displayed The Soft Keyboard Tapping on the soft keyboard icon displays an onscreen keyboard you can use as an alterna tive to the hand held keyboard Shift
146. a grounded metallic object before opening any covers on the unit Warning Due to electrical incompatibility the WA9300 kit cannot be used with the EVIS 1D imagers bearing Psion Teklogix part numbers 1050732 and 1050733 Please choose the imagers with part numbers 1050732 001 and 1050733 001 instead The part number is located on the imager s label Warning The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard This product may contain a laser scanner that emits less than 1 4 mW maximum radiant power at a wavelength of 650 nm This product complies with CRH 21 CFR 1040 Class II and IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 Class 2 laser product What s Included 1 Scanner Flex Assembly 2 Screws 6 3 Kapton Tape 4 Back Plate 5 Pistol Grip Kit 4 screws included Warning Back up any data in RAM before you begin data are erased when the inter nal power of the WORKABOUT PRO is turned off WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 253 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories The Trigger Back Plate Kit With Flush Mount Pistol Grip 254 Installing The Back Plate If your unit is using AC power disconnect it Remove the stylus from the end cap Remove the battery pack Switch off the internal power the switch is located inside the battery compartment Loosen the four screws securing the end cap and remove the end cap Unlatch the two connectors on the interface board on the new back pla
147. abelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a spec ified range from 5 to 55 CLSI Editing When enabled this parameter strips the start and stop characters and inserts a space after the first fifth and tenth characters of a 14 character Codabar symbol nN Note Symbol length does not include start and stop characters NOTIS Editing When enabled this parameter strips the start and stop characters from decoded Codabar symbol Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 2 14 MSI Plessey Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable MSI Plessey D 14 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual El Appendix D Bar Code Settings MSI Plessey Set Length L1 And Set Length L2 Lengths for MSI Plessey can be set for Any length Length within a range One discrete length or Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths w
148. able characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 0 to 80 Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details D 3 6 EAN 13 Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 13 Check Digit If you enable this parameter a check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Addendum Add on 2 And Addendum Add on 5 An addendum is a separate bar code supplementary to the main bar code Enabling these parameters defines the length of the addendum bar code to either 2 or 5 characters Addendum Required When this parameter is set to on the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum Addendum Separator Addendum Separator is a space that is added between the EAN 13 bar code and the Add on code Addenda When this parameter is set to on the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum ISBN Translate When this parameter International Standard Book Number is enabled the first 3 characters 978 are ignored and the checksum 0 9 X is calculated on the remaining characters Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 24 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 3 7 D 3 8 Appendix D Bar Code Settin
149. abled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 93 Minimum Length Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters including check digit s Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 4 11 Codabar Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Codabar Start Stop Transmit Codabar can use the following sets of characters as start and stop characters a b c d A B C D a b c d t n e DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 Thus when a set is chosen the first and last digits of a Codabar message must be one of those characters and the body of the message should not contain these characters Setting this parameter to Not Transmitted strips the start and stop characters from this bar code CLSI Library System When enabled spaces are inserted after characters 1 5 10 in the 14 character label used in the USA by libraries using the CLSI system D 50 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 4 12 Appendix D Bar Code Settings MSI Plessey Check Digit Verification When enabled this parameter checks the integrity of a symbol to ensure it complies with a specified algorithm either USS Uniform Symbology Specification or OPCC Optical Product Code Council Transmit Check Digit If the check di
150. ading Range Determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned The default setting Extended allows for increased reading distance Start Stop Transmit Setting this parameter to on enables the transmission of start and stop characters which are usually not transmitted Code 39 can start and end with either a or a character see also next parameter Accepted Start Char Accepted Start Char This parameter allows the user the option of using one of the two start stop characters or both char char and char D 44 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 128 Check Digit Verification Uses the specified algorithm of the option you ve chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting If the data does not contain that algorithm the data is not transmitted The available options are Disabled MOD 43 Check French CIP or Italian CIP Note French CIP French pharmaceutical is only used with bar codes containing 7 D 4 4 characters Italian CIP Italian pharmaceutical is also known as Code 32 Itis transmitted as a standard Code 39 if checksum is not validated Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled Minimum Length Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e hu
151. ailty symbols 6 235 n 2 4 102 o 0 0 t 4 102 6 203 A 12 WS e i d 50 15 08 mo 5 0 gone 560 n o 20 50 80 100 em o 50 8 101 5 1524 203 2 254 0 Depth of Flela w n cm l Note Typical performance at 73 4 F 23 C 72 1829 on high quality symbols PR ae 1219 M 24 610 0 0 t 24 610 48 1219 1 55 1 72 1829 15 0 e a I min d 70 ml reflective 367 0 r 100 m retiectve 15420 n o 120 240 360 430 600 cm o 3045 605 6 314 4 12192 1524 0 Depth of Field Near range determined by degree of re ectvty and width of bar code WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 313 Chapter 8 Specifications EV15 Imager Specifications 8 5 3 EV15 Imager Specifications Parameter EV15 Light Source 617nm Highly Visible LED Scan Angle 40 Minimum Print Contrast Minimum 25 Min x Dimension 0 1 mm 4 mils Reading Distance Up to 90cm 35 in Symbologies UPC E amp A EAN RSS Code 39 Code 128 UCC EAN 128 ISBN ISBT Interleaved Matrix Industrial and Standard 2 of 5 Codabar Code 93 931 Code 11 MSI Plessey Telepen PDF417 Micro PDF417 Ambient Light Works in any lighting conditions from 0 to 100 000 lux Shock 2000G 0 7ms half sinus 3 axes Vibration 50G r m s 314 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 8 5 3 1 8 5 4 Chapter 8 Specifications SX5400 Imager EV15 Imager Decode Zone 0 Lux to 100 000 Lux Minimum Range Maximum Range Mil Siz
152. ake sure the trigger mechanism is securely snapped into the pistol grip body and that the trigger operates properly e Position the pistol grip so that it fits snugly over the back of the unit and the holes in the pistol grip are aligned with the threaded inserts on the back of the WORKABOUT PRO e Tighten the screws to a torque of 3 Ibs in 3kgf cm to secure the pistol grip in place Insert the stylus in the base of the pistol grip 252 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 7 4 gt Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories The Trigger Back Plate Kit With Flush Mount Pistol Grip The Trigger Back Plate Kit With Flush Mount Pistol Grip The Trigger Back Plate kit model number WA9300 provides a special back plate that incor porates a scanner interface board and a switch along with a Flush Mount Pistol Grip model number WA6103 The trigger back plate PN 1052211 and Flush Mount Pistol Grip are compatible with the following imager model numbers WA9113 G1 WA9103 G1 WA9112 G1 and WA9102 G1 Note that the Flush Mount Pistol Grip is also compatible with the WA9009 1D auto ranging laser scanner however this scanner is shipped with its own unique trigger back plate spe cially designed to interface with the Flush Mount Pistol Grip Warning The installation of this scanner imager end cap must be performed using the appropriate anti static devices If unavailable discharge static from your body by touching
153. al 17 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Using the SCU to Connect to the WLAN e Tap on the Profile tab 5 Summit Client Utility gt Y 4 lt ok Se Profile Client Name Power Save EAP Type None Save Changes Tap on New to define a new profile e Type a unique name for your configuration using any alpha numeric combination to uniquely identify this profile Tap on OK to return to the Profile tab To configure the SSID for the network to which you want to associate Type an SSID in the text box to the right of SSID This field is limited to 32 characters Tap on Commit to save your SSID setting AN Important To learn more about the other options available in the radio attributes list refer to Profile Tab in Appendix A Summit Client Utility SCU To configure authentication and encryption use the appropriate drop down menus in the Profile dialog box and enter credentials for IEEE 802 1X EAP types or WEP keys by tapping on the Credentials button just below the drop down menus Tap on the EAP type drop down menu and choose the appropriate type of authentica tion LEAP EAP FAST PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC and EAP TLS e Once you ve chosen an EAP type tap on the Credentials button and type credentials for IEEE 802 1X EAP types AN Important Refer to SCU Security Capabilities and EAP Credentials in Appendix A Summit Client Utility SCU 18 WORKABOU
154. anced Backup All files Registry and default Databases will be archived Create Profile Default Backup Default Backup is selected so that all installed or copied files database entries and the Reg istry are saved Choose Advanced Backup only if you want to tailor your backup WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Creating A Backup Profile Advanced Backup Total Recall Select the type of backup that you wish to perform Default Backup Advanced Backup Backup selected files registry databases Choosing Advanced Backup allows you to define what you would like to include in your backup profile Total Recall You may edit the list of files and databases for backup O Files O Databases C Registry Tap in the checkbox next to the option s listed here to tailor how what you want included in the backup Once you ve defined the type of profile you want to create Tap on the Create Profile button WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 189 Chapter 6 Settings Restoring A Profile The options you chose to back up appear in on the screen as the backup progresses When the backup is complete the last item in the list indicates the location and name of the backup profile Total Recall Finished Creating profile at My Documents Default1 pfl connmgricmmapg conamgricnmapp music thebuenavibrasoundsystem pail
155. and 90 humidity for 8 hrs 25 C and 65 humidity for 4 hrs 20 C for 8 hrs 25 C and 65 humid ity for 4 hrs Following that perform a fast dis charge standard charge and then a fast discharge Measure the time taken for the second discharge 100 minutes or more Dry heat EMC CE Testing After standard charge keep the battery at 60 C for 8 hrs Carry out a fast dis charge standard charge and then a fast discharge measured the time taken for the second discharge The battery will need to pass the requirements of the EMC directive 89 336 EEC and amendments when fitted into the product Emissions to EN55022 Class B 1998 Immunity to EN55024 1998 100 minutes or more Test to be performed by manufacturer Electro Static Discharge Test EN61000 4 8 A Contact Discharge 8kV for each contact pad by 10 times B Air Discharge 15kV for 10 times the discharge test point is for around battery casing No damage WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 299 Chapter 8 Specifications High Capacity Model WA3006 8 3 1 3 Safety Data Description Condition Test Condition Result Short Circuit Test After a standard charge Protection circuit board to operate short terminals and discharge No explosion fire smoke or leakage for 1 hr Over Charging Test After a standard charge Protection circuit board to operate charge continuously at 4 2V No explosion fire smok
156. aneously Bar Code Application Options 1D laser scanning expansion module 2D linear imager expansion module Optional bolt on pistol grip WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 287 Chapter 8 Specifications Hand Held Computer Specifications AN Note All expansion modules can be factory configured or user upgradeable RFID Module Options e HF Module Frequency 13 56 MHz Tags supported ISO 15693 Philips I Code TI Tagilt Tagsys C210 C220 C240 C270 Read write range up to 3 15 in 80 mm MIFARE module Frequency 13 56 MHz Tags supported ISO 14443 A amp B Mifare Read write range up to 1 97 in 50 mm LF module Frequency 125 KHz 134 2 KHz Tags supported EM 4x0x EM 4x50 Hitag 1 amp 2 ISO HDXA amp FDXB Read write range up to 2 756 in 70 mm UHF module Frequency 868 MHz or 915 MHz Read range up to 4 92 ft 150 cm 915 MHz and up to 2 62 ft 80 cm 868 MHz Tag supported EPC Class 1 Gen 2 other protocols depending on regions User Interface e Color Touch Screen Display 3 6 in 9 144 cm diagonal Full VGA 480x640 resolution Transflective portrait mode TFT Adjustable Backlight Sunlight readable for outdoor use High reliability LED backlight Easily replaceable and customizable bezel Touchscreen Passive stylus or finger operation 288 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications Ha
157. ap and hold on an existing connection for more opbons My ISP name 1 Add a new modem connection Set up my proxy server Name My Connection 9055551234 My Work Network Add a new modem connection Edit my VPN servers Set up my proxy server Tap here Manage existing connections e To launch a connection from this screen press and hold the stylus on the connection you want to activate Choose Connect from the pop up menu e To delete a connection press and hold the stylus on the connection you want to delete Choose Delete from the pop up menu Note You can also create a new connection by tapping on the New button To make changes to the settings for this connection tap on Edit 6 42 6 2 Changing A Connection Setting Name Your WORKABOUT PRO has two sets of connection settings My ISP and My Work Net work If you want to change one or both of these options to something more familiar to you follow these steps Tap on Start gt Settings Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon e Under My Work Network or My ISP tap on Manage existing connections WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 223 Chapter 6 Settings Selecting A Network Tap on the General tab 5 Settings A 4 ok Enter a name for these settings y Work Network _ Deere settings den wen Pron sere Type the name you prefer in the field below Enter a name for these settings Tap
158. apping on an icon in this screen launches the associated applet Figure 5 1 Programs Tabs sE Programs 8 en YX 1 O S Gamas ActiveSyne Calculator Mz e Demo Fila Explorer Getting Started a Massanger Modem Link so f be Ar Picturas amp Ramota Videos Deskt 5 2 Games Your WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with a few standard games Bubble Breaker and Solitaire should you feel the need to pass the time 5 3 ActiveSync i 1 q eana For PCs using the Microsoft Windows XP operating system ActiveSync Microsoft PC connectivity software can be used to connect the WORKABOUT PRO to PCs running this software By connecting the hand held to a PC through your desktop docking station and WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 89 Chapter 5 Programs Synchronization 5 3 1 5 4 5 5 5 5 1 90 running ActiveSync on the PC you can view WORKABOUT PRO files drag and drop files between the hand held and the PC connect to the Internet and so on If you need help installing ActiveSync go to the website below and navigate to the Active Sync download information http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 147001 Synchronization For details about synchronizing your PC with you hand held visit the following Microsoft internet site http www microsoft com windowsmobile activesync default mspx Calculator Calculator Tapping on Sta
159. appings are not saved until you exit the Unicode Mapping tab by tapping on OK 130 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 6 4 5 Chapter 6 Settings Scancode Remapping Tap on the Add Change button Settings 4 46 4 25 bk Change Mapping C SHIFT Pressed _ CTRL Pressed Unicode Mapping Default Unicode Mapping e Highlight a value in the Unicode mapping list e Position the cursor in the Unicode Mapping field and type a Unicode value for the highlighted key Note To add a shifted state SHIFT and or CTRL tap on the checkbox next to SHIFT Pressed and or CTRL Pressed Removing Unicode Values In the Unicode Mapping tab highlight the item you want to delete and tap on the Remove button Scancode Remapping A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard Every key has a unique scancode that is mapped to a virtual key a function or a macro Scancode Remap ping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard A key can be remapped to send a virtual key e g VK_F represents the F key VK_RETURN represents the ENTER key etc perform a function e g turn the scanner on change volume con trast etc or run a macro There are three different tables of scancode mappings the Normal table the Blue table and the Orange table The Normal table defines unmodified key presses the Blue table defines key presses t
160. ar When this parameter is set to Validate only the integrity of the symbol is checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms If Check Char is set to Validate and Transmit the check character is validated and trans mitted with the data Setting this parameter to None disables this function Minimum And Maximum Length These parameters apply to MSI bar codes The length of a code refers to the number of char acters 1 e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 4 to 48 Plessey Minimum And Plessey Maximum Length These parameters apply to Plessey bar codes The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allow able code lengths 4 to 48 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Code 11 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 11 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 29 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Interleaved 2 of 5 Check Digits Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose One Check Digit or Two check digits If this param
161. arch LEARN ABOUT gt Mobility in the Workplace Demo gt Tap on the address bar the field near the top of the screen where URLs are entered to highlight the current URL Type anew URL in the address bar Tapping on the softkeys in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen display Internet Explorer commands like those you find on your PC Messaging 2 Messaging The Messaging program is used to send and receive e mail on your WORKABOUT PRO To send and receive e mail you 1l need to synchronize your PC or connect to a Post Office Protocol 3 POP3 or Internet Message Access Protocol 4 IMAP4 mail server For each of these methods you need to set up an e mail account with one exception Outlook e mail accounts are set up by default Folders If you use an Outlook e mail account messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are automat ically synchronized with your WORKABOUT PRO You can use ActiveSync on your PC WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 111 Chapter 5 Programs Synchronizing E mail with Outlook to synchronize additional folders The folders and messages you move are mirrored on the server For POP3 accounts if you move e mail messages to a folder you create the link between the messages on the WORKABOUT PRO and the copies on the mail server are broken When you next connect the mail server will recognize that the messages are missing from the WORKABOUT PRO I
162. assign an application launch key that will open a specific document in the Word Mobile application you need to browse to and choose that document while the cursor is in the Data field e Tap on OK App Launch Keys 4 3 45 bk addrbook Ink ky E App Windows addrbook ink Data Add Edit Remove Ifyou need to Edit Remove or Add another App Launch Key you can do it from this final screen Otherwise tap on OK to save you Application Launch Key e To launch the application you chose press the application key you assigned WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 125 Chapter 6 Settings Buttons Icon 6 4 Buttons Icon P Buttons Tap on this icon to display your options AN Note The Program Buttons option is not available on this unit 6 4 1 Up Down Control Buttons Customize the way your Up Down control repeats Delay before first repeat Short Program Buttons Up Down Control Sliding the Delay before first repeat bar to the left decreases the delay between key repeats while sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat delay time Sliding the Repeat rate bar to the left slows the rate at which an Up Down button repeats when pressed Sliding the bar to the right increases the key repeat rate 126 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 6 4 2 A Chapter 6 Set
163. at need to be configured for a connection such as APN user name password DNS server addresses etc are referred to as a profile Every profile is identified by an arbitrary unique name The profile named Default is special in that it is always present and can neither be edited nor deleted A sample dialog box is pre sented on the page following The Default profile uses parameters from a built in database The home network the network that issued the SIM is used for the database look up While there can be many configured profiles only one profile can be active at any time If connection profiles are configured manually then the Enable automatic configuration checkbox should normally be unchecked In one particular use case manually configured profiles may be combined with automatic configuration If multiple SIM cards are used with the same device each SIM card being from a different operator and some or all of them requiring a manually set up profile auto matic configuration may be used to automatically pick the correct manually configured WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 233 Chapter 6 Settings Tools Menu profile for each SIM card For this to work each profile has to be configured while the corre sponding SIM card is inserted in the device and initialized 1 e the status is at least SIM is ready The Select profile drop down list in the data configuration profile selects which profile a subsequent act
164. ata connectivity information access point name and PAP CHAP security settings From your Internet service provider ISP or wireless service provider access point name and password and any additional security information For a GPRS 1xRTT or dialup connection Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections tab Tap on the Connections icon Under My Work Network tap Add a new modem connection Type a name for the connection and choose Cellular Line GPRS or for 1xRTT con nections choose Cellular Line Tap on Next Type the phone number or access point name provided by your service provider and tap Next e Type the credentials supplied by your service provider and tap Finish Using Internet Sharing e Make certain that your data connect is running and that you can access the Internet from the WORKABOUT PRO If you are using a USB cable to connect to your PC you will need to disable the ActiveSync USB connection e On your PC open the ActiveSync window and click on File gt Connection Settings Disable Allow USB connection by clicking in the checkbox to the left of this option e Connect the WORKAOBUT PRO to your PC using Bluetooth or a USB cable 102 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 5 11 Chapter 5 Programs Notes On your WORKABOUT PRO tap Start gt Programs gt Internet Sharing Choose the PC Connection type USB or Bluetooth Choose the network connection that the WORKABOUT PRO should us
165. bar code and the Add on code Addenda When this parameter is set to on the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details UPC EAN Shared Settings Extended Coupon Code This parameter specifies whether or not the imager will read only UPC A EAN 13 bar codes that have addenda RN Note The 2 or 5 digit addenda must be turned on off depending on the desired behavior D 3 11 D 3 12 Code 93 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 93 Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 0 to 80 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Codabar Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Codabar WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 27 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Codabar Start Stop Transmit Codabar can use the following sets of characters as start and stop characters a b c d A B C D a b c d t n e DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 Thus when a set is chosen the first and last digits of a Codabar message must be one of those characters and the body of the message should no
166. bar code that can encode the full ASCII character set below ASCII 128 Up to 49 alphanumeric characters or 81 numeric characters can be encoded into two to eight rows Each row is divided by a separator bar The top and bottom of the symbol also have separator bars that extend to the ends of the minimum quiet zones D 36 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 3 28 D 3 29 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Codablock Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 49 Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 81 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Codablock Enable Set this parameter to on to enable Codablock Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 2048 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details 2D Data Matrix E
167. bar codes Listed are the average near far and Depth of Reading DOR numbers symbology Size mil anes inches inches C39 7 5 4 0 7 0 3 0 C39 10 2 75 9 25 6 5 C39 15 2 25 11 0 8 75 PDF6 6 6 6 4 0 6 5 2 5 PDF10 10 3 25 9 0 5 75 PDF15 15 2 25 10 75 8 5 DM15 15 3 0 8 0 5 0 QRIS 15 3 75 7 5 3 75 UPC 12 5 3 0 9 5 6 5 316 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications HHP5180 Imager 8 5 5 HHP5180 Imager Parameter HHP5180 Image Sensor 752 X 480 CMOS sensor Motion Tolerance 4 in 10 2cm per second Rotational Sensitivity 360 Viewing Angle 40 Ambient Light Total darkness to 100 000 lux full sunlight Illumination LEDs 626nm 30nm Aiming LEDs 526nm 30nm Laser 650nm 10nm Symbologies supported 2D PDF417 MicroPDF417 MaxiCode Data Matrix QR Code Aztec Aztec Mesa Code 49 UCC Composite Linear Code 39 Code 128 Codabar UPC EAN In terleaved 2 of 5 RSS Code 93 Codablock Postal Postnet US Planet Code BPO 4 State Cana dian Post Japanese Post KIX Netherlands Post Size 1 78cm Depth x 2 79cm Width without mounting tabs x 1 21cm Height 0 7 in Depth x 1 1 in Width without mounting tabs x 0 475 in Height Weight 5 9 grams 21 ounces Operational Input Voltage Imager 3 3 VDC 5 23 C Illumination Aimer 5300 3 0 VDC to 5 5 VDC 23 C Current Draw Imager Operatin
168. be used with an in ternal GSM modem that was not recognized by the automatic detection or an external GSM modem connected to a serial port of the computer through USB or through Bluetooth An external modem connected to a serial port must support 115 2kbit s 8bit no parity and hard ware flow control 6 44 5 5 Modem Information The fields in this dialog box cannot be edited they only display information about the WORKABOUT PRO modem If the network operator has not programmed a user s phone number into the SIM the Phone field remains empty The modem serial number is called IMEI for GSM modems and ESN for CDMA modems The SIM ID is sometimes referred to as the ICC ID International Charge Card Identifier Not all modems support the retrieval of the SIM ID In particular the Novatel Merlin UMTS modems and the Option Globetrotter modems do not support SIM ID retrieval If the main menu shows an error status at least partial modem information may be available Modem Power Modes The power mode of the modem is controlled through the Power icon rather than through the Wireless WAN user interface To adjust PC Card and CF card modems settings Tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on the System tab followed by the Power icon Tap on the Built in Devices tab If the checkbox for a modem is unchecked power is not applied to the modem and a driver is not loaded neither the serial port driver nor the Wireless WAN driver If the
169. bile 6 1 User Manual A S D 2 3 D 2 4 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Decoded Internal 2D Scanning Options Bi Direction Redundancy A Note This parameter is only valid ifa Linear Security Level is enabled When this parameter is enabled a bar code must be successfully scanned in both directions forward and reverse before being decoded Scan Angle This option allows you to choose from two scan angles Normal Angle or Alternate Angle Choosing Normal Angle allows the normal operation for scanning long range and short range Choosing Alternate Angle widens the beam to allow scanning of long bar codes at short range but at the cost of long range scanning Decoded Internal 2D Scanning Options Scanning Mode When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose one of the following scanning modes Smart Raster Always Raster Programmable Raster Slab Pattern Cyclone Pattern or Semi Omni Pattern Raster Height And Raster Expand Rate These parameter determine the laser pattern s height and rate of expansion Note These parameters are only used when either Programmable Raster or Always Raster is assigned to the 2D Scanning Mode parameter 2D Raster Height and 2D Raster Expand Rate are intended for very specific applications and are usually not required for normal scanning purposes Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter
170. bile 6 1 User Manual D 33 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Composite There are two variations of this code PosiCode A and PosiCode B The options available with this parameter allow to choose A and B A and B and Limited A or A and B and Limited B Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 1 to 80 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 22 Composite A Important To successfully read this type of bar code the two types of symbologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled A composite symbol includes multi row 2D components making it compatible with linear and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners The options available for this parameter represent multi level components of a composite symbol GS1 128 GS1 128 is the GS1 implementation of the Code 128 barcode specification The former correct name was UCC EAN 128 GS1 128 uses a series of Application Identifiers to include additional data such as best before dates batch numbers quantities weights and many other attributes needed by the user EAN UCC 128 Emulation Th
171. ble code lengths to 150 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 38 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Appendix D Bar Code Settings 2D Aztec D 3 32 2D Aztec D 3 33 D 3 34 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable 2D Aztec Aztec Runes Aztec Runes the smallest type of Aztec Code symbol has the ability to encode a very short license plate message Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 1 to 3750 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Postal PlaNET Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal PIaNET Check Digit If enabled the check digit will be transmitted at the end of the scanned data Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Postal PostNET Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal PostNET WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 39 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Po
172. caustic solutions e benzyl alcohol and concentrated acids If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments consider applying a disposable screen pro tector WA6111 G2 These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen When they become scratched and abraded they are easily removed and replaced Cleaning the WORKABOUT PRO Important Do not immerse the unit in water Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean e Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the hand held unit e Avoid abrasive cleaners solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals The plastic is partially soluble in oils mineral spirits and gasoline The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions To clean ink marks from the keypad or touchscreen use isopropyl alcohol WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 57 WORKING WITH WINDOWS MOBILE 6 1 4 4 1 Navigating in Windows Mobile 6 1 and Applications 61 4 1 1 Navigating Using a Touchscreen and Stylus 61 4 2 Windows Mobile 6 1 Desktop Today Screen o a 61 4 2 1 Windows Mobile 6 1 Navigation Bar o 62 4 2 2 Today s Date Clock and Alarm o o o o ooo 65 4 2 3 Ownership Information o 67 4 2 4 E mail Notification 2 a 68 4 2 5 Task Notif
173. coding Symbologies To configure the bar code decoding camera presets C 12 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 4 8 C 4 9 Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Setting The Active Preset Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab Tap on the Barcoding tab Figure C 3 Viewing Bar Code Decoding Symbologies PTS Imager Settim Y e H ok Camera Presets d Default Low light Low power Glossy surface View Add Activate Barcode Presets My Default Factory Default inear and PDF4 R Edit Ada Activate R Read W Write A Active peridng retratos LU Setting The Active Preset An active preset has an A to the right in Figure C 2 on page page C 9 the active preset is Defaults To set an active preset e Highlight the preset and tap on the Activate button Viewing A Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset Highlight a preset and tap on the View button WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 13 Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Creating A Custom Preset The associated preset window is displayed PTS Imager Settim Y qe 350 ok Symbology Settings Preset Factory Default Options Code 39 Trioptic Code disabled Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A UPC E UPC EAN Shared Settings Code 93 Predefined settings are read only e Tap on the sign to expand one of the lists so that you can
174. ct ab cde fah ijk imn opg rst uw xyz FA AUTO la 411 Assistance amp Magda G Q Tailor E Tap on Enter a name and type a contact name or tap on a name in the list Phone Speed Dial Contact Tailor E nae Number 424 555 1212 Location 4 lt Available gt LF A sequential speed dial key is automatically assigned in the Location field You can tap on the Location drop down menu and change the auto assignment WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 23 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Send End Calls Using the WORKABOUT PRO Keyboard Using the Contact List to Program a Speed Dial Tap Contact in the softkey bar at the bottom of the Today screen Contacts e ES PARE 3 AUTO 2086 bt 411 Assistance 411 jaa Magda G 416 668 2784 txt Tailor E A 424 555 1212 w Tap on the Contact to which you want to assign a speed dial number Contacts E Tailor Call work 424 555 1212 Edit Save to SIM Send Text Message Send Contact gt Delate Contact Call E Inthe Summary screen tap on Menu gt Add to Speed Dial 2 8 2 Send amp End Calls Using the WORKABOUT PRO Keyboard WORKABOUT PROSs are equipped with a Send and an End phone buttons The sample below illustrates where these phone buttons are located on the QWERTY keyboard On al 24 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapte
175. ctrum DSSS 292 8 2 2 Model RA3030 G2 GSM GPRS EDGE Radio 292 8 2 3 Model RA3040 G2 Siemens HC25 UMTS Modem 294 8 24 Bluctooth x a cheng ke acca ae oe erg Sra a ORE a A a a G 296 8 3 Battery Specifications ee 296 8 3 1 High Capacity Model WA3006 1 20 02 ee ee ee 296 8 3 1 1 Electrical Specifications 2 2 ee ee 296 8 3 1 2 Standard Discharge 2 2 2 ee ee ee ee 298 8 3 1 3 Safety Data 2 ee 300 8 3 14 Safety License i 8a wis ken Bik he baw he eae eS 300 8 3 1 5 Environmental Test 2 ee ee ee 301 8 3 2 Super High Capacity Model WA3010 0 0005 302 8 3 2 1 Electrical Specifications 2 2 ee 302 8 3 2 2 Standard Discharge 2 2 ee ee 304 8 3 2 3 Safety Data ee 306 8 3 2 4 Safety ICONS ve ose a lia lado Pe ans 306 8 3 2 5 Environmental Test 307 8 4 Scanner Imager Model Numbers e 308 8 5 Scanner Specifications a a a aa g a a a a S G 308 8 5 1 SE1223HP LR And SE955HP Specifications 308 8 5 1 1 SE 1223HP Decode Zone 2 310 8 5 1 2 SE 1223LR Decode Zone ee 310 8 5 1 3 SE 9SSHP Decode Zone anoa ee 311 8 5 2 SE1524ER Scanner Specifications 2 ee 311 8 5 2 1 SE1524 Scanner Decode Zone 313 8 5 3 EV15 Imager Specifications 2 o ee ee 314 8 5 3 1 EV15 Imager Decode Zon
176. d except those with currently paired and connected services Note To limit the scope of the scan to a particular type of device refer to Filtering By Class of Device COD on page 205 204 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Device Tab 6 39 2 2 Filtering By Class of Device COD Bluetooth Select device to start pairing 001E374E4D96 This menu allows you to limit the scope of the scan to a particular type of device If for ex ample you choose Computer from this menu only computers within range of the WORKABOUT PRO are listed in the Device tab Choosing All lists all detected devices 6 39 2 3 Device Pop up Menu Bluetooth Select device to start pairing TORPSG 011 ANACITACAMOE Pair Refresh Name Delete The Device pop up menu allows you to pair a device update a device name or delete a device from the list Pair begins the pairing process by inquiring the services and profiles of the discovered device An authentication dialog box is displayed the first time a Bluetooth device is paired WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 205 Chapter 6 Settings Device Tab Refresh Name repeats the device name inquiry updating the name This command is useful if a device is listed without a name unknown or if a device name has been changed remotely Delete removes this device from the list 6 39 2 4 Pairing a Device To pair devices e Follow
177. d on a predefined preset Important It is strongly recommended that a predefined preset is used whenever possible Each predefined preset contains a coherent group of settings that are known to work together in the intended environment In almost all situations at least one of the prede fined presets results in a satisfactory outcome A preset is a group of exposure and image correction settings Each preset config ures the imager for a specific purpose such as bar code decoding or image capture Presets also allow easier and faster configuration of the imager after power on or resume from suspend The predefined presets are generic and satisfy most user requirements A custom preset can be created for a specific user application such as include only specified bar codes read only a specified number of bar codes or for reading unusual media WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 1 Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Predefined Presets Every preset belongs to a preset type The following preset types are available Imaging for photo capture Imaging for bar code decoding e Symbology selection At any time only one preset of each type can be designated as the user selected active preset C 2 1 Predefined Presets Predefined presets are built into the imaging software and cannot be changed The pre defined presets allow you to use the imager to perform specified tasks without having to understand and set nume
178. d the unit from damage Itis equipped with a soft plastic window to protect the unit display and keyboard A variety of cases are available depending on the type of end cap attached to your unit Soft Shell Holster A soft shell holster with removable belt and swivel holster pad can be used to hang a WORKABOUT PRO with a pistol grip from you waist WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 257 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Soft Shell Holster Figure 7 3 Soft Shell Holster Swivel Holster Pad and Removable Belt Insert the belt in the swivel holster pad Attach the pad on either the left or right side of the holster case depending on whether you are left or right handed e Fasten the belt comfortably around your waist Slide the adjustable ring on the belt to tighten the holster in place e Connect the safety tether cord to one of the clips on the bottom of the soft shell holster Connect the other end to the hole in the end of the WORKABOUT PRO pistol grip This tether will catch the unit in case of a drop The tether can be adjusted to the opera tor s height The clips will break away in case of a severe force 258 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 7 7 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories The Batteries The Batteries En Note Review Chapter 8 Specifications for details 7 7 1 The WORKABOUT PRO will operate with any of the following Li
179. de D 17 safety instructions 280 Scan Data Format D 6 Scan Indicator 176 Scan Log File 177 Scan Result 776 Scan Result Time 76 Security Level D 3 Security Level TLC 39 D 57 Set Length L1 D 7 Set Length L2 D 7 specifications 308 Suffix D 6 Supp Redundancy D 2 Supplementals D 2 target aiming dot duration D 2 TLC 39 D 57 Translations tab 177 Transmit Check Digit D 8 Transmit Check Digit 12 of 5 D 16 Transmit Check Digit MSI Plessey D 15 Transmit Code 1D Char D 5 Trioptic Code 39 23 Trioptic Code 39 Enable D 6 UPC A Check Digit D UPC A Preamble D UPC EAN D 2 UPC EAN Shared Settings 27 D 49 UPC E Check Digit D UPC E Preamble D UPC E1 Check Digit D UPC E1 Preamble D 1D internal 28 2D UPC Half Block Stitching D 13 Scanning Mode 2D D 5 Scan Result 1 76 Scan Result Time 76 screen navigating 6 stylus 61 touch pen 6 scrolling adjusting speed Up_ Down tab 126 SCU Summit Client Utility 16 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual IX Index configuring 17 Diags Diagnostics Tab 4 7 EAP Credentials 4 6 EAP Types 4 4 A 5 Global Settings Tab 4 8 IP assigning 16 Main Tab 17 4 1 Profile Tab 4 2 security 4 4 Status Tab 4 7 ThirdPartyConfig 4 6 Windows Zero Config WZC 4 6 WLAN connecting to 16 SD MMC Card inserting 55 Search find 115 secure battery cover 259 Security Level D 3 Security Level TLC 39 D 57 serial modem setup See Connection Properties 2 2 Serv
180. dis 169 Remove PIO AOS ic ea dans 170 Sereen ICA A ci 170 Task Mad A E SES 171 Teklogix Imagers Settings 0oooooococcooccnoccrcnnrnrrr rr rr rr 173 Teklogix Scanners Settings oooooooooccccroccnonrrnrnr rr rr rr 174 6 33 1 Bar Code Settings The Scanner Menu cece ceee cece eee eee eee ee 175 6 33 2 Options Tab 175 0 33 3 Translations Tab 2222902 cecasnnnnnnrnntesacasaasatens E a EEO REEN 177 633 4 Ports Tabsiiciscecctdecssssccieicncccccceeeeeeee er eaeaasergeedessceceses TEENE 180 Total Recall errr fice erer rT e cee E ETETE catia AAAA EEEE EEEE ees 186 6 34 1 Creating A Backup Profile 0oooooooooooorcconccrrrrcrrrrrrrrrrns 187 6 34 2 Restoring A Professi ciie nananana anaana EEE EEE EEEE NSR SN 190 6 34 3 Viewing a Prol IS 191 6 344 Deleting a Profile s 3 sccchssccnncncnnnnmaencueesusnabouesaadaganegune ny ebeones 192 O RR EESE 193 6 35 1 Advanced Interface And Network Settings 00 userre srr 194 6 35 2 Advanced Services Settings 0 6 cece cece cee cece eee eee eee eee ee eeeneeenes 195 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Contents 6 33 3 Radio Features ii iia 196 6 35 4 User Systemi Setting soe ia a EE AAA eel 197 6 35 5 Registry Editor 00 cece cece eect e eee e eee e tenet enenenenerenensesneeees 198 6 36 Windows Update concisa rior aA 198 637 Connections Tab e e CLLn ELL 598 888 198 6 38 A dee oor Foss Boson es MEE ERE sn se ea REE E
181. dows Mobile 6 1 version processor information memory size and a description of the expansion card if one is in use Device ID Tab This tab provides fields in which you can assign a Device name and Description optional for the WORKABOUT PRO This name is used by the WORKABOUT PRO to identify itself to other devices Keep in mind that this must be a unique name across a network If you are unable to connect to a network because another device with the same name is already connected you 1l need to assign a new name here WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 6 15 6 16 Chapter 6 Settings About Device Copyrights The Copyright tab lists the copyright information for the software loaded on your WORKABOUT PRO About Device ma About Device Tapping on the About Device icon under Settings gt System tab provides access to three tabs related to your WORKABOUT PRO The Properties tab lists hardware information related to your WORKABOUT PRO The Copyrights tab lists the copyrights that apply to your hand held The Experience tab allows you to choose a category to help you define your Ex perience These categories include Microsoft settings Psion Teklogix settings and Custom settings in a drop down menu Each category contains a group of default settings If you change a default setting the category is automatically changed to Custom settings Backlight Tapping on Start gt Settings gt Sy
182. e 2 2 2 eee 315 85 4 SX5400 Imager cos son wile aoe a A ee tha Goa ode 315 8 5 4 1 SX5400 Imager Performance 2 002 0004 316 8 55 HAP5180 imagers vicio a a leh dee Bade ee 317 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 285 286 8 5 5 1 HHP5180 Imager Decode o WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 8 1 Chapter 8 Specifications Hand Held Computer Specifications Hand Held Computer Specifications Model Variants e WORKABOUT PRO C Model 7527C G2 e WORKABOUT PRO S Model 7527S G2 Platform PXA270M 624 MHz 32 bit RISC CPU e 1024 MB Flash ROM 256 MB RAM Operating System e Microsoft Windows Mobile 6 1 Classic e Microsoft Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional Wireless Communication Optional expansion modules for e 802 11b g via Compact Flash operating in the 2 4GHz band Supports IEEE 802 11b data rates of 1 2 5 5 and 11Mbps using Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS e Supports IEEE 802 11g data rates of 6 9 12 24 36 48 and 54Mbps using Orthagonal Frequency Division Multiplexing OFDM base band modulation GSM GPRS EDGE via expansion interface Quad Band 850 900 1800 1900 Voice and Data UMTS HSDPA via expansion interface Triple band 850 1900 2100 MHz Voice and Data Integrated Bluetooth class II ver 2 0 EDR Working Range 16 4 ft to 32 81 ft 5m to 10m _ Note 802 11b g GSM and Bluetooth are available simult
183. e or leakage and 4A for 8 hrs Reverse Charging After a standard discharge Protection circuit board to operate Test reverse charge continuously No explosion fire smoke or leakage at 4 2V and 4A for 8hrs 8 3 1 4 Safety License Item Licenses Standard 1 UL 1642 The lithium ion cell has been listed and pass the UL1642 stand ard by UL Lab 2 UL 2054 The battery pack is in the process to apply the UL 2054 battery standard 3 89 336 EEC The battery pack is in the process to apply the below standard EMC directive EN55022 LVD 72 23 EEC EN55024 EN61326 4 RoHS Direc The battery pack is in the process to apply the RoHS directive tive applicable report by SGS Lab 300 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 8 3 1 5 Environmental Test Description Drop Storage at high temp Test Reference mechanical EN60068 2 2 Test Chapter 8 Specifications High Capacity Model WA3006 Test Condition Result Drop sample battery on all faces from height of 1 2 meters onto concrete floor No explosion fire vent leakage and the open circuit voltage higher than 3 7V 60 C dry for 240 hours No explosion fire vent or leakage Storage at low temp EN60068 2 1 Test 20 C dry for 240 hours No explosion fire vent or leakage Storage at high temp and high humidity IEC68 2 3 Test 40 C at 90 RH for 240 hours No explosion fire vent or leakage
184. e sec The value assigned to the Scan Result Time sec parameter determines how long the scan results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen Time is measured in seconds and a value of 0 zero disables the parameter When you choose this option a dialog box appears where you can enter a value Note To remove the scan result from the screen before the Result Time has expired point the scanner away from the bar code and press the trigger Good Scan Beep And Bad Scan Beep These parameters determine whether or not the hand held emits an audible scanner beep when a good successful scan or a bad unsuccessful scan is performed Set these parame ters to either on to enable the beeper or off to disable it Soft Scan Timeout This parameter is used by the SDK Scan function soft scan starting a scan session via the SDK function instead of a physical user trigger press The value assigned to this parameter determines the soft scan timeout from 1 to 10 sec default is 3 sec 176 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Translations Tab Scan Log File If this parameter is enabled the input barcode and the modified translated output bar code are logged in the file Flash Disk ScanLog txt Keep in mind that if the Scan Log File is enabled there is a slight performance effect when performing multiple scans since the log file is written to persistent storage
185. e Inches Inches 5 2 5 7 10 3 14 UPC 2 14 5 20 2 5 22 40 3 35 5 20 2 5 22 High quality symbols in normal room light SX5400 Imager Specification SX5400 Optical resolution 752H x 480V Field of view at 160mm 120mm H x 78mm V 41 1 H x 27 4 V Pitch angle 45 Skew angle 45 Ambient light 0 to 100 000 lux full sunlight 300 lux nominal Minimum contrast 10 Targeting Intuitive range finding 626 nm LED Self illumination Red LED standard Supply voltage 5V 10 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 315 Chapter 8 Specifications SX5400 Imager Power supply 3 6 Volt DC nominal 2 7 5 Volts DC Connectivity USB 1 1 or serial async 8 5 4 1 Connector to the interface Molex 52892 1295 or HiRose FH12 12S 5SH board Symbologies supported Code 39 Code 39 Full ASCII UPC A A2 A5 UPC E E2 ES EAN 8 13 JAN I20f5 Code 128 Codabar NW7 RSS 14 RSS Limited RSS Expanded RSS 14 Truncated PDF417 microPDF417 Composite CC A CC B CC C image capture Data Matrix QR Code Maxicode Aztec Code Planet Postnet Royal Mail 4SCC 4 State postal codes from Australia Canada Japan Korean Post 3o0f5 Formerly known as Symagery SX5400 SX5400 Imager Performance The table below presents the typical performance of the SX5400 Imager at 300 lux 160mm focus when using Grade A photographic quality
186. e Internet To activate a connection make certain that any necessary equipment is installed in your WORKABOUT PRO such as a radio You ll need the following information from your ISP to make an internet connection ISP server phone number user name and e password 214 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Modem Connection Setup 1 Tap Start gt Settings and then tap on the Connections tab Beam Bluetooth o 2D Connections Domain Enroll gt 0 la USB to PC Wireless Manager Statisti Connections 2 Tap on the Connections icon Note In the Connections window the Tasks tab is used to create new connections and manage existing ones The Advanced tab allows you to choose a network If you need to change these settings contact your ISP or network administrator before making changes 3 Under My ISP tap on Add a new modem connection 4 Inthe Select a modem drop down menu choose a modem connection If you haven t already created a modem connection refer to Modem Connection Setup on page 215 5 To connect to the Internet launch the program you want to use For example launch Internet Explorer on your WORKABOUT PRO to browse the Internet Your WORKABOUT PRO automatically connects Note To set up a network card or wireless network connection to your ISP add a new con nection under My Work Network 6 41 1 Modem Connection Setup Before you begin
187. e a setting press space or double click Barcodes Ops renace Pore Tap on the Scanner drop down menu and choose Decoded Intermec ISCP D 42 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 4 1 D 4 2 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Options Decoded Scanner Options Decoded Scanner Laser On Time The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 1 and 10 seconds Advanced Options Decoded Scanner Continuous Scan Mode Setting this parameter to on keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the scanner button is pressed and held down Minimum Cancel Time The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off once the scanner trigger or button is released This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when the user quickly triggers on off Low Power Timeout To extend laser life you can select the length of time the scanner remains active following a successful decode The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned a successful decode restores normal blinking When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec 1 min 2 min or 3 min
188. e click Translations Scanner Settings vay Yi Mz lok fay Case 1 empty No rule No rule No rule No rule No rule No rule No rule No rule No rule To change a setting press space or double click 178 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Translations Tab Tap on the No rule drop down menu to display the rules Scanner Settings ay Yi lok No rule X ooo Action Search and replace No rule defined No rule defined Scanner Settings rey Y Mz lok Match at index X must be found at specified index 6 33 3 1 Case Rules The case rules are defined as follows e Norule ignored e Match at index matches the match string at a specified index Match and replace at index matches the match string at a specified index and replaces changes it Replace at index replaces changes unspecified data in a given range Add barcode prefix suffix adds a global prefix or suffix WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 179 Chapter 6 Settings Ports Tab e Verify barcode size verifies the bar code size This rule should generally be assigned first before creating subsequent rules Search and replace replaces all instances of the match string Note that this rule cannot fail MI Note Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken into account when creating subsequent rules For e
189. e e cee e rr 261 7 9 1 Installation Chargers And Docking Stations nsee 261 7 9 2 Power Consumption Considerations 0000 cece eee e cece eee e ene eenes 262 HDI Operator Control oo a ceisecias te ieee ata sra 262 7 9 4 Important Charger Safety Instructions 0 cece cece eect eee ee eee e eens 262 Desktop Docking Station 0 cece cece cece cect AAAA ELELU ET 263 7 10 1 Charging A Battery Installed In The WORKABOUT BRO td dd cai 265 7 10 2 Charging A Spare Battery oooooooocoooccooooornrcrnnnr cnn 265 7 10 3 Battery Charge Durati0M 0oooooooocooocoronororcrrrnrrrrrn rr rr 266 7 10 4 Charger LED Indicators 0oooooooocooocoroncrnrcrrnnrn eee eet rar 266 Troubleshooting The Charging Operation Of The DocCk oooocccccoccccccccccnccccos 266 Linking A WORKABOUT PRO To A PC cr ees 266 Linking A WORKABOUT PRO To An Ethernet Network u isisi oeiee ccein 267 DAB IW Network ACCESS irie inpe E anne odd 8s cob eos EIEEE RER ARRESE sees 267 Troubleshooting The Docking Station Operations sce ee eee eee e ee eee neeees 268 AC Wall Adaptor Model PS1050 G1 cece ccc cnc cee enn e ence eee enn ee eees 268 Automotive Adaptor Model WA3113 G2 0 ccc cece eect eee e ence een ns 269 Single Battery Charger Model FWA3001 G1 2 0 0 cece ccc eee ete eee e eect eenees 269 7 17 1 Inserting A Battery In The Single Battery Charger ee eee 27
190. e ee 146 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 117 6 15 About Device 4 8 enc a A a ee awe a a 147 6 16 Backlight o osasit irie aa ee a 147 6 16 1 Battery POWer e 148 6 16 2 External Power e e 149 O A ow By hacoe hk wee BA Ree ean Be BE 149 6 17 Centihicates sn ii EA SoM eta ehh A AS eh AO 150 6 17 1 Choosing A Certificate ose a ee ee a 152 6 18 Clock amp Alarms os aegse ee iy a Sa A E 152 6 19 COM Port Manager 152 6 20 Dr Debug uu Ea a Be dto l 153 A A ace A 154 6 20 2 Settings aa A a a aa ral 154 6 2 0S WHS fa seis cbs A a He Gd Sg ate ted 155 6 21 Encryption 03 Son otek ee eb Se oh ahaa Se at Sa geile ae et Ae tes 155 6 22 Error Reporting ars Enele ne ie eel OE ee Be ake eee Sh ee poh ale ea 156 6 23 External GPS Global Positioning System 04 156 6 24 Manage Triggers yii ie es aid ah we tel ee a PRG 158 6 24 1 Trigger Mappings 2 1 a 159 6 24 1 1 Add And Edit Trigger Mapping 0 160 6 25 Managed Programs ooa 161 6 26 Memory e ie a Be he Le da a ea Ge 162 6 26 Main Tabi io a aa A Ee 163 6 26 2 Storage Cad co ai a a a e Sa ee 163 6 29 Power leone ica sa a o Dista 163 6 27 1 Battery Tab to in E RT Ge Be STA oe ee 164 6 27 2 Advanced Tab o o ooo 164 6 27 3 Battery Details 0 o 165 6 27 4 Built In Devices o o o e 166 0 210 Card Slots a
191. e legend stamped into the battery well plastic For a SD MMC card slide the card into the lower slot pushing it inward until it latches into place For a SIM card slide the card into the upper slot pushing it inward until it latches into place Note that a label over the SIM opening needs to be removed before the card can be inserted only after a GSM UMTS radio is installed On a WORKABOUT PRO C swing the hinged door back up into place and gently snap it shut On a WORKABOUT PRO S the metal SD door incorporates dimples that act as a locking feature Dimples AMES V FP E Push the door down so the dimples fit into the slot cut into the battery compartment plastic To remove the card Gently press the card inward until it unlatches and the card is ejected from the slot 56 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 3 12 3 12 1 3 12 2 A Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO General Maintenance General Maintenance Caring for the Touchscreen The top of the touchscreen is a thin flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive coating on the inside The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic or crack the internal conductive coating The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen sodium hydroxide concentrated
192. e options in this parameter allow you to turn this emulation on or off or to enable RSS Emulation D 34 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 3 23 D 3 24 D 3 25 Appendix D Bar Code Settings TLC 39 Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 2435 TLC 39 This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear code Enabled Setting this parameter to on enables this parameter Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details PDF 417 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable PDF 417 Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 1 to 2750 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Micro PDF 417 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Micro PDF 417 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 35 Appendi
193. e remaining battery capacity of the main battery and the inter nal backup battery 6 27 2 Advanced Tab 4 d 5 18 lok On battery power Faro dee F rat On external power Turn off device if not Sminutes a used for The Advanced tab allows you to manage battery consumption On Battery Power When the WORKABOUT PRO is operating on battery power this option allows you to de termine how long the unit will remain on when it is not in use Tap in the checkbox to the left of On battery power to enable this option Tap in the drop down menu to choose the number of minutes your unit can remain idle before it shuts down 164 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Battery Details On External Power When the hand held is drawing external rather than battery power this option allows you to determine the number of minutes the unit will remain on when not in use Tap in the checkbox to the left of On external power to enable this option Tap in the drop down menu to choose the number of minutes your unit can remain idle before it shuts down 6 27 3 Battery Details F er Y 4 lok CES Chemistry Li Ion Voltage 41V Current 2 mA Full Capacity 3019 mAh Charge Remaining 2822 mAh Battery Temperature 33 C Battery Status Good 95 Battery Details Suspend 4 gt This tab lists the specifications and battery capacity status of the battery installed in
194. e to connect to the Internet Tap Connect It takes approximately 30 seconds to establish a connection If you are prompted to turn on Bluetooth tap Yes If your are using a Bluetooth connection execute the following steps on your PC e e Click Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections Right click on Bluetooth Network Connections and click on View Bluetooth Network Devices If the WORKABOUT PRO is listed as a Network Access Point click Connect If it is not listed click Create a new connection and use the New Connection Wizard to add the WORKABOUT PRO to the list Notes 0 Notes The Notes application is an electronic notepad you can use to jot down your ideas quickly You can enter text using the soft keyboard the WORKABOUT PRO keyboard or you can write on the screen using your stylus You can also record a message Notes can also be shared through e mail and synchronization with your PC Tap on Start gt Programs gt Notes to launch this application WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 103 Chapter 5 Programs Creating a Note 5 11 1 e Ifa blank Note like the sample screen here is not displayed tap on New in the softkey bar 46257 bk Creating a Note e Choose an entry mode for your note To enter text with the soft keyboard Transcriber or the Block or Letter Recognizer tap the stylus on the arrow to the right on the soft keyboard icon to choose
195. e your macro Your macro key sequence is listed in the Macro screen Tap on OK to save your macro key assignment Executing A Macro e Press the macro key to which you ve assigned the macro For example if you created a macro for macro key 1 press M1 FN ORANGE O to execute the macro Deleting A Macro In the Macros tab highlight the macro number you want to delete Tap on the Delete button WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 129 Chapter 6 Settings Unicode Mapping 6 4 4 Unicode Mapping Tap on the Unicode Mapping tab to display this screen y Settings 46 4 23 bk Buttons VKey S C Unicode Add Change Remove Macros Unicode Mapping The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and CTRL and SHIFT states to Unicode values This tab shows the configured Unicode character along with the Unicode value For example a U 0061 indicates that the character a is represented by the Unicode value 0061 and so on Keep in mind that Unicode configura tions are represented as hexidecimal rather than decimal values All user defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order of virtual key value and then by order of the shift state If a Unicode mapping is not listed the Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value Adding And Changing Unicode Values A Important Changes to Unicode m
196. ed you ll need to set up the proxy server connection manually To set up the proxy server connection manually you ll need the following information proxy server name server type port type of Socks protocol used and the user name and password Tap Start gt Settings Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 225 Chapter 6 Settings Proxy Server Setup Under My Work Network tap on Set up my proxy server Settings g Mic d ok My Work Network a This network connects to the Intemet General Modem VPN Proxy Settings Add a checkmark next to This network connects to the Internet and This network uses a proxy server to connect to the Internet Inthe Proxy server field type the proxy server name Tap on OK to save your changes MN Note Ifyou need to change advanced settings such as a port number or proxy server type you ll need to tap on the Advanced button rather than tapping on OK Advanced set tings are described in Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings on page 226 6 42 8 1 Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings To change advanced settings such as the port number or proxy server type tap on the Advanced button My Work Network a Tap a proxy type to change its settings Type Server HTTP WAP Secure WAP Socks Tap on the proxy type you want to change F
197. ed main battery before this time elapses WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 167 Chapter 6 Settings Wakeup Keys Tab 6 27 7 Wakeup Keys Tab This option allows you to define which key can be pressed to wake the hand held from a suspend state If the Two key wakeup option is checked the operator will need to press two keys FN BLUE ENTER to switch the hand held on Scan key wakeup Allow these scanner keys to power on the device C center scan C Left side scan C Right side scan L Trigger handle Two key wakeup C Enable Suspend Threshold Wakeup Keys suspenl TD 6 27 8 Suspend Mode Go to standby on suspend Suspend Mode When this option is enabled any time the WORKABOUT PRO enters suspend mode e g following an idle timeout Go to standby on suspend forces the WORKABOUT PRO to enter Standby mode In Standby mode the display is turned off the keyboard is locked and the touchscreen is locked The processor remains on so that any running applications will 168 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 6 28 Chapter 6 Settings Regional Settings continue while the hand held is in a Standby state In addition the radios continue to run making them instantly available when the unit is powered up again Regional Settings To display the Regional Settings screen tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on the System tab followed by the Regiona
198. eel Sahota BM 89 SS ACUVeESYNC a kiwis eas A Sede a ely Gt eG we a ee A 89 5 3 Synchronization a eee wh Geeks Bee E a 90 SA Calculators acces dese dod d a a Sp eae be hea gest 90 SOM Ce Mobles eae a BS ee Pd Ea en a 90 5 5 Excel Mobles vtech SR Be oe OE ee ee eg 90 5 5 1 1 Workbook Components 0 0000005 91 5 5 2 OneNote Mobile o e 92 55 3 Word Mobile iiris oea A A eB AAA 98 5 5 3 1 Data Entry Modes 99 5 5 3 2 Sharing Documents with Your PC 99 5 5 4 PowerPoint Mobile 2 2 2 ee ee 100 5 6 Demo Scanner n Sa BAA a EB ED a ae eS bara ee 100 5 7 Pile Explorer ri wd ie Lah ERB wa lal eae ba We ee Mega 101 5 8iGetting Started Lgi tee cede eee BU ROG A eae 101 5 9 PT SI Imager Demon sao ce we a e ele es Sek ee ee a es ae es 101 5 10 Internet Sharing 2 ee 102 5 10 1 Creating an Internet Connection o o oo 102 5 10 2 Using Internet Sharing o e 102 SAL NOTES ose a IS A A A a VS atin ii 103 5 11 1 Creating a Notesu i ose s ao d a a as 104 5 11 2 Converting Handwritten Notes to Text o o o o 104 5 11 3 RenamingaNote e 106 5 11 4 Recording Notes e 106 5 11 5 Synchronizing a Note o e 108 5 12 Pictures amp VideOS um ie key eh a A a ea ee a ae we 108 5 12 1 Moving Photos to the WORKBOUT PRO 108 5 122 Opening aiPhotoe 6 s
199. efined preset C 2 C 3 C 4 Default identifier Preset group C 2 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Ill Index Default Local ASCII Code Page 177 Delete Char Set ECIs D 6 desktop docking station WA4002 263 desktop screen Today s Screen 6 Device ID tab 146 Device tab Bluetooth 204 Dial String Commands modem setup 214 Dial Tone wait for modem setup 2 4 Diff Read Timeout D 44 digit check digit D 15 30 Discrete 2 of 5 D 16 32 D 54 Discrete 2 of 5 D 16 32 display backlight adjusting 47 docking station uploading data using 5 docking stations 26 desktop docking station 263 installation at site 26 operator controls 262 quad dock 273 Dot Time D 2 double click appending characters to a decoded barcode 176 scanner trigger 175 Double Click Manage Triggers menu 159 Dr Debug 153 DSSS 802 11b g radio 292 E EAN 13 D 10 24 D 47 EAN 8 D 10 25 D 47 EAN 8 Zero Extend D 0 ECI Decoder D 6 email notification 68 Enable Bookland UPC EAN D 2 Enable CC AB D 18 D 56 Enable CC C D 18 D 56 Enable Plessy D 5 Enable RSS Expanded D 7 33 D 56 Enable RSS Limited D 17 33 D 56 Enable RSS 14 D 17 D 56 Enable TLC 39 D 18 35 Error Reporting 156 Ethernet card See Network Card 220 Excel Mobile 90 External GPS 156 External Power tab 149 F features WORKABOUT PRO3 4 Field Size D 9 file renaming 76 File Explorer 75 101 copy 76 copying a file 76 deleting file 76 folders crea
200. endar Upcoming No upcoming appointments Phone off Appointments On Getting Started Tap here to set owner information No unread messages No tasks A No upcoming appointments Live Search Softkey Bar Windows Mobile 6 1 Classic Phone Softkey Contacts Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 61 Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Windows Mobile 6 1 Navigation Bar The Today screen displays all your important information tasks unread e mails and upcoming appointments all in one place The Start menu provides access to everything else you ll need 4 2 1 Windows Mobile 6 1 Navigation Bar The navigation bar along the top of the screen provides icons that when tapped open their associated programs If you re unit is equipped with Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional you ll be see a Phone hotkey for quick access to phone settings Hotkeys Volume Control Start Button mm Connectivity Battery Capacity Windows Mobile 6 1 Classic Navigation Bar ey ta Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional Navigation Bar En Note When a peripheral is attached to the tether or LIF port of the WORKABOUT PRO an associated icon is displayed briefly in the navigation bar to indicate that the hand held has recognized the connection Start Button Tapping on the Start button displays the Start menu 62 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 4 Working With
201. ening the battery cover on your WORKABOUT PRO press the Power button to turn off the hand held To unlock the battery cover turn the left hand battery fastener to the left and turn the right hand battery fastener to the right You can either use your fingers or the top of your stylus to turn the fasteners For details about how to lock and unlock the optional safety battery cover refer to Secure Battery Cover on page 259 e Remove the battery cover Ensure that the ON OFF switch in the battery compartment is set to ON before inserting the battery Snap the charged battery into the unit Replace the battery cover and lock the fasteners in place WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Switching the Unit Off Suspend Note Ifyou are using a docking station or an external power supply you can insert an uncharged battery dock the unit and switch it on To switch on the WORKABOUT PRO gt e Press and hold down the Power button for at least one second When the LED flashes green release the ENTER button The desktop Today screen is displayed Note If the unit was already in use the unit may be off suspend state pressing ENTER 2 2 2 wakes the unit from this state The screen in which you were working prior to the suspend state is displayed Wakeup Keys Tab on page 168 describes how you can assign other wakeup keys or enable a two key po
202. equired to enter a PIN A non recoverable fatal error has occurred GSM GPRS Status Indicators Signal strength is between 1 and 20 Signal strength is between 21 and 40 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 227 Es Es by E E FT i Chapter 6 Settings Establishing A Connection Signal strength is between 41 and 60 Signal strength is between 61 and 80 Signal strength is between 81 and 100 A GPRS packet data connection is active CDMA 1xRTT Signal strength is between 1 and 20 Signal strength is between 21 and 40 Signal strength is between 41 and 60 Signal strength is between 61 and 80 Signal strength is between 81 and 100 A CDMA 1xRTT packet data connection is active 6 44 2 Establishing A Connection e Tap on Start gt Settings Tap on the System tab followed by the Wireless WAN icon y Wireless WAN 2 12 36 ok Network Signal Status Searching for modem Rx Tx bytes Note If you are prompted to enter a PIN refer to Entering A PIN on page 230 for details EN SAA 228 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual EL 6 44 3 Chapter 6 Settings Disconnecting From A Network The Status field indicates when the unit is ready to connect the Connect Data button is enabled Tap on the Connect Data button The progress of the connection is tracked in the Status
203. er C 2 profile creating backup 187 profile restoring backup 190 profile viewing backup 9 Programs 80 89 closing 80 minimizing 80 opening 80 properties WORKABOUT PRO3 47 protective case 257 proxy server setting up 225 quad battery charger 271 quad dock WA4204 G2 273 QWERTY keyboard alpha keys accessing 45 R radio Bluetooth specs 296 GSM SPRS EDGE 292 RA2041 radio specifications 292 RA3030 G2 GSM radio specifications 292 RA3040 G2 UMTS Modem radio specifications 294 UMTS modem Siemens HC25 294 802 11b g Direct Sequence SS 292 radio specifications 292 Raster Expand Rate 2D D 5 Raster Height 2D D 5 RA2041 radio specifications 292 RA3030 G2 GSM radio specifications 292 RA3040 G2 HC25 UMTS Modem radio specifications 294 Reading Range D 44 D 46 D 49 D 53 reboot reset 3 Regional Settings 169 remapping Scancode 131 Unicode 130 Remote Desktop Mobile 114 Remove Programs 170 reset 31 resetting the WORKABOUT reset 31 resetting the WORKABOUT PRO3 cold reset 32 RSS Code D 17 33 D 55 S safety instructions battery charger 262 263 scanner 280 safety warning scanner 280 Same Read Timeout D 44 Same Read Validate D 43 Scan Angle D 5 Scancode remapping 131 Scan Data Format D 6 Scan Indicator 776 Scan Log File 1 77 scanner one dimensional 1D internal scanner 281 safety warnings 280 techniques scanning 280 troubleshooting tips 281 two dimensional 2D imager scanner 282 scanner model number
204. er Settings modem setup 2 8 Server tab Bluetooth 208 Set Length L1 D 7 Set Length L2 D 7 Settings 82 123 App Launch 124 Buttons 126 Personal Tab 1 23 App Launch icon 124 Buttons icon 1 26 One Shot tab 127 Up_Down tab 126 SE 955 scanner specs 308 shift state indicator accessing 78 shift state indicator softkey bar 78 shift state indicator icon 42 SIM card inserting 55 single battery charger WA3001 269 Sled See vehicle cradle 276 softkey softkey bar 78 softkey bar shift state indicator 78 softkey 78 soft keyboard icon 78 softkeys 78 soft keyboard onscreen 83 soft keyboard icon softkey bar 78 softkeys softkey bar 78 Soft Scan Timeout 176 Sound setting events 144 Sound settings 43 specifications for WORKABOUT PRO3 287 SE 955 scanner 308 802 11g 292 Start Stop Transmit 28 D 44 D 50 Start button 62 Start Menu 74 customising 74 customizing 141 Stop 2 3 Stop Bits 182 185 Stop Bits modem setup 2 3 Storage Card tab 163 Strip Leading D 9 Strip Start Stop Chars 22 Strip Trailing D 9 stylus touch pen using 61 Suffix D 6 Suffix Char D 9 Summit Client Utility SCU 16 super high capacity battery pack WA3010 302 Supp Redundancy Code 128 D 2 Supplementals UPC EAN D 2 Surface Glossy C 3 Suspend Threshold tab 167 swap time for battery 38 switching WORKABOUT PRO3 on 2 SX5400 imager specs 315 T target dot duration of D 2 task completed marking as 69 creating 68 deleting 69 edi
205. er decode the bar codes especially if the bar code is far from the hand held Important Keep in mind that the imager scanner is a camera and the LED illumination is a flash Glare can be an issue on reflective media such as plastic coated bar codes just as glare is an issue for photographers When pointing at a shiny surface either shift the bar code to the side or top or angle the bar code so that the glare reflects away from the imager scanner Most imagers take several snap shots of the bar code in order to decode it It is normal for the LEDs to flash two or three times Hold the unit steady between flashes to improve decode performance 282 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 7 33 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Bluetooth Peripherals Turn the hand held computer on Wait until the unit has booted up completely Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger Hold the trigger until a suc cessful or failed scan result is obtained When the scan button or trigger is pressed a red oval shaped light the framing marker is displayed Centre the framing marker in the field cither in the centre of the bar code you want to scan or in the centre of the area in which multiple bar codes are to be scanned The illumination LEDs will flash typically several times and a picture of the bar code s is taken Bluetooth Peripherals The WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with a Bluet
206. er tab we PTS Imager Settim Y er HME ok Field Size Prefix Suffix and Strip Chars Trioptic Code Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A UPC E Code 93 Codabar MSI Code 11 To change a setting press space or double click Fes Trara T C 4 14 1 Modifying A Bar Code Setting The rules for manipulating data from selected bar code symbologies can be modified To change the settings for a symbology Tap on the symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 17 Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Filter Tab Manipulating Bar Code Data e Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change For a parameter that can take a range of values Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click the parameter An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed PTS Imager Settin Y er 350 ok Minimum Length Enter value from 0 to 48 Type a value in the field provided Fora parameter that takes a single character Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click on the parameter The following screen is displayed PTS Imager Settin Y 7 y 4 lt Prefix Char Press the Key to Insert Press ESC for the default value e When
207. ers D 46 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 4 5 D 4 6 Appendix D Bar Code Settings EAN 13 Minimum Length Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details EAN 13 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 13 ISBN Conversion When this parameter International Standard Book Number is enabled the first 3 characters 978 are ignored and the checksum 0 9 X is calculated on the remaining characters Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details EAN 8 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 8 Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled Convert To EAN 13 If this parameter is enabled an EAN 8 bar code is converted to EAN 13 Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 47 Appendix D Bar Code Settings UPCA D 4 7 UPCA Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC A bar code scanning recognition
208. erted to an equivalent ASCII character Decode Performance If this parameter is enabled one of three decode levels can be chosen in the Decode Perfor mance Level parameter Decode Perf Level This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or aggressiveness for Code 39 symbols Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required bar code ori entation this is useful when scanning very long and or truncated bar codes Keep in mind that increased levels reduce decode security When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a decode performance level of between 1 and 3 Length Restriction The parameters in this sub menu allow you to define the length of the bar codes that will be decoded using either the Field Size parameter or the Minimum Size and Maximum Size pa rameters see below The order of operation to either match the Field Size or determine if the length falls between the Minimum Size and Maximum Size is as follows e Strip the leading and trailing characters e Add the prefix and suffix characters e Count the number of characters remaining to either match the field size or determine if the length falls between the minimum and maximum size D 8 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 2 6 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 128 Field Size When a value is assigned for this parameter only bar codes that match the field size exac
209. es of each other Both should be discoverable i NS S 9 10 11 12 13 14 er q 1 53 Dk Connections Make New Connection My ISP name Enter a name for the connection Add a new modem connection Set up my proxy server oy Connection 3 Manage existing connections Select a modem My Work Network Hayes Compatible on COM1 Add a new modem connection Add a new VPN server connection Tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on the Connections tab Tap on the Connections icon Tap on Add a new modem connection Type a name for the connection Tap on the Select a modem drop down menu and choose Bluetooth Tap on Next Make certain that the phone is discoverable Some phones also need to be pairable in order to accept a bonding request Refer to your phone documentation for addi tional information If the phone appears in the My Connections list skip to step 13 In the list tap the phone and then tap on the Next button In the PIN screen type a personal identification number PIN you can enter up to 16 characters Enter the same PIN on the phone If you wish you can edit the name of the phone in the Name field Tap on the Finish button In the My Connections list tap on the phone and then on Next Enter the dial up phone number for this connection and tap on Next In the User name Password and Domain fields enter the logon information for this connection and tap on Finish
210. essing Numeric KeyS 0 0 cece eeeee eee ee 45 3 4 6 Numeric Keyboard Accessing Alpha Keys 00 0 ccee eee eee eeeeeees 45 3 4 7 The Keypad Backlight srneci 0 cece eee eee E EEE rr 47 3 5 The DISPARA AT RAID 47 3 5 1 Adjusting the Backlight ooooooooocooocconorrrnnrrrcnnrr rr rro 47 3 5 2 Aligning Calibrating the Touchscreen ooooooooooooccrorcccrnrcnnrcnnns 47 3 5 3 A due yee ee vac Saas a bbhheh Ea 48 3 6 indicator senaera enera e ed O da 49 3 60 STHERED 222222222222222 30028 VE A AAR es uuu ORR EA CRRA hae tle 49 IIA AA e E dl ld rl 49 3 7 1 Adjusting Speaker Volume oooooooooococccccccnrrncnnrrrnrnrr rr 50 3 8 Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time 0 0 cece cece eee e eens 50 3 84 Storing BAETIS e ds 51 3 9 Uploading Data in a Docking Station 0 cece cece cee cece eee e tenet nee teenies 51 3210 Bluetooth Radiol A IIA 52 3 10 1 Pairing a Bluetooth Device 066 resne e eee te nett eree 52 3 11 Inserting the SD MMC Card and SIM Card 0 0 cece cece e ee eee nee eeneeeenes 55 3 11 1 Inserting and Removing the Card 0 cece cece c eee cee e eee eee eeneeees 55 3 12 General Maintenance sesoto Toe EEE EEEE cece ne nen ence EEEE EELEE EE TET 57 3 12 1 Caring for the Touchscreen ooooooooococococcrnrrnnnnrrrnrnr rr rro 57 3 12 2 Cleaning the WORKABOUT PRO DA h keie eo ct 57 Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1
211. estricted in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs global trade item number that begin with either a 0 or a 7 It is not stackable and is not designed to be read omni directionally Enable RSS Expanded RSS Expanded uses the same application identifiers as UCC EAN 128 codes but it can be split into sections and stacked several rows high reducing the length of the symbol while increasing the capacity of data that can be stored RSS Expanded code can be omni direc tionally scanned WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 17 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Composite Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 2 18 Composite A Important To successfully read this type of bar code the two types of symbologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled In addition Center Bar Code Only must be disabled A composite symbol includes multi row 2D components making it compatible with linear and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners The options available for this parameter represent multi level components of a composite symbol Enable CC C And Enable CC AB To activate these components set these parameters to on Enable TLC 39 This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear code Setting this pa rameter to on enables this parameter D
212. ete oldest message when full checkbox is checked In this case when a new message arrives and the SMS storage becomes full the oldest received message is de leted If any string is entered as the Message Suppression Prefix messages beginning with that string will not be shown in either the Inbox or Outbox In this way messages intended for another application running on the same device can be hidden WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 243 PERIPHERAL DEVICES amp ACCESSORIES 7 TliCarrying ACCESSOTIES 3 8 a a cB a 4 ele edo Bord eB ane E 249 7 2 Attaching The Hand Strap 2 2 ee 250 7 3 Attaching The Pistol Grip o 251 7 4 The Trigger Back Plate Kit With Flush Mount Pistol Grip 253 7 5 Protective Carrying Case i e E a i E A a E A a 257 7 6 Sot Shell Holsters 1 ii da A a ele ee 257 17 The Batterles eta bi li ds A Aaa 0 eh Ge eet 259 7 7 1 Secure Battery Cover o 259 7 8 Adaptor Cable Options po se i o soe eci ee 261 7 9 Chargers And Docking Stations e 261 7 9 1 Installation Chargers And Docking Stations 261 7 9 2 Power Consumption Considerations 262 7 9 3 Operator Controls o ee 262 7 9 4 Important Charger Safety Instructions 262 7 10 Desktop Docking Station a 263 7 10 1 Charging A Battery Installed In The WORKABOUT PRO 2 265 7
213. eter is set to One Check Digit it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit If it is set to Two Check Digits it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 80 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 15 Interleaved 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Interleaved 2 of 5 Check Digit When this parameter is set to Validate only the integrity of a symbol is checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms If Check Digit is set to Validate and Transmit the check digit is validated and transmitted with the data Setting this parameter to None disables this function Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 80 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details D 30 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 3 16 D 3
214. etter Recognizer Options Input method Letter Recognizer o Quick strokel C Right to left crossbar O Allow accented characters With Letter Recognizer you can enter characters using natural character strokes and gestures you may be familar with These options allow the Letter Recognizer to better interpret any specialized strokes and accents you may wish to use Transcriber Options Note Before you can display the Options for Transcriber you need to select Transcriber as the active input method Tap on the arrow to the right of the keyboard icon in the taskbar and choose Transcriber When you choose Transcriber as the input method three tabs of options are available to you Quick Settings Inking and Advanced 4 4 6 02 bk Transcriber Options J Writing Direction A Baja Intro screen Sound Quick Settings Inking Advanced Quick Settings The Quick Settings tab allows you choose the writing direction the icons indicate direction In addition you can choose to enable or disable the display of the Intro screen and the sound each time you launch the Transcriber WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 137 Chapter 6 Settings Input Method Tab Inking In the Inking tab you are presented with a number of options Recognition Delay allows you to determine the time delay between writing something on the Transcriber screen and its recogni
215. ettings App Launch Keys 6 3 App Launch Keys This icon allows you to map a key to an application so that you can then launch the applica tion from a single key press E O App Launch Keys App Launch SI 6 58 Dk To assign an application key Tap the Add button y App Launch Keys 7 q 2 59 ok Add New Mapping key HERMAN apo e Press the key you want to use to launch an application If an unsupported key is pressed a message appears on this screen letting you know The cursor moves to the App field and a new screen is displayed where you can choose the application to which you want to assign the application key If you need to you can Browse 124 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings App Launch Keys through the information in your hand held until you locate the application you want to launch App Launch Keys 4 3 04 bk Select File to Map Fink cancel Windows v al Once you ve selected the file you want to map tap on OK The cursor moves to the Data field You can use this field if you need to define special pa rameters to your application launch key If you don t want to assign any parameters you can leave the Data field blank If for example you want to assign an application launch key to launch the Word Mobile application you can leave this field blank If you want to
216. ety of scanners available Optimiza tion for specific operational environments is supported with a wide range of peripheral options and carrying accessories AN Note For a complete list of WORKABOUT PRO specifications refer to Hand Held Computer Specifications on page 287 Model Variants WORKABOUT PRO C Model 7527C G2 e WORKABOUT PRO S Model 75278 G2 Platform PXA270M 624 MHz 32 bit RISC CPU 1024 MB Flash ROM 256 MB RAM 4 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction WORKABOUT PRO Features Operating System e Microsoft Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional e Microsoft Windows Mobile 6 1 Classic Multi Media Chipset NVIDIAGoForce 4000 Multi Media Processor Real Time Clock CPU independent RTC capable of maintaining the system date and time for at least 3 months with a fully charged backup battery User Interface e Color Touchscreen Display 3 6 in 9 144 cm diagonal Full VGA 480 x 640 resolution Transflective portrait mode TFT Adjustable Backlight Touchscreen Passive stylus or finger operation Signature capture e Keyboards Full Alpha Numeric C model Numeric S model Ergonomically enhanced for ambidextrous one hand operation Backlit high durability hard capped keys Wireless Communication Optional expansion modules for e 802 11b g via Compact Flash operating in the 2 4GHz band Supports IEEE 802 11b data rates of 1 2 5 5 and 11 Mbps using D
217. field PPP link to modem active e Authenticating user e User authenticated e Connected Note Keep in mind that these states may be displayed fairly quickly if the progress of the connection is rapid When the connection state reaches PPP link to modem active the softkey bar icon changes to indicate an active connection The Connect Data button changes displaying Disconnect Disconnecting From A Network To disconnect from the network Tap on the Disconnect button and then on OK When the WORKABOUT PRO network connection is severed the Status field displays Ready to Connect A unit equipped with a GSM GPRS expansion board displays the signal strength in the main Wireless WAN screen even while a connection is active Units equipped with certain other modems e g Sierra Wireless UMTS and CDMA modems Novatel UMTS modems do not display the signal strength while a connection is active The Rx bytes and Tx bytes fields esti mate the amount of data transmitted and received respectively 6 44 3 1 Shutting Down The Wireless WAN User Interface ETA While it is not usual to shut down the GSM GPRS user interface you can accomplish this by tapping on the File menu and choosing the Exit command in the Wireless WAN screen screen Note Once you ve shut down the user interface you can only enable the radio by tapping on the Wireless WAN icon to display the dialog box WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6
218. for your WORKA BOUT PRO IPSec L2TP or PPTP Your network administrator will let you know which option applies to your unit Tap on Next Choose the type of authentication in this screen If you choose A pre shared key type the key provided by your network administrator Tap on Next Type your user name password and domain name If a domain name was not pro vided to you try the connection without entering a domain name AN Note Normally you will not need to change any advanced settings You will need to make changes only under only the following circumstances The server to which you are connecting does not dynamically assign addresses and TCP IP settings need to be entered Server DNS or WINS settings need to be changed If you need to edit the Advanced settings refer to Advanced Modem Settings on page 218 for details about this tab e Tap on Finish 222 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Managing An Existing Connection Launch a program like Internet Explorer to activate the connection The VPN connec tion will start automatically 6 42 6 Managing An Existing Connection Once you ve defined a connection a new option appears in the first Connections screen Manage existing connections 6 42 6 1 Editing A Connection Tap on Settings gt Connections tab Tap on the Connections icon e Tap on Manage existing connections Connections My Work Network a T
219. from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Length Mode You can chose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1 L2 L3 as Fixed Length Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Telepen Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Telepen Format This parameter allows you to set the bar code character format to either ASCII or Numeric Minimum Length Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details RSS Code Reduced Space Symbology Enable Setting this parameter to on enables RSS Code scanning capability WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 55 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Composite Enable RSS 14 RSS 14 code can be either purely linear or split in half with one half stacked on top of the other half Stacking the code reduces the bar code length and providing the nominal height of the code is mai
220. g 30 Up_Down tab scrolling adjustments 126 UPC A D II 25 D 48 UPC A Check Digit D UPC A Preamble D UPCE D II 26 D 48 UPC EAN D 2 UPC EAN Shared Settings 27 D 49 UPC E Check Digit D UPC E Preamble D UPC E1 Check Digit D UPC E1 Preamble D UPC Half Block Stitching 2D D 3 USB Ethernet adaptor cable WA4010 267 Vv vehicle cradle 276 powered 10 55 VDC 276 powered 12 VDC 276 unpowered 276 Version tab 146 Videos and Pictures 108 Vista 15 volume control 64 VPN connection setting up 222 W Wakeup Keys tab 168 warnings 176 Windows Mobile 6 navigating in 61 Windows Zero Config WZC 4 6 Wireless WAN 227 238 WLAN connections disabling 279 Word Completion tab 139 Word Mobile data entry modes 99 Word See Pocket Word 98 WORKABOUT PRO3 specifications 287 WZC Windows Zero Config 4 6 1D internal scanner 281 2D Aztec 39 2D Data Matrix 37 2D imager scanner 282 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual XI Index 2D Maxicode 38 2D QR Code 38 2D Raster Expand Rate D 5 2D UPC Half Block Stitching D 3 802 11b g radio 292 XII WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual
221. g Current 100 mA Standby Current 100 A Operating Temperature 30 to 50 C 34 to 122 F Storage Temperature 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F Humidity up to 95 RH non condensing at 122 F 50 C WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 317 Chapter 8 Specifications HHP5180 Imager Parameter HHP5180 18 shocks of 3 500 G for 0 5 msec at 23 C 73 F 8 5 5 1 HHP5180 Imager Decode Performance Focal Point SR 7 inches 17 8 cm from lens plate SF 4 5 inches 11 4 cm from lens plate 8 3 mil 10 mil a 15 mil Data 35 mil angels Linear pprai7 RoR matrix ano Maxicode s 020 cm 025 cm i 038 cm 6 089 cm Near 3 5 in 3 1 in 2 1 in 2 3 in 2 1 in 2 0 in 8 9 cm 7 9 cm 5 3cm 5 8 cm 7 9 cm 5 1 cm Far 7 6 in 9 in 13 2 in 10 2 in 8 8 in 13 0 in 19 3cm 22 9cm 33 5 cm 25 9 cm 22 4cm 33 cm a i oee a e 28 3 imi OR A Sami UBC Range Ingar a 021 cm 6 peat 033 cm 017 cm 019 cm 021 cm 025 cm Near 2 8 in 2 5 in 3 4 in 3 4 in 2 2 in 2 0 in 7 1cm 6 4cm 8 6cm 8 6cm 5 6cm 5 1cm Far 6 in 6 5 in 5 7 in 5 4 in 7 6 in 8 9 in 15 2cm 16 5cm 14 5cm 13 7cm 19 3cm 22 6cm Data characterized at 23 C and 0 lux ambient light 318 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual APPENDIX A SUMMIT CLIENT UTILITY SCU
222. g in serious injury or death Installation of powered cradles in vehicles that operate above 60VDC require special consideration Due to the hazardous voltages present on these vehicles it is necessary to ensure that the powered cradle power supply cable connector is not accessible to the vehicle operator and does not get exposed to water or other liquids This can be accomplished in one of the fol lowing ways Ensure the power connector is installed in a dry location on the vehicle away from the vehicle operator s reach perhaps under a vehicle dash or in a sealed housing Cover the power connector with a waterproof heat shrink material e Wrap the connector securely with a waterproof electrical tape in an area out of the vehicle operators reach All other installation requirements outlined in this document should also be followed for High Voltage vehicles to insure safe installation and operation of the powered cradle Powered Vehicle Cradle Installation The powered cradle is designed to allow the WORKABOUT PRO to be powered by a vehicle battery The battery installed in the hand held is also recharged by the vehicle battery This option accepts DC power sources ranging from 9 to 20V with optional pre regulator The vehicle cradle can be ordered with the powered cradle option installed Applying a voltage greater than that specified or reversing or reversing polarity may result in permanent damage to the cradle power o
223. ged Programs icon 73 see Y Managed Programs Managed Programs Yi ok Installation History No Managed Programs have been installed Details Note Your system administrator can provide the details you ll need to use Managed Programs effectively 6 26 Memory This applet allows you to view memory use and storage card memory allocation 162 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Main Tab 6 26 1 Main Tab Memory eTA ok Memory Program Total 117 21 MB Inuse 53 23 MB 63 98 MB Storage Total 59 17 MB Inuse 7 89 MB Free 51 28 MB Free Main Storage Card Find large files using storage memory This tab lists the memory allocated for file and data storage and for program storage 6 26 2 Storage Card oY 4k ok Memory 8 14 MB 8 09 MB Total storage card memory In use 0 05 MB Free y RAM Disk Main Storage Card Find large files using storage memory The Storage Card screen indicates the total storage card or RAM disk memory along with the amount in use 6 27 Power Icon Power This icon allows you to view and manage battery use WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 163 Chapter 6 Settings Battery Tab 6 27 1 Battery Tab 4 46 5 14 ok Power Main battery Lilon Battery power remaining PEE This tab allows you to view th
224. git is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled Set Length L1 Set Length L2 And Set Length L3 Lengths for Codabar can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Length Mode You can choose to set L1 as Minimum Length or L1 L2 L3 as Fixed Length Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details MSI Plessey Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable MST Enable Plessy Set this parameter to on to enable Plessy Check Digit Verification The available options for this parameter are MOD 10 Check and Double MOD 10 Check This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you ve chosen to ensure the integ rity of the symbol data before transmitting If the data does not contain that algorithm the data is not transmitted WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 51 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 11 Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled Plessy Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the Plessy data this parameter must be enabled Mini
225. gs EAN 8 EAN 8 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable EAN 8 Check Digit If you enable this parameter a check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Addendum Add on 2 And Addendum Add on 5 An addendum is a separate bar code supplementary to the main bar code Enabling these parameters defines the length of the addendum bar code to either 2 or 5 characters Addendum Required When this parameter is set to on the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum Addendum Separator Addendum Separator is a space that is added between the EAN 13 bar code and the Add on code Addenda When this parameter is set to on the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details UPC A Settings Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC A bar code scanning recognition Check Digit If you enable this parameter a check digit is included with the decoded bar code data Transmit Number System If this parameter is enabled the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar code data Addendum Add on 2 And Addendum Add on 5 An addendum is a separate bar code supplementary to the main bar code Enabling these parameters defines the length of the addendum bar code to either 2 or 5 characters WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 25 Appendix D Bar Code Settings UPC E Settings
226. hat occur when the FN BLUE modifier is on the Orange table defines key WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 131 Chapter 6 Settings Scancode Remapping presses that occur when the FN ORANGE modifier is on The default mappings of these scancodes can be overwritten for each of these three tables using Scancode Remapping Settings 46 4 27 lok Buttons Normal Orange Blue 0x0001 F2 Unshifted 0x0006 F1 Unshifted Unicode Mapping Scancode Remapping ic The first column in the Scancode Remapping tab displays the Scancodes in hexidecimal If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key that virtual key is displayed in the next column la belled V Key A virtual key that is Shifted or Unshifted is displayed in the third column labelled Function If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro the first and second columns remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key number e g Macro 2 Adding A Remap To add a new remapping Tap the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box 132 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Scancode Remapping The Remap Scancode dialog box is displayed a A Remap Scancode Scancode Label Virtual Keys BACKSPACE 8 Virtual Key O Force Shifted O Eunction O Force Unshifted O Macro Type the scan code in hexidecimal in
227. he Alarms tab Settings Clock amp Alarms Home GMT 8 Pacific US Y 4 07 15 PM X 4 21 2007 X You can set a maximum of three alarms Tap in the checkbox to enable an alarm Tap the day on which you want the alarm to go off Sunday through Saturday e Tap on the time to display the clock Time Field 11 30 AM faf 66 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Ownership Information To set the time in the time field below the clock tap on the hour to highlight it and type the hour at which you want the alarm to ring To set the minutes highlight the min utes and type the appropriate minutes or You can also assign the alarm activation time using the clock graphic Position the stylus on the hour hand of the clock and drag it to the correct hour Do the same for the minute hand Tap on OK to save your changes Note Tapping on the More tab displays a dialog box in which you can choose to Display the clock on the title bar in all programs and or to Sound alarms even when the device is set to silent or vibrate 4 2 3 Ownership Information This option allows you to add your personal information to the WORKABOUT PRO Some of this information will be displayed in the desktop Today screen e Tap on Owner to display a screen in which you can type information y Settings 4 4 1 40 bk Owner Information Name Company
228. he Control Panel When the scan is successful the bar code data is displayed on the screen until the scan button or pistol trigger is released but only if Scan Result is turned on in the Options tab of the Scanner Settings menu in the Control Panel Troubleshooting If the scanner is not working investigate the following e e Is the unit on Check that the bar code symbology being scanned is enabled for the hand held you are using Check any other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the bar code Check the bar code to make sure it is not damaged Try scanning a different bar code to verify that the problem is not with the bar code Check that the bar code is within the proper range Does the hand held display the warning without scanning This suggests a hardware problem in the hand held Is the laser beam scanning across the bar code Once the scan beam has stopped check the scanner window for dirt or fogging Operating One Dimensional 1D Laser Scanners e Turn the hand held on Wait until the unit has booted up completely WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 281 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Operating Two Dimensional 2D Imagers A Important Ifan aiming dot is available on the installed scanner the dot will be enabled for a configurable time period including off after which normal scanning begins Refer to Dot Time msec on page D 2 of Appendi
229. he WORKABOUT PRO Keyboard This hand held computer is available in two models C and S The WORKABOUT PRO C model is available with an alphanumeric keyboard the WORKABOUT PRO S model is available with either a QWERTY or numeric keyboard Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard the differences are noted The WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with a Power button that allows you to switch the unit on and to shut down the unit to Suspend or Standby mode For details about the Power button refer to Turning the WORKABOUT PRO On and Off on page 12 The FN BLUE and FN ORANGE modifier keys provide access to additional keys and system functions These functions are colour coded in orange and blue print above the key board keys EN Note Almost all keys can be reprogrammed to suit your requirements 3 4 2 3 4 2 1 Modifier Keys The SHIFT CTRL ALT FN BLUE and FN ORANGE keys are modifier keys Pressing a modifier key changes the function of the next key pressed For example on a WORKABOUT PRO C a square bracket is printed in orange print above the G key Pressing the FN ORANGE key followed by the G key displays a square bracket rather than the letter G The SHIFT CTRL and ALT keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that they are not chorded two keys held down simultaneously The modifier key must be
230. he password should not be entered in the New Data Profile dialog box and the Prompt user for password checkbox should be checked instead In this case you will be prompted for the password each time a connection is initiated the Connect Data button in the main Wireless WAN dialog box is selected Reset The Reset button in the New Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes resets all entry fields to the values they had when the dialog box was opened Advanced IP y Wireless WAN 4 46235 Dk Show Data Profile Name APN User name Password fd internet 5 Wireless WAN 4 46246 bk IP address _ DNS primary DNS secondary WINS primary Eo WINS secondary The Advanced IP button in the Show Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes opens another dialog box that allows you to configure a static IP address as well as the IP addresses for the primary and secondary DNS and WINS resolvers 6 44 5 2 Security Configuration The Security Configuration dialog box is called up through the Tools menu RN Note Security configuration is not available with CDMA modems The Security Configuration dialog box allows you to enable disable and change the PIN You will need the current PIN to make any of these changes The PIN must be enabled in order to be changed If the PIN is disabled the New PIN entry field is greyed out WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 235 Chapter 6 Setting
231. here you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 6 to 55 Check Digits Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose One or Two check digit s If this parameter is set to One it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit If Check Digits is set to Two it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits Note If Two check digits is selected an MSI Plessey Check Digit Algorithm must also be selected See below for details Transmit Check Digit If this parameter is enabled the check digit is included with the bar code data Check Digit Algorithm When the Two MSI Plessey check digits option is selected an additional verification is re quired to ensure integrity Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box n which you can choose the algorithm to be used MOD 10 MOD 11 or MOD 10 MOD 10 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 15 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Interleaved 2 of 5 D 2 15 Interleaved
232. his option displays what it assumes is the complete word saving you having to type the word in its entirety You can also tailor how and when you want word sug gestions made Options Additional Choices Voice recording format Default zoom leve for writing 200 v Default zoom leve for typing Capitalize first letter of sentence Scroll upon reaching the last line Wd Corgi EA A This tab offers a few choices including choosing a voice recording format zoom percentage for writing and typing automatic capitalization of the first letter in a sentence and automatic scrolling when you ve reached the bottom of the screen WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 139 Chapter 6 Settings Lock 6 6 140 Lock To protect the data stored in your WORKBOUT PRO you can assign a password that must be entered each time the unit is switched on Tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on the Lock icon Settings 4 q 6 21 bk Password C Prompt if device unused for Password type Password Confirm It is critical that you store your password in a safe place If you forget it a clean start must be performed by certified Psion Teklogix personnel A clean start returns the hand held to factory settings Only the data stored in a CF or SD memory card are preserved Tap in the checkbox next to Prompt if device unused to turn on password protection
233. ht near Predefined preset C 4 Low power Predefined preset C 3 Low Power Timeout D 3 D 21 D 43 L1 Set Length D 7 L2 Set Length D 7 M Macro keys 44 deleting a macro 129 executing a macro 129 Macros menu accessing 128 recording and saving 128 maintenance of hand held 57 mapping Scancode 131 Unicode 130 Matrix Predefined preset C 3 Matrix 2 of 5 31 D 54 Maximum Length 22 24 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 41 42 Maximum Size D 9 Memory amount available 62 Storage Card tab 163 menus pop up 77 using 77 messages Scan Indicator 176 scanner warning message 176 Scan Result 776 Messaging 111 folders 111 Outlook email synchronizing 112 Micro PDF 417 D 19 35 D 58 Microphone adjusting volume Built in Headset and Bluetooth 142 Minimum Cancel Time D 3 D 20 D 43 Minimum Length 22 24 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 41 42 D 45 D 47 D 50 D 52 D 54 D 55 Minimum Size D 9 Mode Bluetooth 209 model numbers scanner and imager 308 modem setup 2 5 Baud Rate 2 3 Call Options 2 4 Cancel If Not Connected 2 4 Data Bits 2 3 Dial String Commands 2 4 Parity 2 3 Port Settings 2 3 Server Settings 2 8 Stop Bits 2 3 TCP_IP Settings 2 8 Wait For Credit Card 2 4 Wait For Dial Tone 2 4 modifier keys 4 locking amp unlocking 4 One Shot Mode 127 shift state indicator icon 41 78 Motion Predefined preset C 4 MSI Plessey D 14 29 D 51 N name assigning to WORKABOU
234. htly increased power consumption in suspend mode the modes where the modem remains powered during suspend mode have several advantages When the hand held wakes from suspend mode the modem is ready immediately modem or network initialization is not required A packet data session can thus remain active during suspend mode In these modes the modem is also able to wake up the hand held if the network status changes or there is a new incoming SMS WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 239 Chapter 6 Settings SMS Menu 6 44 6 SMS Menu SMS functions are accessed through the SMS menu For modems that support a SIM card the SIM initialization typically takes longer than the network initialization resulting in a no ticeable delay before the SMS functions become available 6 44 6 1 New SMS y Wireless WAN 4 d 9 56 ok Network Signal Status Searching for modem a r a New Inbox OutBox SMS Configuration SMS y Wireless WAN 42 q 9 59 ok Wireless WAN New SMS To O File Tools SMS Tapping on New opens a dialog box for sending a new SMS message The recipient s phone number to be entered in the To field can consist of the digits O through 9 as well as the and characters optionally preceded by one character indicating an international number i e the country code follows immediately after the character By checking the
235. ications gs eii sion dea aik g ag aan E eE ar arla a E e d a a a 68 4 2 6 Calendar of Upcoming Appointments o a 70 4 2 6 1 Creating and Editing Appointments 70 4 2 6 2 Adding Reminders e e 71 4 2 6 3 Using Categories ud Eee eu ed ds y dd 72 4 2 6 4 Deleting Appointments o e 73 43 aMaule 74 4 3 1 Customising the Start Menu e pees 74 4 4 Managing Files and Folders o 75 4 4 1 Creating a New Folder 2 aaa e 76 4 4 2 Renaming Fil caca a pd 76 4 4 3 Copying a File ta a a Bea ee ae 76 4 4 4 Deleting alle A a Ha a AMOR Bee a 76 4 5 Using Menus ta a a ae Bok Ee Ae eet ew ee Bee hh ade 77 4 3 Pop Up MEDUS s aoe a a Bae ae Ba a ee ee 77 4 6 The Softkey Bar lt 2 3 20446 aa de ead 8 gos a ee ee dk Ge ee 78 4 7 Programs Using Applications ee 80 A ee a ee a 82 AsO NR eee ose 82 A10 Enterme Text asea as A waa tend o ae ere a S 83 410d Soft Keyboards ic case ak Oa Re eae ak er a ea a ee 83 4 10 2 The Transcriber e ien aa eras hae ea se ek A a OR 84 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 59 60 4 10 3 Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Navigating in Windows Mobile 6 1 and Applications 4 1 Navigating in Windows Mobile 6 1 and Applications Graphic user interfaces li
236. ig on page A 6 for details Radio Type Indicates the type of radio installed in the device e g BG when an 802 11b g radio is installed Reg Domain Indicates the regulatory domain e g ETSI FCC or TELEC for which the radio is configured Worldwide means that the radio can be used in any domain e Status Indicates if the radio is associated to an access point If this is not the case Association Status indicates the radio status e Driver and SCU These fields display the version of the device driver and the SCU that are running on the WORKABOUT PRO About SCU This box provides details about the SCU software A 3 Profile Tab The Profile tab allows you to define radio and security settings that are stored in the registry as part of the configuration profile The profile you create and save is listed in the Active Profile drop down menu in the Main tab You can define up to 20 profiles m5 Summit Client Utility 7 Ty 4 lt ok Edit lt Profile Radio Attributes EAP Type None Save Changes e Edit Profile Used to choose the profile to be viewed or edited If 7 hirdPartyConfi ig is chosen after the WORKABOUT PRO goes through a power cycle WZC is used for configuration of the radio e New Allows you to create a new profile with default settings and assign it a name Rename Allows you to assign a profile name A 2 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 Use
237. ight near To set an active preset Highlight the preset and tap on the Activate button Viewing A Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset Highlight a preset and tap on the View button WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 5 Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Creating A Custom Preset The associated preset window is displayed eOK ok PTS Imager Settings Camera Presets Preset Low light near Image Corrections Auto Exposure Manual Exposure Windowing Predefined settings are read only Tap on the sign to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings C 3 5 Creating A Custom Preset A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset either a predefined preset or an ex isting custom preset To create a custom preset Highlight a preset and tap on the Add button In this example the Low light near preset was chosen A screen like the sample below is displayed PTS Imager Settings fy 4 lt ok n Preset Name Cloning from set Low light near Enter alphanumeric string Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box Tap on OK to save your changes C 6 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 3 6 Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Modifying A Custom Preset The preset list is displayed the new custom preset appears at the end of the list It is marked as read and write PTS Imager Se
238. ile 6 1 User Manual 241 Chapter 6 Settings SMS Menu 6 44 6 3 Outbox 5 Wireless WAN 4 10 07 Dk Wireless WAN Outbox File Tools sms UU Tapping on Outbox opens a list of sent messages Otherwise the Outbox behaves exactly as the Inbox described above The date and time when a message was sent is not available for GSM modems 6 44 6 4 SMS Configuration y Wireless WAN q 10 09 ok Wireless WAN SMS Centre Address I Message Validity Period 3 Delete oldest message when full Message Suppression Prefix Tapping on SMS Configuration opens the SMS configuration dialog The SMS Centre Address follows the same rules as the recipient s phone number in the New message dialog The Message Validity Period parameter is sent to the SMS Centre with each message sent subsequently and instructs the SMS Centre on how long it should attempt to deliver the message to the recipient the SMS Centre may impose an upper limit on the validity period regardless of the setting 242 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings SMS Menu Note Only certain discrete validity period values can be sent and thus the validity period is rounded to the nearest allowed value The next time the SMS configuration dialog is opened the rounded value is shown The user interface tries to keep the SMS storage location available for a new incoming message if the Del
239. imated Battery Backup The Estimated Battery Backup is the amount of battery power that is reserved to protect data until a charged battery can be installed in the hand held When the main battery capacity is depleted up to the Estimated Battery Backup reserve specified in the Suspend Threshold tab the hand held shuts off automatically and uses the reserve power to preserve the data stored on the WORKABOUT PRO Once the hand held shuts down it cannot be switched on until a fresh battery is installed or the unit is inserted in a docking station or cradle Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the right to increase the battery capacity reserved for backup purposes Data will be preserved to a maximum of 124 hours Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the left to decrease the power reserved for backup purposes this increases the hand held s operating time the amount of time the hand held will operate before shutting down but reduces the power reserved for backup purposes to a minimum of 24 hours The backup battery draws a trickle charge from the reserved main battery power to maintain the data even after the unit power is shut down It will protect the data stored in the WORKABOUT PRO while the main battery is swapped for a fully charged one A Important Once the main battery is removed the backup battery will preserve the data stored on the WORKABOUT PRO for approximately 5 minutes It is criti cal that you install a charg
240. ime in milliseconds between successive ping requests Integer from 0 to 1000 7200000 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual A 11 APPENDIX B PORT PINOUTS B 1 LIF Low Insertion Force Port Pinout PIN Signal Name 1 Ground 2 Ground 3 USB Host Data Plus For connecting USB devices 4 USB Host Data Minus For connecting USB devices 5 USB Host Power for powering USB devices 5V 100mA Max 6 DC Power in for supplying power to WORKABOUT PRO charging battery 5V 3A 7 DC Power in for supplying power to WORKABOUT PRO charging battery 5V 3A 8 LIF Detect determines if a device is attached to the LIF 9 USB Device Data Minus for operating the WORKABOUT PRO as a USB device 10 USB Device Data Plus for operating the WORKABOUT PRO as a USB device 11 Ground 12 Ground WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual B 1 Appendix B Port Pinouts Tether Port Pinout B 2 Tether Port Pinout PIN Signal Name 1 Ground 2 USB Data Plus can be configured as Host or Device 3 USB Data Minus can be configured as Host or Device 4 USB VBUS can provide 5V 100mA Max for powering USB Devices 5 RS232 Tx data 6 RS232 Rx Data 7 Tether detect resistor ID Determines what kind of device is attached to the Tether port 8 DC Power In 9 DC Power In 10 DC Power In 11 RS232 CTS
241. indows Mobile 6 1 User Manual BASIC CHECKOUT 2 2 1 Preparing the WORKABOUT PRO for Operation o ooo oo 11 2 1 1 The Main Battery aoaaa 11 2 1 1 1 Charging the Main Battery aoaaa aaa 11 2 1 2 The Backup Battery 2 2 ee ee a 11 2 1 2 1 Backup Battery Gas Gauge o o o o 12 2 2 Turning the WORKABOUT PRO On and Off 12 2 2 1 Installing the Battery and Switching the Unit On 12 2 2 2 Switching the Unit Off Suspend o 13 2 3 Connecting the WORKABOUTPRO toaPC 0 0 14 2 3 Connecting the WORKABOUTPRO toaPC 0 0 14 2 4 Data Transfer Between the PC amp the Hand Held 14 2 4 1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync 2 2 ee ee ee 14 2 4 2 Using Microsoft Vista o o e 15 2 5 Aligning Calibrating the Touchscreen o o o oo 15 2 6 The Getting Started Centre o o 15 2 7 Setting Up a RA2041 Radio Summit Client Utility 16 2 7 1 Assigning the IP Address 2 2 2 e e 16 2 7 2 Using the SCU to Connect to the WLAN 17 2 8 The Phone Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional Only 20 2 8 1 The Phone Keypad ee 20 2 8 1 1 Send amp End Phone Calls Using the Phone Keypad 20 2 8 1 2 Make a Conference Call o o o o o ooo 21 2 8 1 3 Receive an Incoming Call 21 2 8 1 4 Program
242. indows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 3 4 7 3 5 3 5 1 3 5 2 Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO The Keypad Backlight The Keypad Backlight The intensity of the keypad backlight can be configured using the Backlight icon accessed by tapping on Start gt Settings Refer to Backlight on page 147 for details about this option The Display WORKABOUT PRO s are equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibil ity in low light conditions The backlight switches on when a key is pressed or the screen is tapped Adjusting the Backlight To set the backlight intensity and the duration of time that the backlight will remain on you ll need to choose the Backlight icon Tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on System tab gt Backlight icon Refer to Backlight on page 147 for details Aligning Calibrating the Touchscreen If your touchscreen has never been aligned calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item follow the steps below Tap on Start gt Settings Tap on the System tab to display the Screen icon Mamory Power Ramove Programs i Taklogix Total Recall Scanners Mindo Personal System Connections WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 47 Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO Screen Orientation Tap on the Screen icon to display the Alignment tab Orientation Portrait O Landscape right handed
243. ing Scheme 1 4 EGPRS Multislot Class 10 EDGE E2 power class for 8 PSK Downlink coding schemes CS 1 4 MCS 1 9 Uplink coding schemes CS 1 4 MCS 1 9 Uplink coding schemes CS 1 4 MCS 1 9 BEP reporting SRB loopback and test mode B 8 bit 11 bit RACH PBCCH support 1 phase 2 phase access procedures Link adaptation and IR NACC extended UL TBF Mobile Station Class B CSD V 110 RLP non transparent 9 6 kbps Point to point MT and MO Text and PDU mode Audio speech codecs Chapter 8 Specifications Bluetooth 8 2 4 Bluetooth Embedded 920 kbps serial interface Bluetooth Version 2 0 compliant features Adaptive Frequency Hopping for better co existence with 802 11 radio Chip Antenna 2dBi peak Transmit Power 3dBm 0 5mW minimum 4dBm 2 5mW max Frequency Range 2 400 2 4835 GHz RX Sensitivity 80dBm max BER lt 0 1 Data Rate 732 2 kbps and 57 6 kbps asymmetric 433 9 kbps symmetric 8 3 Battery Specifications 8 3 1 High Capacity Model WA3006 8 3 1 1 Electrical Specifications Note The electrical specifications apply for ambient temperature TAMB of 0 to 40 C unless otherwise stated Item Description Specification Remark 1 Interface Chipset Maxim DS2762 2 Rated Voltage 3 7V Typical 3 Rated Capacity 3300mAh Typical 4 Rated Charge Current 1 SA Maximum 5 Charge Voltage 4 2 0 05V Maximum 6 Discharge Cut off voltage 2 6V Typica
244. ion y Wireless WAN q 12 59 bk WWAN Data Configuration C Enable automatic connect w C Use virtual serial port Enable automatic configuration Active profile Default Select profile Default v Enable Automatic Connect If the Enable automatic connect checkbox is checked unchecked by default the Wireless WAN user interface will attempt to establish a packet data connection whenever packet data is available e g after resume from suspend without further user interaction To activate the automatic connection mode Tap on the OK button While automatic connection mode is enabled the Connect Data button in the main Wireless LAN dialog box changes to Disable Auto To close the currently active connection if any and disable the automatic connection mode e Tap on Disable Auto Important Automatic connection mode should not be used if applications other than the Wireless WAN user interface e g Connection Manager are expected to open and close connections If the automatic connection mode is enabled and another application closes the packet data connection the WWAN user interface will immediately try to re establish the connection Use Virtual Serial Port If Use virtual serial port is enabled packet data connections are established through the virtual serial port of the WWAN driver rather than through the WWAN driver directly This checkbox should only be checked if ce
245. ion Toda di y Menus 4 Microphone Sounds amp Notifications ka Phone 74 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 4 4 Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 In the Personal tab tap on the Menus icon Checked items appear in the Start menu Others appear in Programs O bd Calculator MIT calendar MZ Contacts O Demo Scanner o4 File Explorer Ci Games Bubble Breaker O 4 Solitaire s Getting Started Help When you ve finished your selections tap on OK Managing Files and Folders Windows Mobile 6 1 files are stored in folders and sub folders that are accessible with File Explorer You can open save rename copy and paste files in the same manner as you would on any desktop PC Tap on Start gt Programs gt File Explorer Tap to display sorting options Files stored here automa tically Tap to move back one level File Explorer J My Device w Nanle y Y Application Data il ConnMgr R Documents an music A My Documents Program Files Deo TX 2 13 10 172K 2 13 10 53B 2 13 10 28 0K 2 13 10 132K 2 13 10 348K eng Explorer music A My Documents id Program Files 2 13 10 2 13 10 2 13 10 2 13 10 2 13 10 Managing Files and Folders Tap the checkboxes next to the items you would like to appear in your Start menu Tap to display additional storage files yo TAX WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Wind
246. ion applies to A profile named Default is always present and contains the current parameters from the database The following actions are available Show The parameters for the selected profile are displayed when you tap on this button For the Default profile the publicly known password is shown otherwise the password is hidden Edit The parameters of the selected profile can be edited when you choose the Edit button Keep in mind that you cannot edit the Default profile Delete The selected profile is deleted You cannot delete the Default profile Activate When this button is chosen the selected profile is made the active profile Activation is pos sible only if the Enable automatic configuration checkbox is unchecked New Tapping on the New button allows you to create a new profile y Wireless WAN er d 1 56 ok New Data Profile APN internet User name pase C Prompt user for password Force PAP authentication Reset The name of the newly created profile must be different from all existing profiles Also the name cannot be Default When the New Data Profile dialog box is opened a proposal for a unique name is filled in the corresponding entry field If a manually configured profile has a 234 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Tools Menu secret password and unauthorized access to the device is a concern even after the SIM PIN has been entered t
247. irect Sequence Spread Spectrum DSSS Supports IEEE 802 11g data rates of 6 9 12 24 36 48 and 54Mbps using Orthagonal Frequency Division Multiplexing OFDM base band modulation GSM GPRS EDGE via expansion interface Quad Band 850 900 1800 1900 MHz Voice and Data WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 5 Chapter 1 Introduction The WORKABOUT PRO C Hand Held GPRS Class B Multi Slot Class 12 EGPRS Class B Multi Slot Class 12 UMTS HSDA via expansion interface Triple Band 850 1900 2100 MHz Voice and Data Integrated Bluetooth class II ver 1 2 Working Range 16 4 ft to 32 81 ft 5m to 10m AN Note 802 11b g GSM and Bluetooth are available simultaneously 1 3 1 The WORKABOUT PRO C Hand Held Figure 1 1 WORKABOUT PRO C with Alphanumeric Keyboard PisiilolWiTexLoG1x 6 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 1 3 2 The WORKABOUT PRO S Hand Held Figure 1 2 WORKABOUT PRO S with QWERTY Keyboard Chapter 1 Introduction The WORKABOUT PRO S Hand Held Figure 1 3 WORKABOUT PRO S with Numeric Keyboard lrlshloin rexvoorx Figure 1 4 Phone Labels Note The Send and End phone keys printed on the hand held shown in the sample above are useful for units equipped with Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional that sup port the phone feature Refer to Send amp End Calls Using the WORKABOUT PRO Keyboard on page 24 for details 8 WORKABOUT PRO with W
248. ired devices and their corresponding services The format of the name is lt Device Name gt lt Service Name gt Additional information may appear in this screen such as the Port Numbers for Serial Profiles service Bluetooth Select device to view options TORPSG 011 Serial lt COMO gt To learn how to scan for devices that will appear in this tab review Device Tab on page 204 202 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Paired Tab Note Ifa service is actively paired and connected the device and its services are displayed in bold typeface in this list Tap and hold down the stylus on an item in the Paired tab to display an associated pop up menu Bluetooth Select device to view options TORPSG 011 Serial lt An Query services Remove Paired Device servers Mode About This is a service dependent menu that is it varies slightly depending on the service chosen in the Servers tab Refer to Servers Tab on page 208 for more details Query Services and Remove Commands RN Note The Query Services and Remove commands are available in all service dependent menus regardless of the type of service chosen e Query Services displays a Services dialog box where a pairing service is chosen Remove unpairs the highlighted service and deletes the entry from the tab OBEX OPP Object Exchange Object Push Profile Commands The OPP defines two
249. is automatically acti vated and the unit power is switched off if the battery cover is opened while the hand held is still powered on the unit may reboot Any active sessions may be lost Keep in mind also that while the battery is being installed the WORKA BOUT PRO backup battery will save the current data for up to 5 minutes Refer to Installing the Battery and Switching the Unit On on page 12 Battery Swap Time Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been al tered battery swap time is approximately 5 minutes you will not lose data if the battery is replaced within this time frame To protect data the safest place to store data is on a SD MMC memory card or externally to the device on a USB memory stick or on a PC The Suspend Threshold feature allows you to determine the battery capacity at which the hand held will be shut down If left at the default value Maximum Operating Time the unit will run until the battery is completely empty the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time If you choose Maximum Back Time the hand held shuts off with more energy left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time Refer to Suspend Threshold on page 167 for details about reserving battery power for data backup purposes Safely Swapping the Main Battery There are a few steps you need to take to ensure that no data is lost during a battery swap First
250. is parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port The options are none odd even mark and space Stop Bits This parameter specifies the number of stop bits 1 1 5 2 used for asynchronous communication Flow Control This parameter selects the type of flow control used in your hand held The WORKABOUT PRO can perform Software or Hardware handshaking or you can choose None WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 213 Chapter 6 Settings Call Options 6 40 2 6 41 Call Options E Settings Yi ok Cancel call if not connected within 120 seconds Wait for dial tone before dialing Wait for credit card tone 0 seconds Extra dial string modem commands Call Options Ss Cancel Call If Not Connected Within Tap in the checkbox to enable this option to make certain that the WORKABOUT PRO does not stay online too long while waiting to connect with a network Enter the number of seconds after which the call will be cancelled Wait For Dial Tone Before Dialing To speed connection when using a modem disable this option tap in the checkbox to the left of this option Wait For Credit Card If you are paying for calls with a credit card enter the number of seconds you want the WORKABOUT PRO to wait for a credit card prompt Extra Dial String Modem Commands Type your credit card number in this field Connections Connecting To Th
251. it was issued the issue date and the expiry date tap on a certificate in the list To delete a certificate tap and hold the stylus on a certificate In the pop up menu tap on the Delete command WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 151 Chapter 6 Settings Choosing A Certificate 6 17 1 6 18 A 6 19 Choosing A Certificate Normally certificates already configured for your network are chosen automatically by the WORKABOUT PRO If a certificate cannot be chosen automatically you must choose it from the Certificates list e To choose a certificate tap the desired certificate Your WORKABOUT PRO will connect automatically Clock amp Alarms Located under Start gt Settings gt System tab the Clock amp Alarm icon allows you to set the current date and time and it allows you to set up to three alarms Clock amp Alarms Important Refer to Today s Date Clock and Alarm on page 65 for details about these options COM Port Manager The COM Port Manager dialog box lists the device names and COM port mappings stored in the registry for the currently active and for dynamic devices like port replicators USB serial dongles and virtual ports 152 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Dr Debug The COM Port Manager allows you to edit the COM port mappings and add new ports for Bluetooth external connections 5 COM Port Manager er Ty X
252. ke Windows Mobile 6 1 for portable devices or desktop Windows 2000 XP etc utilize point and click navigation On the WORKABOUT PRO this is accomplished using a touchscreen and stylus rather than a mouse 4 1 1 Navigating Using a Touchscreen and Stylus EN Note If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately it may need recali bration Refer to Aligning Calibrating the Touchscreen on page 47 A touchscreen is a standard feature on all WORKABOUT PRO s Each is equipped with a stylus a pointing tool stored in a slot at the top of the unit e Use the stylus to tap on the appropriate icon to open files and folders launch applica tions and programs make selections and so on 4 2 Windows Mobile 6 1 Desktop Today Screen Keep in mind that if your hand held is running Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional the Today screen will offer Phone connectivity in the Navigation Bar at the top of the screen and a Phone softkey in the Softkey Bar at the bottom of the screen Units running Windows Mobile 6 1 Classic provide a Calendar option in the Softkey Bar phone options are not available with this version of Windows Mobile 6 1 Volume Control Connectivity Indicator Today s Date Tuesday og ae k Phone Settings Owner Information Tap here to se OWheEIMOMnSEOm se Start eo Yy a E mail Notification amp No unread messages L Saturday 4 24 AM Tasks To Complete No tasks Fabruary 13 2010 Cal
253. kethrough and Clear All Take Picture When you tap on this option the WORKABOUT PRO switches to camera mode so that you can snap a picture to include in your note 5 Insert from Camer O qe Y 4 lt lt r eee Tl WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 95 Chapter 5 Programs OneNote Mobile Press ENTER to snap a photo that is automatically inserted into your note OneNote Mobile a0 qe Ti Z ok Robot Production Meeting Prototype attached ry Insert Picture Tapping on this command automatically displays your My Pictures folder where you can tap on an existing picture to insert it into your note OneNote Mobile GO Y e ok Insert Picture Al My Pictures w Date w Camera 96 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 5 Programs OneNote Mobile Insert Recording When you tap on this command a recording panel is displayed OneNote Mobile ao lt gt Y 4 Robot Production Meeting Prototype attached ry Cancel Save Record Tap on the Record button to record your message Tap on Stop when you ve completed your message Tap on Play to listen to your voice message To discard your message tap on X the Cancel button To save your message tap on OK An audio icon is displayed in your note You can tap on it to listen to your message OneNote Mobile ao qe Yi d ok Robot Production Meeting Prototype attached ME Synchronizing WORK
254. l 296 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications High Capacity Model WA3006 Item Description Specification Remark 7 Discharge Current Constant voltage Current limited 8 Discharge Current 0 5C 20 C to 60 C Typical 9 Internal Resistance 200 mo Maximum 8 3 1 1 1 Battery Pack Electrical Specifications Description Specification Minimum Typical Maximum Over voltage detection voltage 4 325V 4 350V 4 375V Charge enable 4 10V 4 15V 4 20V Under voltage detection voltage 2 5V 2 6V 2 7V Over current detection current 3 5A Short circuit detection current 5 0A 8 0A 11 0A Short circuit detection voltage 150mV 200mV 250mV Over voltage delay time 0 8s Is 1 2s Under voltage delay time 90ms 100ms 110ms Over current delay time Sms 10ms 20ms Short circuit delay time 160us 200us 240us Recovery charge current 0 5mA 1mA 2mA WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 297 Chapter 8 Specifications High Capacity Model WA3006 8 3 1 2 Standard Discharge En Note Standard charge is defined as charging with constant voltage limit of 4 2V and con stant current limit of 0 94 the termination charge occurs when the current drops to 45mA Standard discharge is defined as discharging at a constant current of 350mA until the battery protection circuit switches the battery output off in over discharge mode Acceptance Tes
255. l Grip Installing The Flush Mount Pistol Grip The Flush Mount Pistol Grip model WA6103 is intended for use with second generation WORKABOUT PRO units models 7527C G2 and 75278 G2 which have the Trigger Back Plate installed Review the first few paragraphs at the beginning of The Trigger Back Plate Kit With Flush Mount Pistol Grip on page 253 for a list of compatible scanners imagers AN Important Back up any data in RAM before you begin data are erased when the inter nal power of the WORKABOUT PRO is turned off e If your unit is using AC power disconnect it e Remove the battery cover and battery pack Switch off the internal power the switch is located inside the battery compartment e Remove the screw on cap if present from the switch in the middle of the back plate Battery Pack Cover Screws 4 X 256 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 7 5 7 6 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Protective Carrying Case Lower the Flush Mount Pistol Grip into place over the back plate aligning the screw inserts on the hand held with the screw holes in the pistol grip Insert and tighten the four screws provided with the pistol grip e Switch the power back on e Replace the battery and battery cover Insert the stylus in the bottom of the pistol grip handle Protective Carrying Case A carrying case is available for WORKABOUT PRO s to shiel
256. l Settings icon Regional Settings Regional Settings English United States Appearance samples Positive numbers 123 456 789 00 Positive currency 123 456 789 00 Time 8 44 55 PM Short date 1 29 09 Long date Thursday January 29 2009 rer corer Te ote Tap on the drop down menu to choose your language and region Once you ve selected a language and region you may need to adjust the way numbers cur rency the time and the date appear in your WORKABOUT PRO Tap on the tab associated with each of the items and choose how each item will be dis played on your WORKABOUT PRO WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 169 Chapter 6 Settings Remove Programs 6 29 Remove Programs Remove Programs Remove Programs Programs in storage memory Tota storage memory available 46386K Tapping on the Remove Programs icon displays a screen listing the programs that can be removed from your unit To remove a program highlight it and then click on the Remove button 6 30 Screen Icon This icon allows you to align calibrate your touchscreen turn ClearType on and off and adjust the size of the text displayed on the WORKABOUT PRO screen Portrait O Landscape right handed Landscape left handed Align Screen Align the screen if it is not responding accurately to stylus taps cone a ras
257. l strength channel transmit power and data rate A 5 Diags Tab Summit Client Utili O qe Y 4 ok Profile Default Ping Address Diagnostics Output Ping Results ian rae es ase ca Use the Diags tab as a troubleshooting tool The functions are as follows WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual A 7 Appendix A Summit Client Utility SCU Global Settings Tab A 6 A 8 e Re connect Enables Disables the radio applies reapplies current profile and tries to associate and authenticate to the wireless LAN logging all activity in the output area at bottom of the dialog box Release Renew Obtains a new IP address through DHCP and logs all activity in the output area Start Ping Stop Ping Starts a continuous ping to the address in the text box next to this button This a toggle button so when you tap on it it changes to Stop Ping Closing this window or tapping on another button also stops the ping e Diagnostics Attempts to connect or reconnect to an AP and provides a more detailed dump of data than if you used Re connect The dump includes the radio state profile settings global settings and BSSID list of APs The SCU is saved to a file called _sdc_diag txt in the Windows directory Global Settings Tab 5 Summit Gientt 2 4 4 27 ok Global Configuration Settings E RX Diversity On start on Main v DEVICE MUST BE POWER CYCLED FOR SOME OF THESE SETTINGS TO TAKE
258. le click The allowable range is 0 to 1000 A value of zero disables this feature A double click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the Click Data parameter When a value is not assigned for the Click Data double click ing the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the Dot Time parameter and WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 175 Chapter 6 Settings Options Tab 6 33 2 2 initiates a normal scan sweep If a value is assigned for the Click Data parameter double clicking the scanner trigger inserts the Click Data value rather than initiating a scan Click Data For both integrated and external scanners this parameter determines which character is sent to the application installed in your hand held following a double click A dialog box ap pears asking that you press the key you want to insert The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Display Parameters Scan Result When this parameter is enabled the type of bar code and the result of the scan appear on the screen Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible only while the scanner trigger is pressed When the trigger is released this information is cleared from the screen Scan Indicator When this parameter is enabled the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is activated Scan Result Tim
259. letely voluntary and confidential Enable error reporting O Disable error reporting 6 23 External GPS Global Positioning System With a Global Positioning System GPS receiver you can locate your exact position on a map However even without a GPS receiver several different mapping programs can run on your hand held 156 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings External GPS Global Positioning System e Tap on Start gt Settings gt System gt External GPS External GPS Settings 4 4 8 50 bk Choose the port that programs will use to obtain GPS data Any program that uses GPS will need to communicate with this port GPS program port O E Tap on the GPS program port drop down menu and choose the communication COM port that the GPS software will use to communicate with the GPS receiver Note Your WORKBOUT PRO may automatically detect the GPS receiver that you are using and enter the settings in the Hardware tab If not you ll need to enter this information yourself You can find this information in the user manual of the GPS receiver Tap on the Hardware tab and choose a GPS hardware port and the appropriate Baud rate Settings 4 4 12 00 bk GPS Settings Specify the hardware port to which your GPS device is connected For more information see the GPS device manufacturer s documentation GPS hardware port None
260. ll 257 pistol grip 251 port replicator 279 quad battery charger 271 quad docking station 273 single battery charger 269 vehicle cradle 276 ActiveSync 14 89 setting up 89 adaptor cable USB Ethernet 267 Addendum D 49 Addendum Add on 2 24 25 26 D 49 Addendum Add on 5 24 25 26 D 49 Addendum Required 24 25 26 Addendum Security D 49 Addendum Separator 24 25 26 27 Add Remove Data bar code scanning D 9 Prefix D 9 Strip Leading D 9 Suffix Char D 9 Aim Duration D 2 aiming dot duration of D 2 alarm setting 65 alarms setting 52 aligning touchscreen 47 All Predefined preset C 2 alpha keys accessing WORKABOUT PROS 45 INDEX alpha keys accessing WORKABOUT PRO3 S 45 Append 22 appending to bar codes characters 176 App Launch icon 124 ASCII Full Ascii D 44 audio indicators beep conditions 49 volume adjustment 50 automotive power adaptor 269 B backlight Battery Power tab 148 External Power tab 149 intensity 47 Intensity tab 149 backplate trigger 253 backup battery backup profile creating Total Recall 187 backup profile restoring Total Recall 190 backup profile viewing Total Recall 197 Bad Scan Beep 176 Bar code Decoding symbology predefined presets C 2 bar code appending to 176 Decoded D 2 displaying type of bar code 176 Options tab 175 symbologies Codabar D 14 27 D 50 Code 11 29 D 32 Code 128 D 9 Code 93 D 13 27 D 50 Discrete 2 of 5 D 16 32 D 54 EAN 13 D 10 24 D 47 WORKA
261. mager can decode Postal This preset enables the decoding of all the postal symbologies that the imager can decode Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets The following presets enable successful bar code image capture in almost all conditions N Note It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible Default This preset works in a wide range of conditions It is optimized for a normal office lighting about 300 Lux Low light This preset is designed for very dark conditions such as inside a warehouse where the lights are kept low or inside an unlit truck This preset increases either the exposure time or the gain Low power This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to conserve the battery power on the hand held Glossy surface This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to reduce reflection This preset is used to read bar codes that are behind glass or inside the plastic window of an envelope WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 3 Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Image Capture Predefined Presets C 2 4 Image Capture Predefined Presets The following presets enable successful image capture in almost all conditions AN Note It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible C 3 C 3 1 Default This preset works in a wide range of conditions It is optimized for a normal office lighting about 300 Lux Motion This preset uses a sho
262. man readable characters including check digit s Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details Code 128 Enable Setting this parameter to on enables Code 128 GS1 128 GS1 128 is the GS1 implementation of the Code 128 barcode specification The former correct name was UCC EAN 128 GS1 128 Identifier GS1 128 Identifier allows the AIM ID C1 for EAN 128 to be transmitted or removed By default this identifier is transmitted if EAN 128 is enabled GTIN Compliant GTIN global trade item number processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14 character EAN UCC GTIN To use GTIN processing you must activate the EAN 128 symbology WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 45 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 128 A Important When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated it is not possible to read normal EAN 128 Codes FNC1 Conversion FNC1 Conversion allows the embedded FNC1 character to be converted to another char acter for applications that cannot use the default lt GS gt Group Separator or hex 1d Double tapping on this option displays a dialog box listing the allowable range 0 to 255 Enable ISBT 128 To successfully scan this type of bar code International Society of Blood Transfusion this option must be set to on If you enable this type of bar code Code 128
263. mum 10 Charging Temperature 0to 40 Typical 302 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Battery Pack Electrical Specifications Chapter 8 Specifications Super High Capacity Model WA3010 Item Description Specification Minimum Typical Maximum 1 Over voltage detection voltage 4 325V 4 350V 4 375V 2 Charge enable 4 10V 4 15V 4 20V 3 Under voltage detection voltage 2 5V 2 6V 2 7V 4 Over current detection current 2 97A 3 17A 3 36A 5 Short circuit detection current 9 9A 13 334 16 83A 6 Short circuit detection voltage 150mV 200mV 250mV 7 Over voltage delay time 0 8s Is 1 2s 8 Under voltage delay time 90ms 100ms 110ms 9 Over current delay time 5ms 10ms 20ms 10 Short circuit delay time 160us 200us 240us 11 Recovery charge current 0 5mA 1mA 2mA WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 303 Chapter 8 Specifications Super High Capacity Model WA3010 8 3 2 2 Standard Discharge Note Standard charge is defined as charging with constant voltage limit of 4 2V and con stant current limit of 0 94 the termination charge occurs when the current drops to 45mA Standard discharge is defined as discharging at a constant current of 350mA until the battery protection circuit switches the battery output off in over discharge mode Acceptance Test Specifications Description Condition Standard Open circuit voltage After standard charge measure within 24 h
264. mum Length Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters including check digit s Plessy Minimum Length Minimum lengths for the Plessy bar code can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters including check digit s Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 4 13 Code 11 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 11 Check Digit Verification The available options for this parameter are MOD 10 Check and Double MOD 10 Check This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you ve chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting If the data does not contain that algorithm the data is not transmitted Transmit Check Digit If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data this parameter must be enabled Minimum Length Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from 0 to 255 The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters including check digit s D 52 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 4 14 El Appendix D Bar Code Settings Interleaved 2 of 5 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove
265. n Minimum Cancel Time The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off once the scanner trigger or button is released This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when the user quickly triggers on off Power Mode This parameter is a power saving option Tapping on it displays a screen listing two power mode options Continuous Power and Low Power In Continuous Power mode the scanner is always on waiting for a trigger pull or a serial communication In Low Power mode the scanner is in a standby state drawing minimal power until a trigger pull or serial communication wakes 1t Keep in mind that while this option is more suitable for battery powered applications there will be a slight delay while the scanner powers up to scan a bar code Low Power Timeout To extend laser life you can select the length of time the scanner remains active following a successful decode The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned a successful decode restores normal blinking When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec 1 min 2 min or 3 min AA Note This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and the WORKABOUT is mounted in a fixed position otherwise Low Power Timeout is not used Parameter Scanning Se
266. n the charge well Charger LED Indicators The desktop docking station is equipped with a single dual coloured LED indicator in the lower right corner of the front panel Table 7 1 Desktop Docking Station Battery Charge LED Behaviour LED Behaviour Charge Status Off No battery detected in the slot Solid Green Charge complete Fast Flashing Green Battery charged to less than 80 of capacity Slow Flashing Green Battery charged to greater than 80 of capacity Solid Red Battery temperature outside of charge range 0 C to 50 C Flashing Red Battery is not charging Battery fault A amp L Note Battery charging continues whether the hand held is switched on or off 7 11 7 12 Troubleshooting The Charging Operation Of The Dock The quad battery charger troubleshooting section beginning on page 272 also applies to the charging behaviour of the desktop docking station Linking A WORKABOUT PRO To A PC The desktop docking station can be connected to a PC so that you can exchange files in the same way that you would between PC drives A USB cable is included with your docking station y Note For details about data transfer through Windows XP and ActiveSync and through Vista refer to Data Transfer Between the PC amp the Hand Held on page 14 266 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 7 13 7 13 1 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Linking A WORKABOUT PR
267. n to enable Postal Japanese Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 39 Postal Kix Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal Kix Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 40 Postal Korean Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal Korean WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 41 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Postal Royal Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 2 to 48 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 41 Postal Royal Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal Royal Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 4 Decoded Advanced Options Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPCA UPC E UPC EAN Shared Settings Code 93 disabled To chang
268. nable Set this parameter to on to enable 2D Data Matrix Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 1 to 1500 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 37 Appendix D Bar Code Settings 2D QR Code Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 30 2D QR Code Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable 2D QR Code Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 3500 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 31 2D Maxicode Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable 2D Maxicode Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowa
269. nate works in conjunction with the Supp Redundancy parameter Supp Redundancy With Autodiscriminate selected in the Supplementals parameter Supp Redundancy adjusts the number of times a symbol without supplementals is decoded before transmission When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value between 2 and 20 A value of 5 or above is recommended when Autodiscriminate is selected and you are decoding a mix of UPC EAN symbols with and without supplementals D 12 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 2 12 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 93 Security Level This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge to edge UPC EAN bar codes Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose a level from 0 to 3 Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads but they also increase the time it takes to decode the bar code Linear Decode Linear Decode applies to code types containing two adjacent blocks e g UPC A EAN 8 EAN 13 When enabled set to on a bar code is transmitted only when both the left and right blocks are successfully decoded within one laser scan This option should be enabled when bar codes are in proximity to each other 2D UPC Half Block Stitching Setting this parameter to on enables UPC Half Block Stitching for the SE 3223 omnidirec tional engine only Code 93 Enabled Set thi
270. nbox folder and delete them from the server preventing duplica tion of messages Keep in mind however that you will not have further access to messages that you moved to folders from anywhere except with the hand held For IMAP4 accounts the folders you create and the messages you move are reflected on the server making messages available any time whether you connect to your mail server from your WORKABOUT PRO or your PC 5 14 2 Synchronizing E mail with Outlook 112 By synchronizing the WORKABOUT PRO Messaging program with Outlook on your PC your e mail is available on both the hand held and on your PC Note Synchronizing e mail does not require that the WORKABOUT PRO have an inde pendent connection to the Internet In ActiveSync on your PC tap on Tools gt Options in the tool bar at the top of the screen Settings Dptions Schedule Security Select the information you want to synchronize with your Pocket PC and click OK or select a source and click i Settings icrosoft Exchange A Y 23 Contacts E Calendar E E mail E Tasks indows PC 25 Contacts C ES Calendar O E E mail O El Tasks m Notes Settings e Make certain that a check mark is displayed in the checkbox next to E mail Tap on OK WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 5 Programs Changing Synchronization Settings Once you check E mail for synchronization Outlook e mail messages are s
271. nd Held Computer Specifications Signature capture Keyboards Full Alpha Numeric C model Numeric S model Ergonomically enhanced for ambidextrous one hand operation Backlit high durability hard capped keys Indicators And Controls LED indicates battery charge status Audio 90 db mono speaker Mono microphone 86 db beeper Programming Environment e e e e e e HTML XML Psion Teklogix Mobile Devices SDK Hardware Development Kit HDK NET and C programming using Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Java programming supporting JDK 1 2 2 or higher Standard Protocol APIs Windows sockets CE net Application Software e e e e Internet Explorer Mobile included with Windows Mobile 6 1 Windows Mobile Device Center Phone dialer and Personal Information Manager PIM included with Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional PTX Connect VoIP Optional Open TekTerm terminal emulation software supports IBM 5250 IBM 3270 HP2392 ANSI and TESS Mobile Control Center MCC device management Expansion Slots e e One SD MMC memory card slot user accessible End cap USB Interface supports GPS expansion module WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 289 Chapter 8 Specifications Hand Held Computer Specifications e e 100 PIN expansion interface supports PCMCIA type ID GSM GPRS EDGE and other third party expansion modules developed using Psion Teklogix WORKABOUT PRO Hardwa
272. nd battery specifications Appendix A Summit Client Utility SCU provides details about the Summit Client Utility SCU screens Appendix B Port Pinouts describes port pinouts Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet describes the Teklogix Imagers applet and how to use it Appendix D Bar Code Settings describes the bar codes supported by the scanners and imagers available for the WORKABOUT PRO WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 3 Chapter 1 Introduction Text Conventions Text Conventions Note Notes highlight additional helpful information Important These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that is critical to the operation of the equipment injury equipment damage or data loss WORKABOUT PRO Features 1 2 AN Warning These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical 1 3 Important For all safety regulatory and warranty information refer to the WORKA BOUT PRO Hand Held Computer Regulatory amp Warranty Guide PN 8000126 The WORKABOUT PRO is a ruggedized hand held personal computer that can be ordered with two possible operating systems Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional with a phone option or Windows Mobile 6 1 Classic This hand held is intended for use in commercial and light industrial applications with a focus on real time wireless data transactions All possible bar code input methodologies are supported by one of a vari
273. ndicator LEDs When a valid network link is established a green LED is illuminated next to the RJ45 connector Inserting A WORKABOUT In The Quad Docking Station Slide the V into the cradle portion of the quad dock until lightly latched The hand held detects that it is in a quad dock and momentarily displays the appropriate icon in the navigation bar at the top of the screen 4 The LED on the hand held unit lights up to show it has external power and may start charging the battery Interaction with the WORKABOUT PRO while in the quad dock is a function of the user application software used to communicate with the host network Network Access The quad docking station has one 10 100 Ethernet port You can insert up to four hand held units The hand helds are connected to an internal USB hub The hand held unit automati cally detects insertion into a quad docking station and loads the appropriate drivers to communicate with the USB Ethernet converters 7 23 4 1 Network Addressing Although the USB converters have fixed Ethernet MAC addresses there is generally no cor relation between these addresses and a specific hand held The host application uses standard TCP IP protocol to name locate and communicate with a specific WORKABOUT PRO on the network 274 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 7 23 5 7 23 6 7 23 6 1 7 23 6 2 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Battery Charging LED Behaviour
274. ndows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 2 9 D 2 10 Appendix D Bar Code Settings UPC A Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details UPC A Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable UPC A UPC A Check Digit If you enable this parameter the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data UPC A Preamble When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed where you can choose one of three options for lead in characters for UPC A symbols transmitted to the host device System Char system character transmitted with the data Country code and System Char both the country code 0 for USA and system character are transmitted with the or None no preamble is transmitted The lead in characters are considered part of the symbol Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details UPC E Enabled UPC E Set this parameter to on to allow UPC E bar code scans Enabled UPC E1 Set this parameter to on to allow UPC E1 zero suppressed bar code scans UPC E And UPC E1 Check Digit If you enable one or both of these parameters a check digit is included with the decoded bar code data UPC E And UPC E1 Preamble When you double tap on one of these parameters a dialog box is displayed where you can choose one of three options for lead in characters for UPC E and UPC E1 symbols transmit ted to the host device System Char system character tran
275. ned Tap on the arrow next to the keyboard icon and choose Transcriber from the pop up menu e Review the introductory screen It provides some shortcut symbols you can draw on your screen to work with the Transcriber When you ve finished reading the introductory screen tap OK The Transcriber menu and icon bars are displayed at the bottom of the document Figure 4 5 Transcriber Screen 5 Word Mobile er d 6 1a bk 5 Word Mobile A SS Transcriber Transcriber Transcriber icon Use your stylus to write a few words anywhere on the screen After a few seconds your words are recognized or not and are transcribed into typed text AN Note Character recognition is more successful if you write using large letters 84 Editing Text within the Transcriber With your document open make certain that you are in transcriber mode the Transcriber icon should be displayed in the lower right corner of the softkey bar e Double tap to select a word or triple tap to select a paragraph or Draw a line through the text you want to select and wait a few seconds until the Transcriber highlights the text e Once the text is highlighted write the new text that is to replace the highlighted information or WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer Press and hold the stylus on the selected text to display a pop up men
276. ng additional information in this case the Serial Port Service Bluetooth Serial Profile Select profile options and press Next Encryption y Mode Port COMO bed Cancel i Next This dialog box offers a number of additional options such as enabling Encryption and se lecting three different modes Serial ActiveSync and Scanner WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 207 Chapter 6 Settings Servers Tab 6 39 3 e Serial is used for simple serial port communication e ActiveSync is for ActiveSync over Bluetooth e Scanner is used to create a seamless connection between the incoming Bluetooth bar code and the WORKABOUT PRO Once you ve completed the information Tap on Next and then in the Services screen click on Done Servers Tab Bluetooth Select a service to be enabled on this device OJ Serial Select Port v Scanner C OBEX OPP Paired Device Servers Mode About When a remote Bluetooth device initiates a Bluetooth connection to the WORKABOUT PRO the remote device is considered the Bluetooth master and the hand held the Blue tooth slave In order for the remote device to connect to the WORKABOUT PRO the WORKABOUT PRO must offer a service in the form of a server The Servers tab allows these services to be enabled and configured There are three server services available Serial Scanner and OBEX OPP Se
277. ng that perform a fast dis charge standard charge and then a fast discharge Measure the time taken for the second discharge Dry heat After standard charge keep the 100 minutes or more battery at 60 C for 8 hrs Carry out a fast discharge standard charge and then a fast discharge Measure the time taken for the second discharge EMC CE Testing The battery will need to pass the Test to be performed requirements of the EMC directive by manufacturer 89 336 EEC and amendments when fitted into the product Emissions to EN55022 Class B 1998 Immunity to EN55024 1998 Electro Static Discharge Test EN61000 4 8 No damage A Contact Discharge 8kV for each contact pad by 10 times B Air Discharge 15kV for 10 times the discharge test point is for around battery casing WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 305 Chapter 8 Specifications Super High Capacity Model WA3010 8 3 2 3 Safety Data Description Condition Standard Short Circuit Test After a standard charge Protection circuit board to operate short terminals and dis No explosion fire smoke or leakage charge for 1 hr Over Charging Test After a standard charge Protection circuit board to operate charge continuously at No explosion fire smoke or leakage 4 2V and 4A for 8 hrs Reverse Charging Test After a standard discharge Protection circuit board to operate reverse charge continu No expl
278. ngs are read only Tap on the sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings C 4 4 Creating A Custom Preset A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset either a predefined preset or an ex isting custom preset To create a custom preset Highlight a preset and tap on the Add button A screen like the sample following is displayed PTS Imager Settin Y qe 350 ok Cloning from set Default Enter alphanumeric string C 10 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 4 5 Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Modifying A Custom Preset Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box Tap on OK to save your changes The preset list is displayed the new custom preset appears at the end of the list It is marked as read and write PTS Imager Settim Y 7 fy 42 ok Camera Presets Front Imager v R Read W Write A Active imagino Barcoding Fiker trance LATE ml Modifying A Custom Preset The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset To ensure that it will work reliably it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset To change a parameter value Highlight the custom preset and tap on the Edit button PTS Imager Settin Y qe Yok Preset Custom decode camera Image Corrections Auto Exposure Manual Exposure Windowing
279. ns in the charge well The 75 charge indicator is handy if you need a quick recharge a quick charge often takes less than one hour 7 17 3 Charge Indicators Single Battery Charge LED The LED on the top of the charger indicates battery charge progress Table 7 2 Charger LED Behaviour LED Behaviour Charge Status Off No battery detected in the charge well Solid green Battery is fully charged Fast flashing green Battery is charged to 75 of capacity Slow flashing green Charge in progress Solid red Battery is outside ambient temperature range of 0 C to 45 C 32 F to 113 F Flashing red Charge alarm indicating a charging circuit problem Refer to Troubleshooting on page 272 for details Flashing red then green ina Power up test sequence 3 second cycle 270 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Quad Battery Charger Model WA3004 G1 RN Note Battery charging continues whether the hand held is switched on or off 7 18 Quad Battery Charger Model WA3004 G1 Figure 7 9 Quad Battery Charger Note The gang charger is shipped with a user manual It is critical that this manual be reviewed for additional information and updates The quad battery charger is designed to charge up to four Lithium Ion batteries at one time 7 19 Charging Batteries e Slide the battery into a charge well aligning the contacts on the battery with the
280. nsider the following The display backlight is the largest drain on the battery Try to keep its brightness as low as possible e The hand held is event driven that is when the unit is not in use it reverts to sleep mode even when it appears to be running saving battery power Events include a key press touchscreen taps and scan triggers Power consumption is reduced if you avoid unnecessary events and allow the unit to sleep as much as possible The battery is a smart battery with built in intelligence Tapping on the Power icon under Start gt Settings gt System tab displays a dialog box that pro vides detailed information about the battery status of the main and backup batteries installed in your unit WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 3 8 1 3 9 A EL Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO Storing Batteries e When the hand held is switched off it goes into a low power suspend state but contin ues to draw a small amount of power from the battery This should not be an issue unless the unit is left in suspend state for more than a week for long term storage the battery should be removed from the unit Keep in mind also that some components and settings can affect the battery life while in suspend state For example if the GSM module power mode is set to Always On the battery life in suspend state is reduced Storing Batteries Long term battery storage is not recommended If sto
281. nsmits data from certain Micro PDF 417 symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols If Code 128 Emulation is enabled the following Micro PDF 417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes C1 if the first codeword is 903 907 912 914 915 C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 CO if the first codeword is 910 or 911 If Code 128 Emulation is set to off the Micro PDF 417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes E3 if the first codeword is 903 907 912 914 915 L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909 JES if the first codeword is 910 or 911 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 58 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Appendix D Bar Code Settings Codablock D 4 23 Codablock Enable Codablock A Set this parameter to on to enable Codablock type A Enable Codablock F Set this parameter to on to enable Codablock type F Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 59 A About Device icon 147 About icon software version 146 Accepted Start Char D 44 accessorles carrying case 257 desktop docking station 263 Ethernet adaptor cable 267 hand strap 249 holster soft she
282. nstalled on your PC before you can set up a partner ship between your WORKABOUT PRO and your PC Setting Up a Partnership Start Office OneNote and ActiveSync on your PC Connect the WORKABOUT PRO to your PC you can use a USB cable or a Bluetooth connection 92 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 5 Programs OneNote Mobile When a connection is established between the WORKABOUT PRO and your PC Active Sync displays a New Partnership screen New Partnership Set Up a Partnership This wizard helps you establish a partnership between your mobile device and this computer You can set up either a standard partnership to synchronize data between your device and this computer or a guest partnership to simply transfer data between your device and this computer What kind of partnership would you like to establish between your device and this computer O want to synchronize data between my device and this computer keeping data such as e mail and calendar items up to date in both places Guest partnership want to only copy and move information between my device and this computer add and remove programs or restore a backup image on a device whose memory has been reset do not want to synchronize data e Choose Standard partnership and tap on Next To share information between OneNote Mobile and Office OneNote 2007 on your PC tap Synchronize with this desktop computer and then
283. nt to disable roaming if you find yourself in a border area where the home network is not available but a foreign roaming partner is available Abroad you may find that an available network does not have packet data roaming agreements In this case you ll need to manually select the network which you know to support packet data roaming Automatic network selection is enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking Enable auto matic network select in the Network dialog box When automatic network selection is disabled you must select a network manually Available networks can also be viewed without changing any settings Scanning for avail able networks is a lengthy operation a progress bar is shown while the scan is active For every network that is found the network name country status and numeric network identifier MCC MNC Mobile Country Code followed by the Mobile Network Code is displayed 236 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Tools Menu Note Your home network operator will need to let you know which other networks have roaming agreements Even when a network is listed with an Available status it does not necessarily follow that it can be used or that the roaming agreement covers packet data A status of Forbidden indicates that the network cannot be used If you choose a network that is not covered by a roaming agreement the status in the main WWAN dialog box changes to
284. ntained it can be omni directionally scanned Enable RSS Limited RSS Limited is restricted in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs global trade item number that begin with either a 0 or a 1 It is not stackable and is not designed to be read omni directionally Enable RSS Expanded RSS Expanded uses the same application identifiers as UCC EAN 128 codes but they can be split into sections and stacked several rows high reducing the length of the symbol while increasing the capacity of data that can be stored RSS Expanded code can be omni direc tionally scanned Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 4 19 Composite AN Important To successfully read this type of bar code the two types of symbologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled In addition Center Bar Code Only must be disabled A composite symbol includes multi row 2D components making it compatible with linear and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners The options available for this parameter represent multi level components of a composite symbol Enable CC C And Enable CC AB To activate these components set these parameters to on D 56 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 4 20 Appendix D Bar Code Settings TLC 39 Linear Transmission Only When Linear Transmissi
285. number and then tap Menu gt Conference Tap on End to disconnect all calls Receive an Incoming Call To answer an incoming call Tap on the Send button located on the TAB key on the WORKABOUT PRO key board It s labelled with a green phone receiver Program Speed Dial The phone keypad provides a Speed Dial button for quick access to often used numbers WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 21 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout The Phone Keypad In the phone keypad tap on the Speed Dial button to display the speed dial Phone dialog box Phone _ E TI lok as a Voicemail 1 416 358 1549 This dialog box lists the phone numbers and the speed dial key to which the phone number has been assigned Tap on the Speed Dial Number to the left of the phone number you want to dial or Tap on the Call softkey the number is dialed for you Using the Phone Keypad to Program a Speed Dial There are a number of ways to add a speed dial number You can create a speed dial number using the Contacts list or by using the Speed Dial button on the phone keypad Adding a New Phone Number In the phone keypad tap on the Speed Dial button Inthe speed dial Phone dialog box tap on Menu gt New 22 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout The Phone Keypad In the list choose a contact for a speed dial Phone er yy ES Select a Contact Selectaconta
286. o Appendix B Port Pinouts B 1 LIF Low Insertion Force Port Pinout cesses eee eee o B 2 Tether Port Pinout its B 3 Battery Contact Pinout WA3006 amp WA3010 ee cece eee eee B 4 Positive Female Battery Connector 0 cece eee eee eee eeees Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet C 1 Required Applets 0 0 cece ccc eee ect e eee e eee eee eee eneeeenees C2 Presets aeree dlacd Seca E EP RE ad asad dese ede dees wees eee ARAPERA C 2 1 Predefined Presets ccc eee cece reide mannanna e eee e nee C 2 2 Bar Code Predefined Presets 0 eee eeee eee e ee eens C 2 3 Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets C 2 4 Image Capture Predefined Presets 0e ese e eee es C 3 Using The Teklogix Imagers Applet 0 0 cc cece eee ee eeees C 3 1 Configuring The Image Capture Presets 0oooocooommm C32 Selecting A Cama AAA C 3 3 Setting The Active Preset 0 cece cece ence eee e eee ees C34 Viewing A Presto ciclo IAS C 3 5 Creating A Custom Preset 00 cece eee e ee cence eeees C 3 6 Modifying A Custom Preset 0 cece eee e eee eee e eens C 3 7 Removing A Custom Preset 00 cece cence cence eens C 4 Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets C 4 1 Selecting A Camera 00 cece cece cece ete eee ee eee enes WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User
287. o a PC Note Refer to Refer to Linking A WORKABOUT PRO To A PC on page 266 for more details about the desktop docking station and how to link to a PC The WORKABOUT PRO can be connected to a PC using the desktop docking station Insert the unit in the desktop docking station e Usea Client USB connector to complete the communication link between the hand held and the PC Data Transfer Between the PC amp the Hand Held Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in your PC Microsoft ActiveSync is PC connectivity software that can be used to connect your hand held to PCs running this software ActiveSync works only with the Windows XP SP2 operating system or earlier If the Microsoft Vista operating system is installed in your PC ActiveSync is not re quired to transfer data between your WORKABOUT PRO and your PC By connecting the WORKABOUT PRO to a PC with a cable you can View WORKABOUT PRO files from Windows Explorer Drag and drop files between the WORKABOUT PRO and the PC in the same way that you would between PC drives Back up WORKABOUT PRO files to the PC then restore them from the PC to the hand held again if needed and so on Using Microsoft ActiveSync To install ActiveSync follow the step by step instructions provided at this website http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 147001 14 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual
288. om over charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at maximum capacity En Note Refer to Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time on page 30 for addi tional information about the battery AN Important To avoid damaging the battery chargers will not begin the charge process until the battery temperature is between 0 C to 45 C 32 F to 113 F 3 3 Switching the Hand Held On and Off Switching On the WORKABOUT PRO e Press and hold down the Power button for at least two seconds When the LED flashes green release the Power button The startup Today screen is displayed Note Ifthe WORKABOUT PRO is in suspend state pressing ENTER wakes the unit from this state The screen in which you were working before the computer entered suspend state is displayed Wakeup Keys Tab on page 168 describes how you can assign other wakeup keys or enable a two key power on sequence Switching Off the WORKABOUT PRO Suspend AN Important Keep in mind that turning off the WORKABOUT PRO does not result in a complete reboot rather the unit enters a power saving suspend state When the unit is turned on from suspend state operation resumes within a few seconds To switch off the WORKABOUT PRO e Press the Power button 40 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 3 4 3 4 1 Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO The Keyboards The Keyboards T
289. on OK 6 42 7 Selecting A Network AN Important Normally you will not need to change these settings Contact your ISP or network administrator before making any changes Private networks are used for work related activities Internet networks are used for home connection to your ISP The My Work Network settings are used for private network connec tions corporate networks while My ISP settings are used for Internet network connections When you use programs such as Internet Explorer your WORKABOUT PRO automati cally connects using private network settings under My Work Network or Internet settings under My ISP depending on specifications You can determine how your WORKABOUT PRO connects Tap Start gt Settings Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon 224 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Tap on the Advanced tab Settings t Y ok Connections Select which networks are automatically used Select Netwo Dialing Rulas Create exceptions for intranet addresses Exceptions Tap on Select Networks In the appropriate lists choose My ISP or My Work Network 6 42 8 Proxy Server Setup Chapter 6 Settings Proxy Server Setup Note If you are connected to your ISP or private network during synchronization the WORKABOUT PRO will download the appropriate settings during synchronization from your PC If these settings are not on your PC or if they need to be chang
290. on Only is enabled only the linear code portion of the composite bar code is transmitted when scanned UPC EAN Composite Message This option allows you to choose how UPC EAN shared bar codes are transmitted Always Linked Never Linked or Auto discriminate TLC 39 Enable This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear Code 39 symbol Setting this parameter to on enables this parameter Linear Transmission Only When Linear Transmission Only is enabled only the linear portion of the composite bar code is transmitted when scanned Security Level This parameter is used to differentiate between TLC 39 and standard Code 39 Tapping on Security Level displays a dialog box in which you can assign a value from 0 to 100 The higher the value assigned the lower the decode rate Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 57 Appendix D Bar Code Settings PDF 417 D 4 21 PDF 417 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable PDF 417 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 4 22 Micro PDF 417 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Micro PDF 417 Code 128 Emulation When this parameter is enabled the scanner tra
291. on of Liability provided at www psionteklogix com warranty If you are not already a member of Teknet and you attempt to view this warranty you will be asked to register As a member of Teknet you will have access to helpful information about your Psion Teklogix products at no charge to you In some regions this warranty may exceed this period Please contact your local Psion Teklogix office for details The warranty on Psion Teklogix manufactured equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with altered or repaired by any person other than an employee of an authorized Psion Teklogix service organization See Psion Teklogix terms and conditions of sale for full details Important Psion Teklogix warranties take effect on the date of shipment Disclaimer Every effort has been made to make this material complete accurate and up to date In ad dition changes are periodically added to the information herein these changes will be incor porated into new editions of the publication Psion Teklogix Inc reserves the right to make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this doc ument without notice and shall not be responsible for any damages including but not limited to consequential damages caused by reliance on the material presented including but not limited to typographical errors TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 1 2 1 3 About This Manual
292. on to enable Discrete 2 of 5 D 16 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 2 17 Appendix D Bar Code Settings RSS Code Set Length L1 And Set Length L2 Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 can be set for Any length Length within a range One discrete length or Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from to 12 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details RSS Code Enable Setting this parameter to on enables 2D RSS Code scanning capability Enable RSS 14 Reduced Space Symbology RSS 14 code can be either purely linear or split in half with one half stacked on top of the other half Stacking the code reduces the bar code length and providing the nominal height of the code is maintained it can be omni directionally scanned Enable RSS Limited RSS Limited is r
293. ons icon 126 C calculator 90 calendar 70 categories using 72 creating amp editing entries 70 deleting appointments 73 reminders creating 7 calibrating touchscreen 47 Call Options modem setup 2 4 cards inserting SIM amp SD MMC 55 Card Slots tab Power 166 case carrying 257 CDMA IxRTT 227 238 certificates 150 charger descriptions of 39 safety instructions 262 263 chargers 261 desktop docking station 263 installing at a site 261 operator controls 262 quad battery charger WA3004 271 single battery 269 charging main battery 11 Check Char 22 28 29 30 Check Digit 24 25 26 check digit D 15 30 Check Digit One D 15 30 Check Digits MSI Plessey D 5 30 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Check Digit Verification D 8 D 45 D 46 D 51 D 52 D 53 D 54 Check Digit Verification Codabar D 51 Check Digit Verification 12 of 5 D 16 cigarette lighter adaptor automotive adaptor 269 cleaning hand held 57 Click Data scanner double click 176 Click Time scanner double click 175 clock setting 65 152 CLSI Editing D 4 CLSI Library System D 50 Codabar D 14 27 D 50 Codabar D 4 Codablock 37 D 59 Code Page Default Local ASCII 77 ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 177 code page Data Handling 177 Code 11 29 D 52 Code 128 D 9 23 D 45 Code 128 Emulation D 19 D 58 Code 16K 36 Code 32 Convert To D 7 Code 32 Prefix D 7 Code 39 D 6 22 D 44 Code 49 36 Code 93 D 13 27 D 50 Code 93 D 13 cold
294. ooth radio making it is possible to com municate with a variety of Bluetooth peripherals including GSM GPRS handsets scanners printers and so on The range of the Bluetooth radio is limited to approximately 5 meters Psion Teklogix provides built in support for the Bluetooth peripherals listed below GSM GPRS universal handset Bluetooth printer e Bluetooth headset Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802 11b g radios both operate in the 2 4GHz band Although the WORKABOUT PRO includes features to minimize interference perfor mance of the system will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously Typically when both radios operate in the hand held at the same time they cannot transmit simultane ously this has a negative impact on overall system throughput To minimize the impact on the backbone 802 11g network Psion Teklogix recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction rates such as printers and scanners Refer to Bluetooth Setup on page 201 for information about setting up your Bluetooth devices for communication In addition review the manual shipped with your Bluetooth device to determine the method used to pair with the WORKABOUT PRO host WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 283 SPECIFICATIONS 8 8 1 Hand Held Computer Specifications o o o 287 8 2 Radio Specifications ee 292 8 2 1 Model RA2041 802 11 b g Direct Sequence Spread Spe
295. or the appropriate server type type the proxy server name and port Tap on OK 226 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual E E E 6 43 6 44 6 44 1 Chapter 6 Settings Wireless Statistics Wireless Statistics A Wireless Statistics Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections gt Wireless Statistics icon to display the communi cation statistics of your wireless connection along with the radio card name MAC address driver version and NDIS Compliance information Tap on the Zero button to reset the statistics Wireless WAN Windows Mobile 6 1 Classic Only O Wireless WAN This applet is visible for WORKABOUT PRO s running Windows Mobile 6 1 Classic A hand held equipped with a GSM GPRS CDMA IxRTT or UMTS radio has wide area net working data transfer capabilities Softkey Bar Icons Wireless WAN icons in the softkey bar indicate the status of your wide area network con nection Note that these icons are only visible when a GSM GPRS CDMA 1xRTT or UMTS radio is installed in the unit and the interface is enabled The letter in the signal strength icon G for GSM GPRS U for UMTS and X for CDMA 1xRTT indicates that a packet data service is available and initialized Keep in mind that the signal strength icon is displayed without a letter if packet data service is not available or if it is available but not yet initialized User interaction is required e g the user is r
296. ording Notes 2 ie e2derssasanssasasgcues See ee he ee 106 5 11 5 Synchronizing a Note 0 c ccc eect eee cence eee rr 108 Pictures Se VIdEOS rro EII NE ti 108 5 12 1 Moving Photos to the WORKBOUT PRO 0c ccc cece eee e cece eens 108 5 12 2 Openinga Photo s 2 22292 asessswncnseeeeewemnrssacssaaeaageteaseeeseee intents 109 5 12 3 Deleting a Photo lt c2c2ccccccceceeee ni 109 5124 Editing a Photon orrido es O eae 109 5 12 5 Creating a Slide SAW ds 109 Intemet Explorers shctccccceges roo 110 5 133 BrOWSing Weber dd Ladera 110 Mesa tati 111 LATE Folders HA A A A A AAA AAA tie 111 5 14 2 Synchronizing E mail with Outlook 00oooooooooooocconrrrrrrrrrnos 112 5 14 3 Changing Synchronization Settings 00 0 cece cece ec ee cence eee enneeees 113 Remote Desktop Mobile 0 cece cece cece eee e ee eee ee ee rr 114 5 15 1 Connecting to a Terminal Server 0 0 cece eee e eee e rr 114 5 15 2 Disconnecting without Ending a Session 0e cece eee ee eect eee e eens 114 5015 3 Ending des o A Don 114 Summit Client Utility SCU 00 c T nee rro 115 Search isvsisivstts isles ses See A A 115 Task Mad licor OS NARRAR RRA 116 RR ih SRSA SRO es ERAN BARBRA ABN LRAAABAAS AAAS Re kes 116 Windows LiVE ope peeves DOS 116 Windows Media 6c ccc cece eee cnn rn 116 Chapter 6 Settings 6 1 6 2 Settings ve vivir E oso ue cc ENA Cad Cad ad aad wea bb tae E EEE
297. ortant For details about the Scanner Settings refer toAppendix D Bar Code Settings 5 7 File Explorer P File Explorer Windows Mobile 6 1 files are stored in folders and sub folders that are accessible through File Explorer You can open save rename copy and paste files in the same manner as you would on any desktop PC AN Important Refer to Managing Files and Folders on page 75 for details about this program 5 8 Getting Started For information about the Getting Started applet refer to The Getting Started Centre on page 15 5 9 PTSI Imager Demo To run a demonstration of the Teklogix Imager applet features Tap on Start gt Programs gt PTSI Imager icon man te A Important For details about this applet refer to Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 101 Chapter 5 Programs Internet Sharing 5 10 5 10 1 5 10 2 Internet Sharing a Internet Sharing This option allows you to use your WORKABOUT PRO to connect your PC to the Inter net Before you can use Internet Sharing you must make certain that you have established a data connection on your WORKABOUT PRO Creating an Internet Connection Follow the steps in this section only if you have not already setup an Internet connection You ll need the following information before you begin From your cellular service provider d
298. osion fire smoke or leakage ously at 4 2V and 4A for 8hrs 8 3 2 4 Safety License Item Licenses Standard 1 UL 1642 The lithium ion cell has been listed and pass the UL1642 stand ard by UL Lab File No MH12383 2 UL 2054 The battery pack is in the process to apply the UL 2054 battery standard File No MH29921 3 89 336 EEC The battery pack is in the process to apply the below standard EMC directive EN55022 LVD 72 23 EEC EN55024 EN61326 4 RoHS Direc The materials of battery pack are used in accordance with the tive European RoHS directive 306 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 8 3 2 5 Environmental Test Chapter 8 Specifications Super High Capacity Model WA3010 Description Test Refer Test Reference Results ence Drop mechanical Drop sample battery on all faces from height of 1 2 meters onto concrete floor No explosion fire vent leakage and the open circuit voltage higher than 3 7V Storage at high temp EN60068 2 2 60 C dry for 240 hours Test No explosion fire vent or leakage Storage at low temp EN60068 2 1 20 C dry for 240 hours Test No explosion fire vent or leakage Storage at high temp IEC68 2 3 40 C at 90 RH for 240 hours and high humidity Test No explosion fire vent or leakage Storage temp cycling IEC68 2 14 60 C 2C for 1 hour T1 200C 2C for 1 hour Test 3 minutes Max allowed for change between T1 and T2 Cycle 10 times No explosion
299. ou can choose from four options Create Profile Restore Profile View Profile and Delete Profile Tap on the Create Profile button to begin the process Profile Information Total Recall Profile Name Defaultl Type AutoRestore Profile Location my Documents This dialog box displays the default profile name the type of restore AutoRestore or Man ualRestore and the possible storage destination for the profile file WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 187 Chapter 6 Settings Creating A Backup Profile 188 To change the Profile Name optional tap on the button to the right of the Profile Location field In the Name field type a new name You may need to move the onscreen keyboard down to make the Name field visible Tap on OK to save the new profile name Next choose the profile Type you want to create AutoRestore creates a profile that automatically restores itself following a cold reset or a clean reset ManualRestore creates a backup that is manually restored by the operator Finally if you want to choose another location for your backup file optional tap on the button to the right of the Profile Location field Navigate to the new location and tap on OK to save it Tap on the gt Next button Defining the Type of Backup e Total Recall Select the type of backup that you wish to perform 8 Default Backup O Adv
300. ours 4 15V or more Internal Resistance After standard charge measure within 24 hours 150 mo max Capacity _1 After standard charge measure time taken for a fast discharge 110 minutes or more Charge Discharge Cycle After repeating standard charge and fast discharge measure the fast dis charge time after 300 discharge cycles 90 minutes or more Capacity _2 After standard charge measure the time taken for a standard discharge 500 minutes or more Over Discharge After standard charge apply a stand ard discharge followed by a standby discharge Then measure capacity after carrying out standard charge and then a fast discharge 110 minutes or more Self discharge After a standard charge keep battery at 25 C for 30 days Measure the time taken for a fast discharge 100 mins or more 304 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications Super High Capacity Model WA3010 Description Condition Standard Temperature Perform a standard charge and fast 100 mins 0 C discharge at 0 C 25 C and 40 C and 110 mins 23 C measured the time taken for a fast dis 105 mins 40 C charge at 25 C Temp Humidity Cycle After standard charge carry out 5 100 minutes or more cycles of the following 65 C and 90 humidity for 8 hrs 25 C and 65 humidity for 4 hrs 20 C for 8 hrs 25 C and 65 humidity for 4 hrs Followi
301. ows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 261 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Power Consumption Considerations 7 9 2 7 9 3 7 9 4 262 e Chargers will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of 0 C to 45 C 32 F to 113 F It is recommended that the charger or docking station be operated at room temperature between 18 C and 25 C 64 F to 77 F for maximum performance After unpacking your unit e Visually inspect the charger for possible damage Install the IEC power cord and apply power Power Consumption Considerations Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying chargers and or docking stations is adequate for the load especially if several chargers and docking stations are being powered from the same circuit e Quad charger can consume up to 2A 120VAC or 1A Y 240VAC e Quad docking station can consume up to 3A 120VAC or 1 5A 240VAC Operator Controls WORKABOUT PRO docking stations and chargers have no operator controls or power switches Important Charger Safety Instructions SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS This manual contains important safety and operat ing instructions for battery charger s Before using the battery charger read all instructions and cautionary markings on 1 battery charger 2 battery and 3 product using battery The mains power cord shall comply with national safety regulations of the country where the equipment is to be sold Use
302. ows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 75 Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Creating a New Folder 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 4 3 4 4 4 76 Creating a New Folder e Tap Start gt Programs gt File Explorer Tap Menu gt New Folder in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen Use the WORKABOUT PRO keyboard or the soft keyboard to assign a name to the folder Renaming a File e Press and hold the stylus on the file you want to rename A ring of dots is displayed fol lowed by a pop up menu Tap Rename The file name is highlighted Type a new name Copying a File Press and hold the stylus on the file you want to copy A ring of dots is displayed fol lowed by a pop up menu Tap on Copy in the pop up menu e Navigate to the location where you want to copy the file e Press and hold the stylus in a blank area of the screen away from other icons until a pop up menu is displayed Tap Paste to copy the file to the new location Deleting a File e Press and hold the stylus on the file or folder you want to delete until a pop up menu is displayed e Tap Delete to remove the file WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Using Menus 4 5 Using Menus In Windows Mobile 6 1 Classic and Professional the menu is located in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen Word Mobile ex d 5 04 X 3 All Folders y Name y Softkey Bar To execute
303. ows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 85 Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer 86 e To create an uppercase character draw a line straight up the abc panel Use the Recognizer Icon Bar to move around the screen add spaces special characters and so on Letter Recognizer e Open a document and tap on the arrow next to the input icon Choose Letter Recognizer Word Mobile 4 4 6 22 lok Input Panel Recognizer Icon Bar Input Icon There are two points to remember when using Letter Recognizer First limit your writing to the Letter Recognizer Input Panel do not write in the body of the document Second write only lowercase letters with your stylus Tap on the icon in the Recognizer Icon Bar to display the Character Recognizer screen This screen provides a visual demonstration of how to enter letters that will be recognized Tap on a character in the soft keyboard for a demonstration of how to form a recognizable letter e To create an uppercase character write a lowercase letter on the left side ABC of the input panel To create a lowercase character write a lowercase letter in the middle abc of the input panel Write numbers on the right side 123 of the input panel WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual PROGRAMS 5 Sak Programs o BOR eRe a a to hd eg wees 89 IZ GAMO iia 2 45 Bled hice Gs a 0 BER oT Oaks he SW aye R
304. ows Mobile 6 1 User Manual A 5 Appendix A Summit Client Utility SCU EAP Credentials e LEAP Strong passwords are recommended e EAP FAST SCU supports automatic not manual PAC provisioning EAP TLS will work with a 802 11b g radio module when Windows Zero Config WZC rather than the SCU is used to configure the type With WZC the native Windows suppli cant instead of the SCU integrated supplicant is used A 3 2 EAP Credentials Keep the following in mind when defining security settings e If the credentials specified in the profile are incorrect and that profile is used the authentication fails without an error message you will not be prompted to enter correct credentials e Ifthe credentials are not specified in the profile when the radio tries to associate using that profile you will be prompted to enter the credentials e When prompted you can enter valid credentials enter invalid credentials or cancel the operation Ifyou enter valid credentials and tap OK the radio will associate and authenticate e If you enter invalid credentials and tap OK the radio will associate but will not authen ticate you will be prompted again to enter credentials Ifyou tap Cancel or clear the credentials fields and tap OK the radio will not attempt to associate with that profile until you perform one of the following actions while the profile is the Active Profile Cause the WORKABOUT PRO to go through a power cycle or sus
305. ows you to assign a PIN Personal Identification Number so that your hand held is protected from unauthorized use Your SIM card manufacturer provides the default PIN which you can change in this field Changing a PIN Tap on the Change PIN button and use the phone keypad to enter your existing SIM card PIN Tap on the Enter button in the phone keypad WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 27 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Managing Phone Settings A Important If you enter an incorrect PIN a message is displayed letting you know that you ll need to reenter the correct value You have five chances to enter the correct PIN If you exceed this number the SIM will be disabled automatically You will be asked to enter a PUK Personal Unlocking Key Your system administrator will be able to provide this information Once you ve entered the correct PIN a new screen appears asking that you enter you new PIN Enter new PIN PIN must be between 4 and 3 digits in length 1 WAS E Clear mno Cancel ati Sik m m 7 pqrs 8 tuv wXyz a A eee i 0 Enter e Type your new PIN a number consisting of between 4 and 8 digits in length Tap on Enter A new message lets you know that you need to confirm your new PIN e Retype your new PIN Tap on Enter when you re finished Enabling PIN Security To activate PIN security Tap in the checkbox to the left of Require PIN when phone is used When
306. pend resume Disable and enable the radio or tap the Reconnect button on the Diags windows Modify the profile and tap on Commit Alternatively you can choose another profile as the active profile and then switch back to the profile for which EAP authentication was cancelled A 3 3 ThirdPartyConfig If you choose to configure ThirdPartyConfig the SCU will work with the operating sys tem s Windows Zero Config WZC to configure radio and security settings for the CF radio installed in the unit Choosing this profile means that WZC must be used to define the following radio and secu rity options SSID Auth Type EAP Type and Encryption The SCU settings for ThirdPartyConfig include Client Name Power Save Tx Power Bit Rate and Radio Mode A 6 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Appendix A Summit Client Utility SCU Status Tab These SCU settings along with SCU global settings and the WZC settings will be applied to the radio module A 4 Status Tab Summit Client Utili ao qe Y 4 lt ok Profile Default Status Not Associated Device Name Unnamed IP coe yene seein MAC 00 17 23 01 5d el AP Name Unknown Beacon Period DTIM Connection Channel Bit Rate Mbps Tx Power 80 mW Signal Strength dBm Signal Quality The Status tab provides status information including IP address and MAC address for the client radio IP address and MAC address for the AP signa
307. pinouts B 1 C 1 pistol grip Flush Mount installing 256 installing 251 trigger backplate installing 253 Plessey Maximum Length 29 Plessey Minimum Length 29 Index Plessy Transmit Check Digit D 52 Pocket Excel workbook components 9 Pocket Word 98 port pinouts B 1 C portrait orientation 48 port replicator 279 Port Replicator Port A COM5 184 Baud 8 184 Data Bits 181 185 Parity 182 185 Stop Bits 182 185 Trigger On Sequence 782 185 Port Replicator Port B COM6 184 Port Replicator Port C COM7 184 ports LIF Low Insertion Force B tether B 2 Port Settings modem setup 2 3 PosiCode 33 Postal Predefined preset C 3 Postal Australian 40 Canadian 40 China 40 Japanese 41 Kix 41 Korean 4 PlaNET 39 PostNET 39 Royal 42 Power 163 Advanced battery settings 164 Battery Details tab 165 Battery tab 164 Built In Devices 166 Built in Devices tab 166 Card Slots tab 166 On Battery Power 164 On External Power 164 Suspend Threshold 167 Wakeup Keys 68 powering up 12 Power Mode Decoded Internal Scanner D 3 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Vil Index Predefined preset C All C2 Default C 2 C 3 C 4 Glossy surface C 3 Linear C 3 Linear and PDF C 3 Low light C 3 Low light near C 4 Low power C 3 Matrix C 3 Motion C 4 Postal C 3 Predefined presets C 2 Prefix D 6 D 9 Preset Custom C 1 Group C Group default identifier C 2 Predefined C C 2 Preset group Default identifi
308. please read Removing the Battery Pack on page 38 and Safely Swapping the Main Battery on page 38 Battery packs shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40 and must be fully charged prior to use Batteries can be charged using a variety of chargers and docking sta tions along with aWORKABOUT PRO internal charger When using the internal charger a suitable power source is required All chargers and docking stations are described in Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories beginning on page 245 for details Note If you are powering up a new unit a warning message may appear on the screen indicating that the backup battery capacity is low To recharge the internal battery you must fully charge the WORKABOUT PRO with the main battery installed in the unit The Backup Battery To preserve data stored in your WORKABOUT PRO while you swap the main battery the unit is equipped with an internal backup battery a replaceable rechargeable Lithium Ion backup battery that can be ordered through Psion Teklogix The backup battery will supply 5 minutes of continuous power while you install a charged main battery The backup battery is trickle charged from the main battery Provided that the main battery contains power the backup battery will maintain a charge whether the WORKABOUT WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 11 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Turning the WORKABOUT PRO On and Off Ela
309. portant The Pictures amp Videos program can only display bmp or jpg formats Photos in other formats will need to be converted on your PC before they are transferred to the WORKABOUT PRO 5 12 1 Moving Photos to the WORKBOUT PRO e Connect your device to your PC with ActiveSync On your PC using Windows Explorer right click My Computer and click on Explorer drag photos from their folder to the Mobile Device My Pictures folder 108 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 5 12 2 5 12 3 5 12 4 5 12 5 Chapter 5 Programs Opening a Photo Opening a Photo Tap on Start gt Programs gt Pictures amp Videos Yov ll see a thumbnail of your photos y Pictures amp Videos d 4 42 X Note Ifyou ve stored your photos on a storage card you ll need to tap on the storage card icon to display your photos Tap on a thumbnail to open a photo Deleting a Photo Press and hold the stylus on the thumbnail photo you want to delete to display a pop up menu Tap on Delete Confirm your choice when prompted Editing a Photo Tap a thumbnail photo to open it e Tap on Menu gt Edit The Rotate command is now displayed in the softkey bar Additional editing tools are now listed in the Menu Creating a Slide Show To view a slide show Tap on the Menu gt Play Slide Show The slide show begins in slide show mode photos are displayed for about five seconds one after the other
310. ppendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Advanced Tab Tap on the File Location button PTS Imager Settin Y 47 Fy 42 None Main memory Type the file Name choose the Folder and file Type e Choose the Location in which your files will be saved When you have completed all the changes tap on the Save button C 4 16 2 Configuring Triggers C 20 Viewing The Trigger Configuration The trigger on the WORKABOUT is configured using the Manage Triggers applet The Teklogix Imagers applet provides a shortcut to the Manage Triggers applet Inthe Advanced tab tap on the Trigger Control button WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 5 Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Teklogix Scanners Applet To view all the triggers and the hardware devices that are configured to use them tap in the checkbox next to Show all modules Manage Triggers 4 3 07 Dk Double click 0 1000 msec L Show all modules Add Edit Remove amp Adding Editing And Removing Triggers For instruction about adding editing and removing triggers refer to Manage Triggers on page 158 Teklogix Scanners Applet The bar code symbologies that are to be read by the imager can be enabled using the Tek logix Scanners applet Tapping on Start gt Settings gt System tab followed by the Teklogix Scanners icon displays this applet Warning Changes made to the symbology configuration
311. ppointments for the week divided into days You can choose to leave the calendar as is or you can tap on the Day softkey to reflect the Week Month or Year Creating and Editing Appointments Inthe Calendar screen tap on Menu in the softkey bar and then tap on New Appointment 70 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Calendar of Upcoming Appointments Figure 4 2 Appointment Detail Screen Subject Location a Starts 2 13 10 12 00PM All Day No Occurs Once Reminder Remind me 15 minute s Categories No categories Attendees No attendees Status Busy Sensitivity Normal Appointment Notes In the Subject field name the appointment e Complete the remaining fields to reflect your appointment details Note Refer to Adding Reminders on page 71 for details Refer to Using Categories on page 72 for information about this option Tap on OK to save your changes and close the screen 4 2 6 2 Adding Reminders In the Today screen tap on the appointment for which you d like a reminder In the next screen tap on the appointment title Finally in the summary screen tap on the Menu softkey and then choose the Edit command t Ty Me ok Subject Lunch Location y Starts 2 13 10 12 00 PM Ends 2 13 10 1 00 PM All Day No Occurs Once Reminder Remind me 15 minute s Categories No categories
312. ption and will void the product warranty Wiring Vehicle Power To The Cradle An optional 1 8 meter 6 foot extension power cable PN 13985 compatible with your powered vehicle cradle can be purchased from Psion Teklogix This optional cable should be wired to a filtered fused maximum 10A accessory supply on the vehicle The power 278 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 7 31 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories The Port Replicator cradle draws no more than 8A less if the accessory supply is greater than 12V Any addi tional wiring connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at least 10A The red lead of the power cable attaches to the positive vehicle supply The black lead con nects to the negative supply this should be connected to a proper terminal block and not to the vehicle body The power cradle is fully isolated and can be used with both negative and positive chassis vehicles You may have the option of connecting power before or after the key switch It is prefera ble to wire the power cradle after the key switch that is it cannot be turned on without the key on However if the operator switches the key off repeatedly for long periods during a shift it may make more sense to wire the cradle before the switch Keep in mind that the WORKABOUT PRO will continue to operate with or without vehicle power as long as its battery has sufficient charge If an unfused power source m
313. ptive multi rate AMR Basic hands free operation Echo cancellation Noise reduction Hirose U FL R SMT 50 ohm antenna connector Molex 80 pin board to board connector Power supply Audio 2x analog 1x digital Frequency band GSM GPRS EDGE GSM class Output power as per Release 99 RoHS HSDPA features UMTS features GSM GPRS EGPRS features 2 x serial interface ITU T V 24 protocol USB 2 0 full speed SIM card interface 3 V 1 8 V Model RA3040 G2 Siemens HC25 UMTS Modem UMTS HSDPA Triple band 850 1900 2100MHz Quad band 850 900 1800 1900MHz Small MS Class 4 33dBm 2dB for EGSM850 Class 4 33dBm 2dB for EGSM900 Class 1 30dBm 2dB for GSM1800 Class 1 30dBm 2dB for GSM1900 Class E2 27dBm 3dB for GSM 850 8 PSK Class E2 27dBm 3dB for GSM 900 8 PSK Class E2 26dBm 3 4dB for GSM 1800 8 PSK Class E2 26dBm 3 4dB for GSM 1900 8 PSK Class 3 24dBm 1 3dB for UMTS 2100 WCDMA FDD Bdl Class 3 24dBm 1 3dB for UMTS 1900 WCDMA FDD Bdll Class 3 24dBm 1 3dB for UMTS 850 WCDMA EDD BdV All hardware components fully compliant with EU RoHS Directive 3GPP Release 5 DL 3 6 Mbps UL 384 kbps UE CAT 1 6 11 12 supported 3GPP Release 4 PS data rate 384 kbps DL 384 kbps UL CS data rate 64 kbps DL 64 kbps UL Data transfer GPRS SMS Audio Multislot Class 10 Full PBCCH support Mobile Station Class B Cod
314. r 2 Basic Checkout Send End Calls Using the WORKABOUT PRO Keyboard phanumeric and numeric keyboards these button are mapped to the F3 and F4 function keys near the top of the keyboard jajaj PIsIilo N TEKLOG1X Send End Using these phone keys you can display the phone keypad and answer send and terminate phone calls If you press the Send or End buttons with no result you may first need to acti vate them Activating the Send and End Keyboard Phone Buttons To activate the phone function of these keys Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab gt About Device icon Tap on the Experience tab About Device ay Til lok Select the settings you want to use for your Windows Mobile experience Psion Teklogix settings y Enable audio power savings Show keyboard indicator icon L Show notification popups on external device connections O Summit radio uses Wireless Zero Config reset required Enter emulates d pad action key Enable Phone keys Talk and End in place of the Tab and Esc keys nw If it s not chosen by default choose Psion Teklogix Settings in the drop down menu at the top of the screen The checkbox next to Enable Phone keys Send and End in place of the Tab and Esc keys should be checked automatically If not check it and tap on OK WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 25 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Managing Phone Settings 2 8 3 Managing Phone Se
315. r D 2 D 2 1 Options Decoded Internal Scanner 0 cece cece cece eee eee e tenes D 2 D 2 2 Advanced Options Decoded Internal 0 0 c cece cee eee e eee D 3 D 2 3 Decoded Internal 2D Scanning Options 00 cc cece eee e eee eee e ees D 5 D 2 4 Data Options Decoded Internal Scanner 00 cece cee eee eeees D 5 D259 Code 39 AS D 6 D256 Code 128i ie sess IES RAR RA D 9 D27 EAN 13 8 tect iatan IEEE aa abaaaaaaa daar aE D 10 DAS SEAN S tepne penan E E EEEE E ERER D 10 D29 UPC ASE IIA AAA EOE E OET sae ENSERES D 11 D210 UPC He e E as ss ONS D 11 D 2 11 UPC EAN Shared Settings 0 cece n ee e eea D 12 D212 Code tisi setae oos o a ba D 13 D213 Codabat it IIA E EEE ENRE ETENEE veuee opensageeeeeeeat a gt D 14 D214 MSI Plessy ic a aaan a ekekeke eklas Ta D 14 D2157 Interleaved Boa NARRAR RRA R E D 16 D2 161 Discret 2 ofS creta aii LI ULA el atacar Es D 16 D 217 RSS Codertrannnts pe Ad aon D 17 D 2 18 Comp ai D 18 B219 POFA TA A AAA AI EII aa D 18 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual xi xii Contents D 3 D220 Micro PDEA a AAA AS RRA D 19 Decoded HH lata D 20 D 3 1 Options Decoded HHP oooocoooccccccccnnccncnncrrcnr rro D 20 D 3 2 Advanced Options Decoded HHP 00 cc eee e cence eee eee eeees D 20 DIA Code Verrerie CCD D 22 DIA POPE Code ro ALLL da D 23 DITA Eolo D 23 D 3 6 EAN 13 Settings 0 0 0 0 0c
316. r Manual Appendix A Summit Client Utility SCU Profile Tab e Delete Deletes the profile unless it is currently active Scan Opens a new window which displays a list of available access points with their respective SSIDs Signal Strength RSSI value and Security Status Selecting an AP returns you to the profile page and populates a new profile with the information availa ble from the scan to simplify setting up a new profile e Radio Lists radio attributes These attributes can be individually chosen from this menu When an attribute is chosen an associated list of options is displayed where you can assign new settings or view existing settings e Commit Saves all changes The following table describes the options in the Radio Attributes drop down menu Peet Description Value Default SSID Service set identifier SSID for Maximum of 32 characters None WLAN to which the radio connects Client Name assigned toradio amp Maximum of 16 characters None Name WORKABOUT PRO into which it is installed Power Save Power save mode for radio CAM Constantly awake Fast Maximum Maximum power savings Fast Fast power save mode Tx Power Maximum transmit power Max Maximum defined for Max current regulatory domain Measured in mW 50 30 10 1 Bit Rate Used by radio when interacting Auto Rate automatically nego Auto with WLAN access point tiated with access point Rates in Mbps 1 2 5 5 6 9 1
317. r WORKABOUT PRO Figure 4 3 Program Screen Icons Programs 3 en x 42 X a A e E Games ActiveSync Calculator Jl wey q Damo File Explorer Getting Scanner Started gt 2 my Internet Messenger Modem Link Sharing le Ar P e Notes Pictures Videos E Opening an Application Tap on an icon in this screen to launch the associated program Minimizing an Application Tap on the X button in the upper right corner of an application screen to minimize the application Note that sometimes an OK button is displayed IM y Note Although it looks like the application is closed it is only minimized To close the application you ll need to tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab gt Task Manager icon Follow the steps in Switching Between And Closing Applications below IS Switching Between and Closing Applications The Task Manager lists all running tasks applications 80 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Programs Using Applications Tap on Start gt Settings Tap on the System tab and then the Task Manager icon the Task Manager screen is opened sE Task Manager ee YX Application Mem cru ActiveSync 612K Messaging Task Manager End Task This applet provides a number of options to manage your opened applications End Task To shut down an application highlight the program in the list and
318. r si sos ssa se ccanctncneccnnccnanens sissies EEOAE TOES 148 6 16 2 External POWER RANA RRR detec 149 6 16 3 Intensity 2 2 lt 226 Ad atada ce eee ee 149 Certificates 32 265 2225 ir 150 6 1721 Choosing A Certificate coa dd eed 152 ATT A TT 152 COM Port Manager ana BARRA AAAA NN 152 Dr Debug iii id 153 LO AAA e e tad 154 0 20 2 Settings ias 154 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual v vi Contents 6 21 6 22 6 23 6 24 6 25 6 26 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 30 6 31 6 32 6 33 6 34 6 20 3 Utilities A RR ab 155 Y 1 6 o y OPOPOOCOOCO enn E RE ee ee eee 155 Error Reporting ii A a E RIN 156 External GPS Global Positioning System 00 cc ee cece e eee e eee eneeeeenes 156 Manage Tniggers 22226 io 158 6241 ingoermMappings aa cat age cesos tos LL LLL ao 159 Managed Programs 0 cece cece cence rr rr rr rr rr 161 MENTOV ieee Oink Rae ween 162 626 1 Main Tab idscccsssssssssecccetoncceceeeecccecssaaasssaann een saaaaaaaan emeees 163 6 26 2 Storage Cardin cen sede a A ROO tees eek 163 Power ICM Liar SETTET tate Add 163 6 27 Battery Labs sin oiin aa EEEE E EEE EEE CEEE poe 164 0212 Advanced Tabeu3 13333332 assas aaa a e ESA 164 627 3 Battery Detalls cnoiar ee eaer ireen 165 0274A BUD e E aaaea 166 6 27 5 Card Slots AAA e 166 0 210 Suspend Threshold o o 167 6 27 7 Wakeup Keys Tab oooooococcccccnccnnccccnrc rn 168 0 21 87 Suspend MOE ii AGE A EEE da 168 Regional Settings
319. r the battery is low To specify how you want your WORKABOUT PRO to respond under various conditions refer to Sound amp Notifications on page 143 The volume can be adjusted using the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW The i Eon volume key lt i is labelled with a plus symbol and the decrease volume key lt is la belled with a minus symbol Adjusting Speaker Volume Lock the FN BLUE key on and then press UP ARROW the increase volume key or DOWN ARROW the decrease volume key until the volume meets your requirements e When you re done you will need to unlock turn off the FN BLUE key Press FN BLUE again to unlock the key Monitoring the Battery and Maximizing Run Time _ Note When the main battery is at 50 capacity a low battery warning is displayed When the battery is at approximately 10 capacity a very low main battery notifi cation bubble appears As Lithium Ion batteries age their capacity decreases gradually and they are generally con sidered depleted after approximately 2 years of use less than 60 of original capacity remaining Keep in mind however that heavy usage or operating the unit at temperature ex tremes will shorten the battery life Lithium Ion batteries do not require conditioning cycles and the WORKABOUT PRO battery system including chargers requires no user interaction to maintain peak performance To maximize the run time of your batteries co
320. radle in a vehicle there are a number of operator safety issues that require careful attention An improperly mounted cradle may result in one or more of the following operator injury operator visibility obstruction operator distraction and or poor ease of egress for the operator Psion Teklogix strongly recommends that you seek pro fessional mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consideration especially for sepa rately tethered scanners and other devices with loose cables If you are unable to obtain suitable advice contact Psion Teklogix for assistance go to www psionteklogix com service and support him Note also that for better protection the equipment should be mounted inside the vehicle roll cage Pedestal mounts are recommended for all fixed mount locations because they offer optimal operator access In addition for safety reasons only pedestal mounts with fully locking joints should be used in vehicles Always adjust the pedestal for the optimum viewing angle and securely tighten the hex and wing screws The most effective way to mount the vehicle cradle is to use the four 8 32 threaded inserts on the rear of the unit Bolts must not extend more than 10mm 3 8 into the cradle To accommodate the service loop of the connector cable leave a 4 clearance at the bottom of the cradle Leave a 7 minimum clearance at the top of the cradle to allow easy removal
321. rage is necessary e Always try to use a first in first out approach to minimize storage time Lithium Ion batteries age much faster at elevated temperatures Store batteries at tem peratures between 0 C and 20 C Always charge batteries to at least 40 to 60 before storing them Batteries can be damaged by an over discharge phenomenon that occurs when an empty battery is stored for a long period of time such that the cell voltage drops below a lower limit To minimize storage degradation recharge stored batteries to 40 to 60 every 4 or 6 months to prevent over discharge damage A never used Li Ion battery that has been stored for 3 years may have limited or no useful life remaining once put into service Think of batteries as perishable goods Uploading Data in a Docking Station Important Review the documentation provided with the user application installed in your WORKABOUT PRO before performing data uploads The desktop docking station and quad docking station are typically used to upload transac tion data to a server computer when a radio link is not available Note Refer to Chargers And Docking Stations on page 261 for more details The desktop docking station can complete batch uploads to a Client USB connected PC or server An optional 10 100baseT Ethernet module is also available Unlike the desktop docking station the quad docking station supports only TCP IP connec tions to a PC or ser
322. rain or snow Do not place batteries in the charger if they are cold from extended exposure to a freezer or outside temperatures below 10 C 50 F Allow them to warm up to room tempera ture for at least two hours Do not use the charger if after an overnight charge any of the batteries feel warmer than the charger housing The charger should be inspected by qualified service personnel Do not use the charger if any of the batteries or the charger get more than lukewarm The equipment should be inspected by qualified personnel Desktop Docking Station The WORKABOUT PRO can be inserted in a desktop docking station model number WA4003 G2 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 263 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Desktop Docking Station Figure 7 4 Desktop Docking Station Pins Indicates charge status of a spare battery inserted in the rear charge well of the docking station Note The desktop docking charger is shipped with its own user manual It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates 264 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Figure 7 5 Back Of Desktop Docking Station Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Charging A Battery Installed In The WORKABOUT PRO ST TY D S Spare Battery Spare Battery Charge Well NS vS A Lithium Ion batteries Important
323. re Developer s Kit Flex cable interface with robust connector supports scanner serial and imager USB modules One Type II CF Card Slot External Connectors e e e One Tether connection with full RS232 and USB 1 1 functionality One Low Insertion Force LIF docking connector DC Power Jack Power Management e e e e e e Optional 3 7V 3000 mAh High Capacity Battery Pack Optional 3 7V 4000 mAh Super High Capacity Battery Pack Advanced Smart Battery with gas gauge 3 power source options Runs off battery AC power or automotive power supplies Built in charger Rechargeable user replaceable backup battery pack Environmental e Withstands multiple drops from 6 ft 1 8 meters or 26 drops on 12 edges 8 corners 6 faces at 5 ft 1 5 meters to concrete while powered on and configured with accessories such as WiFi radio scanner imager and pistol grip Rain Dust IP65 IEC 60529 Operating Temperature 4 F to 122 F 20 C to 50 C 5 95 RH non condensing Storage Temperature 40 F to 140 F 40 C to 60 C ESD 8kVdc air discharge 4k Vdc contacts Physical Dimensions And Weight e e WORKABOUT PRO C 8 775 in x 2 95 3 94 in x 1 22 1 65 in 223 mm x 75 100 mm x 31 42 mm WORKABOUT PRO S 7 87 in x 2 95 3 94 in x 1 22 1 65 in 200 mm x 75 100 mm x 31 42 mm 290 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications Hand Held Compu
324. rial server enables the Serial Port Profile server a Serial Port can be selected from the drop down menu Keep in mind that when a port is chosen an application must be open connected to the chosen port for a remote device to be able to connect Scanner server enables a Serial Port Profile server and then relays it to the Scanner Service SCS This is used for Bluetooth bar code scanners that operate in client mode SCS opens the server port and handles the scanner input OBEX OPP server enables the Object Push Profile server A warm reset must be performed on the WORKABOUT PRO after a change is made to this option The OPP Server allows other Bluetooth devices to send files to this device 208 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Mode Tab Tap on the checkbox to activate the server the associated port name is displayed beside the server name 6 39 4 Mode Tab Bluetooth Turn on Bluetooth L Discoverable Device Scan Duration C Printer Port Select Port v Turn on Bluetooth allows you to enable or disable the Bluetooth radio Discoverable deter mines whether the WORKABOUT PRO is visible or invisible to other devices Device Scan Duration can be used to controls the duration in which the WORKABOUT PRO scans for other devices The higher the value assigned the greater the scan duration Printer Port allows you to choose a port for the printer Keep in mind that
325. rks The modem keeps searching for another network e No network found A network is not currently available The modem continues searching for a network 230 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 6 44 5 Chapter 6 Settings Tools Menu e Packet data not available The current network does not support packet data e Packet data not allowed The modem is not allowed to use packet data on the current network e g no packet data roaming agreement between network a roaming agreement for voice may still be in place It is also possible that you do not have a subscription for packet data at all The remaining error states are permanent e SIM is missing The SIM card is missing After the SIM has been inserted a reset may be required SIM failure The SIM card is permanently disabled e g because the wrong PUK has been entered too many times A new SIM is needed Modem failure The modem did not respond to commands as expected If a reset does not clear this condi tion the modem may need to be replaced NDIS error An internal software error has occurred If a reset does not clear this condition Psion Tek logix technical support may need to investigate further Tools Menu The Tools menu in the main Wireless WAN dialog box offers some additional advanced setup features WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 231 Chapter 6 Settings Tools Menu 6 44 5 1 A Data Connection Configurat
326. rous variables In almost all cases these predefined presets are sufficient C 2 2 Bar Code Predefined Presets These presets encompass the majority ofthe most popular bar codes and their subtypes The bar code decoding symbology predefined presets define which bar codes can be decoded The bar code decoding camera predefined presets determine how the bar code images are captured C 2 2 1 Bar Code Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets The following presets select groups of similar bar codes for decoding Note It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible Factory Default This preset enables the decoding of frequently used bar codes My Default This preset is synchronized with the Teklogix Scanners applet and contains all the symbolo gies selected using the Teklogix Scanner applet For details on this synchronization see Configuring Symbologies in the Teklogix Imagers Applet on page C 16 All This preset enables the decoding of all bar codes that the imager can decode C 2 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 2 3 Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets Linear This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D symbologies that the imager can decode Linear and PDF417 This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D and PDF symbologies that the imager can decode Matrix This preset enables the decoding of all 2 D symbologies that the i
327. rrnrrrnrnrrr rr rro 80 Settings POPE CO eevee sees co eeeecedecedened ERI A doko EE SOE ERETI REET SEE 82 el penne ent E Sci 82 Entering Ticas 83 410 1 Soft KENDO di Data 83 410 2 The Transcriber 2s222 220544 ch0000 ad ia 84 4 10 3 Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer 0 ccc cece cence eee rreren 85 Chapter 5 Programs 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 3 9 5 6 dl PLORTAMS AA RIA bata 89 A Pease eer E EEEE EEEE VIINAA ee aseeses vee Cees 89 ACV ES YMICB sas O VENEESEEN 89 5 3 1 Synchronization 2 08 cccgcdeccgedee cirie Gabbe tases teed aldea E EEEN 90 Calculator a sie ROS A a 90 ftice Mobile 2 22 633 06 ios 90 Sel Excel Moble ni 88 Aa Heer ee Rend een Des 90 SS Ze OneNote Mobiles a oo 92 525 3 Word Mobles 98 5 5 4 PowerPoint Mobile 00 ce cece ccc eee en tne crac 100 Demo Ma 100 Fl Bh 0 0 rc ena EEEE EEEE ET T EEE TE 101 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual iii Contents 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 21 Getting Started es O es 101 PESI Imager Demo ry ii eiii 101 temet SHIN tds 102 5 10 1 Creating an Internet Connection ocooocooccccroccrcnnccrnrrnnrrrrnrrrnnns 102 5 10 2 Using Internet SAM nidad 102 DA RR AAN 103 So 11 1 Creating a Note EEEE sacar ecquedsccedeceeees voce lasses seis sh ellos 104 5 11 2 Converting Handwritten Notes to Text 0 c cece cece eee e eee ee ee eees 104 5 1 1 3 Renamimg a Not A a A eee 106 5 LAs Rec
328. rt gt Programs gt Calculator displays a standard calculator with regular functions Use your stylus to tap on the calculator buttons Office Mobile E il Offica Mobile This icon contains the following abridged Microsoft programs Excel Mobile OneNote Mobile PowerPoint Mobile and Word Mobile Keep in mind that if Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu this icon will not be displayed in the Programs window Excel Mobile Excel Mobile Excel Mobile is an abridged version of Microsoft Excel an electronic spreadsheet program If you re familiar the Excel application on your PC you be able to navigate Excel Mobile WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 5 5 1 1 Chapter 5 Programs Excel Mobile In addition to providing the tools to manipulate text and numeric values like statistics per centages using formulas that perform calculations and so on this program can also include graphics such as pie charts Excel Mobile allows you to copy Excel workbooks from your PC onto your WORKABOUT PRO and update them while you re away from your desk Tap on Start gt Programs gt Office Mobile gt Excel Mobile If Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu tap on Start gt Office Mobile and then tap on Excel Mobile e Ifa list of workbooks is displayed rather than a new sheet you ll need to create a new workbook To create a workbook In Excel Mobile tap the Menu gt File gt
329. rtain third party VPN Virtual Private Network 232 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual A Chapter 6 Settings Tools Menu clients are used that do not work correctly otherwise The default setting is disabled unchecked Note The connection setup takes longer through the virtual serial port Enable Automatic Configuration In most cases the data connection is configured automatically and no user interaction is re quired This is true even if multiple SIM cards from different operators are used with the same device The connection parameters are adjusted automatically when a new SIM card is detected this may require a reset The connection parameters are retrieved from a database Manual configuration should be necessary only if e One or more parameters in the database are incorrect or a new operator is not yet in the database The database should be corrected for subsequent software releases An operator has assigned individual packet data user names and passwords e A very large site has their own APN Such connections always have to be configured manually A customer has subscribed for a static IP address By definition this must be configured manually Important For CDMA IXRTT automatic configuration is not available connections must be configured manually Under APN the packet service access number must be entered typically 777 In the following section all the parameters th
330. rter exposure time so as to freeze motion Low light near This preset is designed for dark conditions it uses a longer exposure time and includes the flash Using The Teklogix Imagers Applet Configuring The Image Capture Presets To configure the image capture presets open the dialog box as follows e Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab Tap on the Teklogix Imagers icon and if it s not already selected tap on the Imaging tab C 4 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 3 2 6 3 3 C 3 4 Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Selecting A Camera The following screen is displayed Figure C 1 Imaging Tab PTS a 42 ok Camera Presets as hl R Read W Write A Active aio Barcoding ler Taatone COP This window lists all the presets both predefined and custom Presets are identified as follows e Predefined presets are marked as read only e Custom presets are marked as read and write One preset either predefined or custom is marked as active Selecting A Camera If your WORKABOUT has more than one built in camera one camera must be selected for configuration To select a camera Tap on the Camera Presets drop down menu to view the camera options e Choose a camera specifically Front Imager which is located at the top of the unit Setting The Active Preset An active preset has an A to the right in Figure C 1 on page C 5 the active preset is Low l
331. ructions about this option tap on Start gt Help WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual SETTINGS 6 USOS a a a BS A a ai 123 6 2 Personal Settings ee 123 6 3 App Launch Keys sia a ae alee es Ba ik we ee 124 OA Buttons ICON angari g 404 A a as Geer eR ce 126 6 4 1 Up Down Control iani s a a e 126 64 2 One Shots sh eo be we ek Be alee a BS Aa ee a wa a 127 6 4 3 Keyboard Macro Keys oaa e 128 6 4 4 Unicode Mapping 2 130 6 4 5 Scancode Remapping a 131 6 4 6 Lock Sequence 134 A E i be Hie te 8 We ace Yk eee 135 6 5 1 Input Method Tab 2 o ea 135 6 5 1 1 Word Completion 139 6 5 2 Options Additional Choices 2 2 e 139 OEO menina de Boek Et wae So aa Ty masa Guibas bf Melee 140 6 7 Menus A AS A el Woke BO Bae aS We eee we 141 6 71 Start Menu Tabo a hac Ge ee Be Ee as 141 O SIMICTOPHONE en aae Sk Bd oh eee EE AR a YN a i et 142 6 9 Owner Informations vicio eld ah ewe ae eM WE we wo 143 6 10 Phone Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional Only 4 143 6 11 Sound amp Notifications 0 ee 143 GTC SOURIS epa n ee eh den alo ee Pea PR eae Oe 144 6 11 2 Notfications 2 0 4086 we Sk aa ee BBO BR E 144 6 12 Today cre ii ed i a a e a a 145 6 12 Appearance s ie a ee AA ee ee eS 145 6 122 tems 2 5 4 elles dd e a ETs 145 6 13 System Tab Settings ii IS RA oh aes eae E 146 GTA ADO ad E A A md SP R
332. ry wxyz 0 Care Hide Keypad Manu AN Note You can also press the Send button on the WORKABOUT PRO keyboard to display the phone keypad providing it s been activated The Send button is located on the TAB key just below the hand held display to send the phone number it is labelled with a green telephone receiver icon Refer to Send amp End Phone Calls Using the Phone Keypad on page 20 for details 20 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 2 8 1 2 2 8 1 3 2 8 1 4 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout The Phone Keypad To send a number e Use the phone keypad to enter the phone number and tap on Send to dial the phone number To end a phone call Tap on End key on the phone keypad Note You can also tap on the End key on the physical keyboard of the WORKABOUT PRO to end the call providing this key has been activated The End key is mapped to the ESC key just below the hand held display and is labelled with a red phone receiver Refer to Send amp End Calls Using the WORKABOUT PRO Keyboard on page 24 for details Make a Conference Call To set up a conference call between yourself and two or more other parties Inthe phone keypad enter the first phone number Tap on the Send button e While you are connected to the first number tap on Menu gt Hold e Enter the second number Tap on Send e Tap on Menu gt Conference e To add another party tap on Menu gt Hold enter the
333. s Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A UPC E To change a setting press space or double click Barcodes Opions renace Pore D 2 1 Options Decoded Internal Scanner Dot Time msec The value selected for Dot Time msec determines in milliseconds how long the target ing dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value of 0 msec 200 msec or 400 msec A value of 0 zero disables the target dot Aim Duration This parameter determines the total time the aiming pattern appears before the scanner laser begins sweeping When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 30 0 to 3 sec A value of 0 zero disables the aiming dot Laser On Time The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 5 and 99 each number representing 0 1 D 2 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 2 2 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Advanced Options Decoded Internal Advanced Options Decoded Internal Continuous Scan Mode Setting this parameter to on keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the scanner button is pressed and held dow
334. s Tools Menu Note Keep in mind that some network operators do not allow the SIM PIN to be disabled A new PIN must consist of 4 to 8 numeric digits The Require PIN on resume checkbox is independent of the aforementioned settings By de fault this checkbox is unchecked While the checkbox remains unchecked any PIN entered on startup or through the Security Configuration dialog box and submitted successfully to the modem is stored in memory for as long as the device is not rebooted This stored PIN is then used without further user interaction whenever the modem requires a PIN such as resume after suspend or modem removal The stored PIN is also automatically entered in the Current PIN text box whenever the Security Configuration dialog box is called up If unauthorized access to the device is a concern the Require PIN on resume checkbox should be checked In this case you will be prompted whenever a PIN is required and the PIN is not stored 6 44 5 3 Network Configuration AN Note Network configuration is not available with CDMA modems In the main Wireless WAN screen Tap on the Tools menu and choose Network By default the GSM radio modem automatically chooses from the available and allowed networks allowed networks are the home network and all other networks with which the home network has a roaming agreement You may find there are some situations in which you want to override this default behaviour For example you may wa
335. s 308 scanner module SE 955 specs 308 scanner options 280 Scanner Settings 174 scanning Aim Duration D 2 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual aiming target dot duration D 2 appending characters 176 Bad Scan Beep 1 76 bar code setting 174 check digit D 15 30 Check Digits MSI Plessey D 5 30 Check Digit Verification D 8 Check Digit Verification I 2 of 5 D 16 Click Data appending data 176 Click Time 775 CLSI Editing D 4 Codabar D 4 Code 128 D 9 23 D 45 Code 128 Emulation D 9 Code 32 Prefix D 7 Code 39 D 6 22 D 44 Code 93 D 13 Composite D 18 D 56 Conv UPC E To UPC A D 2 Conv UPC E1 To UPC A D 2 Convert To Code 32 D 7 Convert To EAN 13 D 16 Data Handling code page 177 Decoded internal D 2 Decoded Intermec ISCP D 42 Decode Perf Level D 8 D 10 Decode Performance D 8 D 10 Delete Char Set ECIs D 6 Discrete 2 of 5 D 16 Dot Time D 2 double click 175 EAN 8 Zero Extend D 0 ECI Decoder D 6 Enable Bookland D 2 Enable CC AB D 18 D 56 Enable CC C D 18 D 56 Enable RSS Expanded D 7 Enable RSS Limited D 7 Enable RSS 14 D 17 Enable TLC 39 D 8 35 Full ASCII D 8 23 Good Scan Beep 1 76 Laser On Time D 2 D 20 D 43 Linear Decode D 13 Linear Transmission only Decoded Composite D 57 Linear Transmission only TLC 39 D 57 Micro PDF 417 D 19 Index model numbers 308 NOTIS Editing D 4 Options tab 175 PDF 417 D 18 Prefix D 6 RSS Co
336. s and disconnect the mains power cable e Wait at least 20 seconds and then plug the cable in again If any of the charge well LEDs continue to flash red the charger is defective and requires service If all indicators are flashing red there is a power supply problem and the charger requires service 7 22 3 Power LED Does Not Light Up e Remove all batteries and unplug the charger e Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power e Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger and check it for damage e Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet If the power LED still does not light up Unplug the mains cable and check the fuse at the rear of the charger If the fuse appears to be intact the charger requires service 7 22 4 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed e Remove the battery and clean the contacts on the battery and the charge well 272 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Quad Docking Station WA4204 G2 WA4304 G2 e Reinstall the battery and check that it is fully seated in the charger well Inspect the charge well contacts for damage are they bent flattened twisted or broken Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger well e Reconnect the mains power cable and check that the charger well indicator flashes at power up 7 23 Quad Docking Station WA4204 G2 amp WA4304 G2
337. s instructed to do so by your network administrator Ifnecessary use a network cable to connect the network card to your network Refer to the documentation shipped with your network card for details e To activate the connection launch the desired program e g Internet Explorer The WORKABOUT PRO will connect automatically WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 221 Chapter 6 Settings Changing Network Card Settings 6 42 4 Changing Network Card Settings e If you use your network card in two locations like work and home you ll need to change the network to which the network card connects Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections gt Network Cards In the Configure Network Adapters dialog box tap on the drop down menu below My network card connects to choose either The Internet or Work 6 42 5 VPN Connection Setup A VPN connection provides a secure connection to servers through the Internet Before you begin you need the following information from your network administrator password domain name TCP IP settings and a host name or IP address of the VPN server e e e Tap on Start gt Settings Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon Under My Work Network tap on Add a new VPN server connection In the Name field type a name for this connection In Host name IP type the VPN server name or IP address Tap on the VPN type radio button next to the type of authentication
338. s parameter to on to enable Code 93 or off to disable it Set Length L1 And Set Length L2 Lengths for Code 93 can be set for Any length Length within a range One discrete length or Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled Set Code Lengths where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner Choosing One discrete length allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length Choosing Two discrete lengths allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths Length within a range allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from 4 to 55 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 13 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Codabar D 2 13 Codabar Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Codabar or off to disable it Set Length L1 And Set Length L2 Lengths for Codabar can be set for Any length Length within a range One discrete length or Two discrete lengths The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters including check digit s Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box l
339. sabled ECI Decoder Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to interpret any Extended Channel Interpre tations ECIs supported by the scanner This parameter has no effect on symbols that were not encoded using ECIs If this parameter is set to off and a symbol that was encoded using an ECI escape is scanned the scanner transmits the ECI escape followed by the uninterpreted data D 2 5 Code 39 Enabled Setting this parameter to on enables Code 39 Enable Trioptic Code 39 nN Note Trioptic Code 39 and Full ASCII should not be enabled simultaneously The scanner does not automatically discriminate between these two symbologies Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters Setting this parameter to on allows this type of symbology to be recognized D 6 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 39 Convert To Code 32 EN Note Code 39 must be enabled in order for this parameter to function Setting this parameter to on allows the scanner to convert the bar code from Code 39 to Code 32 Code 32 Prefix EN Note Convert to Code 32 must be enabled in order for this parameter to function When this parameter is enabled the prefix character A is added to all Code 32 bar codes Set Length L1 And Set Length L2 Lengths for Code 39 can be set for Any length Length within a range One discrete length or
340. security of data across the wireless LAN Refer to EAP Credentials on page A 6 and SCU Security Capabilities on page A 4 for details about these settings A 3 1 SCU Security Capabilities The SCU provides integrated security to protect transmitted data as well as the hand held computer and wireless WAN infrastructure that transmit and receive data A 4 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Appendix A Summit Client Utility SCU SCU Security Capabilities A foundational element of the IEEE 802 11i WLAN security standard is IEEE 802 1X and a critical application on a mobile device is an 802 1 X supplicant This supplicant provides an interface between the radio and the operating system and supports the authentication and en cryption elements required for 802 111 also known as Wi Fi Protected Access 2 WPA2 as well as predecessors such as WPA and WEP Summit software includes an integrated suppli cant that supports a broad range of security capabilities including e 802 1X authentication using pre shared keys or an EAP type required for WPA2 and WPA e Data encryption and decryption using WPA2 AES WPA TKIP or WEP Common EAP types include EAP TLS Uses the same technology as a follow on to Secure Socket Layer SSL It provides strong security but relies on client certificates for user authentication PEAP Provides secure user authentication by using a TLS tunnel to encrypt EAP traf fic T
341. serve power This tab determines the behaviour of the backlight when the hand held is using external rather than battery power A Important Refer to Battery Power on page 148 for details 6 16 3 Intensity Backlight Warning Setting intensity level high while on battery power will substantially reduce battery life Battery Power External Power Intensity Adjust power settings to conserve power This tab is used to adjust the light intensity of the display backlight and the keyboard back light Sliding the bar to the left lowers the light intensity and sliding it to the right raises the intensity WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 149 Chapter 6 Settings Certificates 6 17 Certificates Tap on Start gt Settings and then tap on the System tab Tap on the Certificates icon Certificates A public key is transmitted as part of a certificate The certificates listed in the Certificates tabs ensure that the submitted public key is in fact the public key that belongs to the sub mitter The hand held checks that the certificate has been digitally signed by a certification authority that the hand held explicitly trusts Your WORKABOUT PRO has certificates already preinstalled in the unit Personal certif icates establish your identity intermediate certificates as the name suggests identifies intermediate certification authorities and root certificates establish
342. server assigns IP addresses dynamically you will not need to change these settings Advanced Use server assigned addresses O Use specific server address Servers requiring assigned IP addresses may also need a way to map computer names to IP addresses The WORKABOUT PRO supports a variety of name resolution options DNS Alt DNS WINS and Alt WINS Your ISP or network administrator can determine which name resolution you need and can also provide the server address In addition you will want to ask if alternate addresses are available An alternate address may allow you to connect when the primary server is not available 218 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Wireless Manager Icon 6 42 Wireless Manager Icon While you can access network card settings through the Wi Fi icon and you can access Blu etooth settings through the Bluetooth icon and for units that support it GSM GPRS connections the Wireless Manager icon acts as a connection manager providing access to all these types of network connections AN Important The Wireless Manager option provides detailed Help files to assist you in setting up your hand held Help is available from the Connections tab not from within the Wireless Manager dialog box To access Wireless Manager help files tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections tab Tap on Start gt Settings gt Help Tap on Start gt
343. skbar displays the currently selected character To access an alpha character first press the FN ORANGE key and then press the numeric key above which the alpha character you want to type is printed Choosing a Single Alpha Character The examples below illustrate how to access A B and C all of which are printed in orange characters above the numeric key 2 Important The letters you choose appear in the softkey bar providing a visual indica tor of which letter will be displayed on the screen To choose the letter a e Press the FN ORANGE key and press the numeric key 2 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 45 Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO Numeric Keyboard Accessing Alpha Keys 3 4 6 2 3 4 6 3 A Note To choose the second third or fourth alpha character assigned to a numeric key you may want to lock the FN ORANGE key on By default the FN ORANGE key is locked on when pressed once However depending on how your unit is set up in the One Shots tab you may find that you need to press the FN ORANGE key twice to lock it on Refer to One Shots on page 127 for details To choose the second letter in the sequence in this example the letter b Lock the FN ORANGE key on A shift state indicator icon in the softkey bar repre sents the orange key with a black frame around it to indicate that this key is locked on e Press numeric key 2 t
344. smitted with the data Country code and System Char both the country code 0 for USA and system character are WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 11 Appendix D Bar Code Settings UPC EAN Shared Settings transmitted with the data or None no preamble is transmitted The lead in characters are considered part of the symbol Conv UPC E To UPC A This parameter converts UPC E zero suppressed decoded data to UPC A format before transmission After conversion data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A pro gramming selections e g Preamble Check Digit Conv UPC E1 To UPC A This parameter converts UPC E1 zero suppressed decoded data to UPC A format before transmission After conversion data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A pro gramming selections e g Preamble Check Digit Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 2 11 UPC EAN Shared Settings The parameters you set here are a shared across all available UPC and EAN bar codes Enable Bookland EAN Setting this parameter to on allows your scanner to recognize Bookland EAN bar codes Supplementals Supplementals are additionally appended characters 2 or 5 Double tapping this parameter displays a list of options If Ignore is chosen UPC EAN is decoded and the supplemental characters are ignored If Decode is chosen UPC EAN symbols are decoded with supplementals Autodiscrimi
345. stal Australian Check Digit If enabled the check digit will be transmitted at the end of the scanned data Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 35 Postal Australian Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal Australian Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 36 Postal Canadian Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal Canadian Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 37 Postal China Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Postal China D 40 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Appendix D Bar Code Settings Postal Japanese Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters i e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 2 to 80 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 38 Postal Japanese Enabled Set this parameter to o
346. stem tab followed by the Backlight icon allows you to deter mine the power properties of the WORKABOUT PRO WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 147 Chapter 6 Settings Battery Power 6 16 1 Battery Power wt te a B Backlight Settings 4 q 7 29 bk Backlight Warning Using backlight while on battery power will substantially reduce battery life Turn off backlight if Mlsevice is not used for 30 sec_v Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or the screen is tapped Battery Power Intensity E Adjust power settings to conserve power E This tab allows you to tailor the WORKABOUT PRO backlight behaviour to best preserve battery life To define how long the backlight should stay on when the WORKABOUT PRO is not in use tap in the checkbox to the left of Turn off backlight if device is not used for Tap on the drop down menu and choose the number of seconds or minutes the back light will remain on when the hand held is idle To Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or the screen is tapped tap in the checkbox to the left of this option 148 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 6 16 2 External Power Chapter 6 Settings External Power Settings er 47 30 bk Turn off backlight if gt device is not used for Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or the screen is tapped Adjust power settings to con
347. t Specifications Description Condition Test Result Open circuit voltage After standard charge measure within 24 hours 4 15V or more Internal Resistance After standard charge measure within 24 hours 200 mo max Capacity 1 After standard charge measure time taken for a fast discharge 110 minutes or more Charge Discharge Cycle After repeating standard charge and fast discharge measure the fast dis charge time after 300 discharge cycles 90 minutes or more Capacity 2 After standard charge measure the time taken for a standard discharge 500 minutes or more Over Discharge After standard charge apply a standard discharge followed by a standby dis charge Then measure capacity after carrying out standard charge and then a fast discharge 110 minutes or more Self discharge After a standard charge keep battery at 25 C for 30 days Measure the time taken for a fast discharge 100 mins or more 298 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 8 Specifications High Capacity Model WA3006 Description Temperature Condition Perform a standard charge and fast dis charge at 0 C 25 C and 40 C and measured the time taken for a fast dis charge at 25 C Test Result 100 mins 0 C 110 mins 23 C 105 mins 40 C Temp Humidity Cycle After standard charge carry out 5 cycles of the following 65 C
348. t contain these characters Setting this parameter to off strips the start and stop characters from this bar code Check Char When this parameter is set to Validate only the integrity of a Code 39 symbol is checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms If Check Char is set to Validate and Transmit the check character is validated and trans mitted with the data Setting this parameter to None disables this function Concatenation Codabar supports symbol concatenation When you enable Concatenation the imager looks for a Codabar symbol with a D start character that is adjacent to a symbol with a D stop character In this case the two messages are concatenated into one with the D characters omitted Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths 2 to 60 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 28 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Appendix D Bar Code Settings MSI Plessey D 3 13 MSI Plessey D 3 14 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable MSI Enable Plessey Set this parameter to on to enable Plessey Check Ch
349. t setting like the sample screen following is displayed ne PTS Imager Settim Y qe d ok Enter value from 0 to 1000 200 msec Type a value in the field provided Fora parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click on the parameter Either method toggles between the two available values When you ve completed your edits tap on OK The parameter list is displayed the new value for the changed parameter is shown Tap on OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes C 3 7 Removing A Custom Preset Highlight the custom preset you want to delete and tap on the Remove button A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset Tap on Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation C 4 Configuring The Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets To configure the bar code decoding camera presets Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab Tap on the Barcoding tab C 8 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 4 1 C 4 2 Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Selecting A Camera Figure C 2 Bar Code Presets PTS Imager Settin Y qe H4 ok Camera Presets Default Low light Low power Glossy surface View Ada F Activate Barcode Presets My Default Factory Default Activate R Read W Write A Active Barcodino
350. ta bits included in each asynchronous data byte Most devices use 8 bit data bytes Double tapping on this option displays a pop up window in which you can choose either 7 or 8 data bits Parity This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the tether port Double tapping on this option displays a pop up window in which you can choose the appropriate Parity Scanner Settings Yi ok Stop Bits This parameter specifies the number of stop bits 7 1 5 2 used for asynchronous communication Trigger On Sequence And Trigger Off Sequence If a SICK scanner connected to the WORKABOUT PRO port requires a serial stream of data bytes to trigger the scanner on and another to trigger the scanner off the Trigger On Se quence and Trigger Off Sequence parameters allow you to define these serial streams WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 185 Chapter 6 Settings Total Recall 6 34 186 Double tapping on Trigger On Sequence or Trigger Off Sequence displays a screen with a hex array of 10 elements Scanner Settings gt TA x a 20 e0 00 J oo oo 20 foo These parameters work in conjunction with Manage Triggers sending on and off data streams to the trigger module you assigned For example supposed you launch Manage Triggers and choose Decoded Scanner as the module to trigger Next you assign a trigger key for this example
351. talled 272 7 23 Quad Docking Station WA4204 G2 amp WA4304 G2 0 0 0 0 273 7 23 1 Quad Docking Station Setup 273 R232 Quad Indicators 20 a a E A RA 274 7 23 3 Inserting A WORKABOUT In The Quad Docking Station 274 7 23 4 Network Access o o e 274 7 23 4 1 Network Addressing ee 274 7 23 5 Battery Charging LED Behaviour o o o o 275 7 23 6 Troubleshooting e 275 7 23 6 1 Network Link Unsuccessful 275 7 23 6 2 Hand Held LED Does Not Light When Docked 275 724 The Vehicle Cradle coi aks hee ee hel Fa ey ee Roe A e ech 276 7 24 1 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations 276 7 25 Mounting Template 2 ee 277 7 26 Wiring Guidelines ii Meare ee hd Bak a en oe Pw a Soe VA ein 277 7 27 Using The Vehicle Cradle ee ee 277 7 28 Maintaining The Vehicle Cradle 2 2 ee 277 7 29 Powered Cradle Installation In High Voltage Vehicles 278 7 30 Powered Vehicle Cradle Installation o o o o ooo 278 7 30 1 Wiring Vehicle Power To The Cradle o o 278 Tol The Port Replicator punto A di AA ew 279 7 32 Scanners And IMagers e 280 246 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 7 32 1 Scanning Techniques e 280 7 32 2 Troubleshooting ee 281 7 32 3 Opera
352. talled in your WORKABOUT PRO WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Connections Tab Tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections tab to display your connection options 02 Connections Navigation Bar Tap on these connectivity hotkeys to display Notification Bubbles Notification Bubble al LA Bluetooth Connection Properties Domain Network Enroll Cards a USB to PC Wireless Wireless Manager Statistics O ml Wireless Wireless Manager Statistics Connections Navigation Bar Connectivity Hotkeys Some of the connectivity icons in the Navigation Bar along the top of the screen are hotkeys that offer shortcuts to connection setups Tapping on a hotkey displays a bubble that pro vides information about your connections and provides a shortcut to the Wireless Manager applet where you can set up your connections WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 199 Chapter 6 Settings Connections Tab 200 Automatic Network Detection If a wireless network is available when you switch on your unit a notification bubble may appear letting you know which networks have been found You can choose a network from here Q oF 4 11 16 ok Clock amp Alarms Home GMT 8 Pacific US y 11 16 29AM Jaj 10 12 2006 y Visiting NARA ME Tr New Network Detected LTK Security enabled network connects me to fe me Internet or work vi
353. tap on the End Task softkey in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen End All Tasks To shut down all applications tap on the Menu softkey and choose End All Tasks Switch To To make an application listed in this screen active highlight the application and tap on Menu gt Switch To For additional information about this applet refer to Task Manager on page 171 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 81 Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Settings 4 8 Settings Tap Start gt Settings to display the setting options for your hand held Figure 4 4 Settings Icons Menus Microphone k Phone Sounds amp Notifications Toda Personal Connections Settings are divided into three tabs Personal System and Connections Refer to Chapter 6 Settings for details about the options available to you 4 9 Help Tapping on the Start gt Help displays a screen of help topics that are content specific if for example the Today screen is displayed and you tap on Start gt Help the help screen will provide topics about the Today screen You can perform a help content search by tapping on the Contents or Search softkeys Keep in mind that help is not always available How do I Customize the Today screen Add a custom background image 82 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 4 10 1 Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Entering Text Entering Text Note
354. tap on Next e Tap on Finish to begin the partnership between the WORKABOUT PRO and the PC Now you ll be able to pass notes back and forth between your PC and hand held Creating A Note e If Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu tap on Start gt Office Mobile gt OneNote Mobile icon WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 93 Chapter 5 Programs OneNote Mobile If this is not the case tap on Start gt Programs gt Office Mobile icon Tap on the OneNote Mobile icon OneNote Mobile eT ES Tap on New to create a note page Begin typing 5 OneNote Mobile Gog Y e Robot Production Meeting Prototype attached When you complete your note tap on Done Note Remember that you can tap on the Menu softkey to Undo typing add Formats Bold Italic Underline Strikethrough include Lists Numbered Bulleted Clear 94 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 5 Programs OneNote Mobile Using the OneNote Menu Tapping on Menu displays a list of options to help you work with the OneNote Mobile applet 5 OneNote Mobile GO 4 Y lt ok Robot Production Meeting Format List Take Picture Insert Picture Insert Recording Undo Redo Cut Copy and Paste These commands operate in the same way as they do in any Windows Office application Format Tapping on this command lists the formatting options you can apply to your note Bold Italic Underline Stri
355. te Figure 7 1 e J2 Position the lower end of the new back plate next to the back opening of the unit Insert the flex cable from the end cap into J2 on the interface board The contacts on the flex cable face towards the interface board Figure 7 2 Latch the connector WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories The Trigger Back Plate Kit With Flush Mount Pistol Grip Flip the back plate upwards Insert the flex cable from the WORKABOUT PRO main logic board into J1 on the interface board The contacts on the flex cable face towards the interface board e Latch the connectors e Cut the Kapton tape square provided in two equal pieces e Remove the Kapton tape from the release liner Apply one piece over the end of the flex cable and the imager s flex connector Apply the other piece over the other end of the flex cable and the back plate flex connector as shown in Figure 7 1 This secures the flex cable at both ends Turn the back plate over e Fasten the new back plate onto the WORKABOUT PRO using the supplied screws PN 9009770 e Switch on the internal power switch in the battery compartment Insert the battery and install the battery compartment cover WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 255 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories The Trigger Back Plate Kit With Flush Mount Pisto
356. ter 6 Settings Utilities 6 20 3 Utilities 6 21 E Dr Debug Tr File prefix netlog File size 500000 NetLog is stopped se sep Utilities Two utilities are available NetLog and RilLog The NetLog utility is used to log network traffic The RilLog utility captures Radio Interface Layer RIL debug outputs When you tap on the Start button debug data is collected so that if necessary it can be forwarded to a Psion Teklogix technician for evaluation Encryption This option allows you to encrypt the data on your storage card Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab gt Encryption icon Encryption E Settings er Y E ok O Encrypt files when placed on a storage card Encrypted files can be read only by this device WARNING Encrypted files cannot be recovered after hard reset or clearing storage To help prevent data loss back up data from storage cards to another location WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 155 Chapter 6 Settings Error Reporting 6 22 Error Reporting Error Reporting allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts A Error Reporting 4 4 8 41 bk Error Reporting To help Microsoft improve the products you use your device can collect information on software operation for later reporting in the event of a serious error Reporting this information when errors occur is comp
357. ter Specifications e Weight w o battery pack WORKABOUT PRO C 1 Ibs 455 g WORKABOUT PRO S 859 Ibs 390 g Power Accessories AC power supply charge amp operate hand held Automotive power supply charge amp operate hand held Single and Quad slot battery pack chargers e Powered cradle for vehicle mount applications Communication Accessories e Quad Dock 4 site with 10 100 BaseT Ethernet and charge functions e Desktop Docking Station charges hand held amp spare battery provides USB1 1 host and device ports and supports optional plug on expansion modules supporting 10 100 BaseT Ethernet or RS232 connections e USB cable supports Active Sync without requiring a docking station Optional End Caps supporting RS232 TTL and IrDA Carrying Accessories e Hand strap pistol grip with trigger holster and various protective carrying cases and pouches Approvals e Safety CSA UL60950 1 IEC 60950 1 EN60950 1 EMC FCC Part 15 Class B EN 55022 EN 55024 EN 301 489 e Laser TEC 60825 1 Class 2 FDA 21 CFR 1040 10 1040 11 Class II Bluetooth class II V 2 0 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 291 Chapter 8 Specifications Radio Specifications RF Bluetooth and 802 11b g EN300 328 Part 15 247 GSM GPRS EN301 511 EN50360 361 NAPRDO03 3GPP51 010 FCC Parts 22 amp 24 Industry Canada RSS 132 amp 133 e In Vehicle Cradle e Mark 8 2 Radio Specifications
358. th Bluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended for Personal Area Networks PAN The technology is based on a short range radio link that operates in the ISM band at 2 4 GHz When two Bluetooth equipped devices come within range of each other they can establish a connection Because Bluetooth utilizes a radio based link it does not require a line of sight connection in order to communicate WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 201 Chapter 6 Settings Paired Tab RN Note The Bluetooth radio uses an internal antenna 6 39 1 Turning the Bluetooth Radio On Before pairing a headset or any other Bluetooth device with your WORKABOUT PRO make certain that the Bluetooth device power is enabled and that the radio is switched on it is enabled by default If for some reason it has been disabled Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab and then tap on the Power icon to display the Power dialog box e Tap on the Built in Devices tab and tap in the checkbox next to Enable Bluetooth e Next tap on Start gt Settings gt Connections tab gt Bluetooth icon Tap on the Mode tab and check Turn on Bluetooth Tap OK Turn your Bluetooth device on and place it within a few feet of your WORKABOUT PRO e Ifneeded set your Bluetooth device to visible discoverable so that the hand held can detect it and establish a connection Paired Tab This tab lists all pa
359. the Terminal Services Client program to log onto a desktop PC that is also running Terminal Services and then you can use any program on your PC including Microsoft Word rather than Word Mobile Refer to Remote Desktop Mobile on page 114 for details PowerPoint Mobile PowerPoint Mobile PowerPoint Mobile works just like the desktop version that may be installed on your PC To launch this program on your hand held e Tap on Start gt Programs gt Office Mobile gt PowerPoint Mobile If Office Mobile is listed in your Start menu tap on Start gt Office Mobile and then tap on PowerPoint Mobile Using PowerPoint Mobile Help If you need help using this application you can review the instructions in the associated help files To display PowerPoint help files e Launch the PowerPoint Mobile program as described above Tap on Start gt Help and review the instructions provided Demo Scanner If a scanner is installed in your unit you can use the Demo Scanner applet to set up and test your scanner 1234 Damo Scanner Tap on Start gt Programs gt Demo Scanner icon A Demo Scanner dialog box is displayed 100 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 5 Programs File Explorer Tap on the Settings button to display the Scanner Settings dialog box Use this dialog box to tailor the scanner settings for your hand held Tap on the Scan button to test the scanner AN Imp
360. the field labelled Scancode Note The Label field displays the default function of the scancode you are remapping Virtual Key Function And Macro The radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box allow you to define to what the scan code will be remapped to Virtual Key Function or Macro When Virtual Key is selected you can choose to force SHIFT to be on or off when the virtual key is sent If No Force is selected the shift state is dependent on whether the shift state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent When Function is selected a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box When Macro is selected the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialog box e Choose Virtual Key gt Function or Macro e Choose a function from the Function list and tap on OK Editing A Scancode Remap Inthe Scancode Remapping tab tap on the remap you want to edit Tap on the Edit button and make the appropriate changes Tap on OK to save your changes WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 133 Chapter 6 Settings Lock Sequence Removing A Remap Inthe Scancode Remapping tab highlight the scancode you want to delete and tap on the Remove button Tap on OK 6 4 6 Lock Sequence The Lock Sequence tab allows you to lock the hand held keyboard to prevent keys from being pressed accidentally when for example the unit is inserted in a holster 4 46 5 05 bk Buttons
361. the manufacturer s instructions to place the remote device in pairing mode e Choose the Devices tab and Scan for devices in your area e When the scan is complete tap on the device to which you want to pair In the pop up Device menu tap on Pair An Authentication dialog box is displayed Bluetooth Authentication Enter a passcode to establish a secure connection To proceed without authentication press Next Cancel Next Ifthe remote device has authentication enabled type the PIN in this dialog box To proceed without authentication tap on Next 1 Y y Note If a remote device has authentication enabled and you ve skipped the authentication process a pop up screen will ask if you want to allow the remote device to connect to the WORKABOUT PRO Tap on Yes and type the PIN When authentication is com plete tap on Done 206 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Device Tab After entering the device PIN the Services dialog appears with a list of services available for that device Bluetooth er x 4 ok Device Name TORPSG 011 Select service for pairing e Click in the checkbox to the left of the service to activate it e Click on Done Note If you choose a service requiring additional information a dialog box is automati cally displayed where further details can be completed The sample dialog box below is an example of a service requiri
362. the scanner remains active following a successful decode The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned a successful decode restores normal blinking When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec 1 min 2 min or 3 min Note This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and the WORKABOUT is mounted in a fixed position otherwise Low Power Timeout is not used Add AIM ID Prefix The AJM ID Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility is an international bar code identifier When this parameter is enabled the AZM JD is inserted at the beginning of the decoded bar code Prefix Exception1 2 And 3 This parameter works in conjunction with the AJM ID parameter When AJM ID is enabled an AIM ID prefix 1s added to every bar code The Prefix Exception parameter allows you to switch off AIM ID for up to three bar codes Double tapping on Prefix Exception 1 Prefix Exception 2 or Prefix Exception 3 displays a list of bar codes Scanner Settings t Yi ok Prefix Exception 1 When a bar code in this list is highlighted an AJM ID prefix is not added to the selected bar code For a description of AIM ID refer to Add AIM ID Prefix on page D 44 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 21 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Code 39 Conversely if you only have two or three bar
363. thium Ion battery packs e High Capacity Model WA3006 Super High Capacity Model WA3010 In addition to the main battery the hand held is equipped with a replaceable rechargeable Lithium Ion backup battery Secure Battery Cover While the standard battery cover latches can be turned using your fingers or using the end of your stylus the optional Secure Battery Cover has special safety latches that can only be locked and unlocked using a special tool Spanner 6 that fits into the dimples on the safety latches Spanner 6 Secure Battery Cover Latches in locked position WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 259 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Secure Battery Cover Insert the spanner into an appropriate handle To unlock the secure battery cover turn the spanner until the dimples are aligned vertically To lock the secure battery cover fit the spanner into the latch dimples and turn the spanner until the dimples are aligned horizontally The battery covers vary to accommodate the type of battery installed and the type of WORKABOUT PRO you are using E ey e o 7527C G2 High Capacity Model No WA3006 PN 1050922 Super High Capacity Model No WA3010 PN 1050924 75278 G2 High Capacity Model No WA3006 PN 1050923 Super High Capacity Model No WA3010 PN 1050925 260 WORKABOUT PRO
364. ting 69 notification 68 sorting 69 Task Manager 171 TCP_IP Settings modem setup 2 8 Teklogix Imagers Settings 173 Teklogix Scanners Settings 174 Telepen 32 D 55 Terminal Services Client 114 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual session disconnecting without ending 114 session ending 1 4 tether port pinout B 2 Text Block Recognizer 85 entering 83 Letter Recognizer 86 soft keyboard entry 83 transcriber using 84 title bar navigation bar 62 TLC 39 35 D 57 Today s Screen desktop screen 6 appearance of 45 Items to appear in screen 145 Total Recall 186 backup profile creating 157 backup profile restoring 790 view profile 797 touch pen using 6 touchscreen calibrating 47 stylus using 6 touch pen using 6 touchscreen aligning calibrating 47 Transcriber Inking 37 quick settings 137 Transcriber using 84 Transcriber Input Methods tab 137 Translations parameters bar codes 177 Transmit Check Digit D 45 D 47 D 48 D 51 D 52 D 53 D 54 Transmit Check Digit 12 of 5 D 16 Transmit Check Digit MSI Plessey D 15 Transmit Code 1D Char D 5 Transmit Number System 25 26 D 48 trigger backplate kit installing 253 trigger mappings 159 Trigger On Sequence 782 185 Trigger Press Type Manage Triggers menu 161 Trioptic Code 39 23 Trioptic Code 39 Enable D 6 troubleshooting tips scanning 281 turning WORKABOUT PRO3 on 2 TweakIT 193 Index U UMTS modem radio 294 Unicode Mappin
365. ting 76 renaming file 76 files amp folders managing 75 find search 115 flight mode disabling the WLAN connection 2 9 Flush Mount Pistol Grip installing 256 FNC1 Conversion D 46 folder copying 76 folder creating 76 folder deleting 76 folder renaming 76 Full Ascii D 44 Full ASCII decoded scanner D 8 23 Function keys 44 G Games 89 Glossy surface Predefined preset C 3 Good Scan Beep 1 76 GPRS bluetooth 210 GPS external 56 Group preset C GSM GPRS 227 238 GSM radio 292 GS1 128 D 45 GS1 128 Composite bar code 34 GS1 128 GS1 US D 9 GS1 128 Identifier D 45 GTIN Compliant D 45 D 49 H hand strap 249 hardware description of 147 headset adjusting volume 142 headsets pairing Bluetooth 52 206 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Help 82 HHP parameters 20 high capacity battery pack WA3006 296 holster soft shell 257 I IATA 2of5 31 Identifier Default preset group C 2 Imager SX5400 specs 315 imager 2D scanner scanning 2D 282 imager model numbers 308 imager options 280 Imager Settings 173 indicators LED functions 49 scanner message 282 283 softkey bar 78 inking settings 137 Input Methods 135 Block Recognizer 85 136 Input Method tab 135 Keyboard Options 136 Letter Recognizer 86 136 soft keyboard 83 Transcriber 4 Transcriber options 137 input modes handwriting 99 typing 99 integrated scanner option 280 Intensity tab backlight 149 Interleaved 2 of 5 D 16 30
366. ting One Dimensional 1D Laser Scanners 281 7 32 4 Operating Two Dimensional 2D ImagersS 282 7 33 Bluetooth Peripherals 2 ee 283 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 247 Carrying Accessories Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices Accessories Carrying Accessories There are a variety of carrying accessories to help the operator work safely and comfortably with the WORKABOUT PRO Carrying Accessory Model Number Hand Strap WA6025 for WORKABOUT PRO C WA6125 for WORKABOUT PRO s Pistol Grip WA6101 G1 for use with all POD scanners imagers including WA9000 G1 WA9005 G1 and WA9003 G1 Slim Pod Pistol Grip WA6102 G1 for use with WA9212 G1 and WA9008 Slim Pod imagers Trigger Back Plate Flush Mount Scanner Kit includes Trigger Back Plate and Flush Mount Pistol Grip WA9300 is a kit that includes a special trigger back plate PN 1052211 and the Flush Mount Pistol Grip WA6103 The Flush Mount Pistol Grip WA6103 supports the following scanner amp imagers WA9009 auto ranging laser scanner includes a trigger back plate specifically designed for this particular imager it must be installed before attaching the Flush Mount Pistol Grip WA9113 G1 WA9103 G1 WA9112 G1 and WA9102 Gl imagers requires that you install the trigger back plate PN 1052211 included in the kit WA9300 before attach ing the Flush Mount Pistol Grip Protective
367. tings One Shots One Shots iy Settings q 3 54 Dk One Shot Modes Alt OneShot X Shift OneShot X Ctrl OneShot X Orange Lock bg Blue Lock X Show modifier key state Up Down Control One Shots Macros aTe The options in this tab allows you to determine how modifier keys on your WORKABOUT PRO behave For each modifier key ALT SHIFT CTRL FN ORANGE and FN BLUE you have the following options in the drop down menu Lock OneShot and OneShot Lock Important Once you ve assigned a One Shot mode to a modifier key you need to tap on the OK button at the top of the tab to activate your selection Lock If you choose Lock from the drop down menu pressing a modifier key once locks it on until you press the modifier key a second time to unlock or turn it off OneShot If you choose OneShot the modifier key remains active only until the next key is pressed OneShot Lock OneShot Lock allows you to combine these functions When you choose this option and you press the modifier key once it remains active only until the next key is pressed If you press the modifier key twice it is locked on remaining active until the modifier key is pressed a third time to turn it off Show Modifier Key State When you enable Show modifier key state a shift state indicator icon fy WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 127 Chapter 6 Settings Keyboard Macro Keys
368. tion e Tap on Next and then in the Services screen click on Done The device you paired is listed in the Pair tab Bluetooth Select device to view options TORPSG 011 Serial lt COMO gt Paved Denice Sever Made bom TT Inserting the SD MMC Card and SIM Card There are two card slots available in the battery compartment of the hand held the lower slot is provided for a SD MMC Secure Digital Multi Media Card and the upper slot is for a SIM Subscriber Identity Module card SD MMC cards provide additional non volatile memory to your hand held SIM cards provide access to the hand held s voice option the Internet and so on Inserting and Removing the Card Switch off the WORKABOUT PRO e Remove the battery cover and the battery A hinged door at the top of the battery compartment protects the connectors This door differs slightly depending on the type of unit you are using On the WORKABOUT PRO C a plastic SD MMC door is hinged on the left hand side of the unit If you are working with a WORKABOUT PRO S a metal door is hinged on the right hand side of the unit WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 55 Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO Inserting and Removing the Card On a WORKABOUT PRO C pull the hinged door down as the arrow icon on the door indicates On a WORKABOUT PRO S pull the metal door upward to expose the SD MMC slots Orient the SD MMC or SIM card according to th
369. tion into printed text 4 A 6 04 Dk Transcriber Options Recognition Delay Short M Add space after Pen Width Color Normal M Match Letter Shapes to your writing Quick Settings inking Advanced Enabling Add space after automatically adds a space after each word you write The Pen option allows you to choose the line Width and Colour Finally tapping on Match Letter Shapes to your writing displays a screen in which you can learn how to form letters to help the hand held to recognize the most often used characters Advanced In this tab Shorthand allows you to create a shortened word that the Transcriber will recog nize and expand into a complete word automatically You can also insert data such as a date or run a program 4 d 6 07 bk Transcriber Options Shorthand Speed up your writing by creating quick shortcuts Dictionaries Settings Add specialized dictionaries 138 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 6 5 1 1 6 5 2 Chapter 6 Settings Options Additional Choices Word Completion Input Suggest words when entering text Suggest after entering Suggest word s Add a space after word Clear Stored Entries Enable Auto Correct Wes comio SR Ss ma e lt 0 This tab speeds the writing process regardless of the input method chosen When you begin entering a word t
370. tly can be transmitted Ifa value is assigned to this parameter a Minimum Size and Maximum Size value is not required Minimum Size And Maximum Size When a value is assigned to these parameters only bar code lengths that fall between the minimum and maximum value can be decoded If values are assigned to these parameters a Field Size value is not required Add Remove Data Prefix Char This character if non zero is added before a successfully decoded bar code Press the key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Suffix Char This character if non zero is added after a successfully decoded bar code Press the key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Strip Leading This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the begin ning of the bar code before the prefix character is added Note For Code 39 bar codes the AIAG Strip is performed before the Strip Leading Strip Trailing The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added Code 128 Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 128 Enable GS1 128 GS1 US Previously UPC EAN and UCC these types of bar codes include group separators and start codes
371. ton in the top right of the Manage Triggers screen saves all changes made If the ESC key is pressed all changes made will be discarded WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 159 Chapter 6 Settings Trigger Mappings 6 24 1 1 Add And Edit Trigger Mapping Tap on Add to add a new trigger map or tap on Edit to edit an existing trigger map Manage Triggers ESTAS Trigger key Soft Scan v Add Key Sis press type 8 Up Down O Double click Module to trigger C Show all modules Trigger Key This drop down list allows you to specify the source of the trigger events such as the Grip Trigger Left Scan etc for the trigger module selected Note It is possible to map the same source to different modules trigger consumers for example to both the Imager and Non Decoded Scanner If so both devices opera tions will occur simultaneously This is not recommended in most cases especially with devices such as Imagers or RFID Readers It is also possible to map different sources to the same module trigger consumer for example two different trigger keys can be mapped to the RFID File System 160 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 6 25 Chapter 6 Settings Managed Programs Add Key Only existing trigger sources are shown in the Source combo box To add a new source to this list tap on the Add Key button A dialog box pops up allowing you to select the key board
372. ttim Y g H ok Camera Presets Front Imager Default Low light Low power Glossy surface View Add Activate Barcode Presets Matrix Postal Custom preset Activate R Read W Write 4 Active Barcoding Filter Translations LAT Modifying A Custom Preset The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset To ensure that it will work reliably it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset To change a parameter value Highlight the custom preset and tap on the Edit button PTS Imager Settin Y ee Yok Camera Presets Preset Custom preset Default Low light Low power Image Corrections Glossy surface Auto Exposure Manual Exposure Windowing Barcode Presets To change a setting press space or double click Barcodino Per Trama LU Tap on the symbols to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change For a parameter that can take a range of values WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual C 7 Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Removing A Custom Preset Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click the parameter An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the curren
373. tting this parameter to on enables decoding of parameter bar codes WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 3 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Advanced Options Decoded Internal Linear Security Level This parameter allows you to select the security level appropriate for your bar code quality There are four levels of decode security for linear code types e g Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Higher security levels should be selected for decreasing levels of bar code quality As se curity levels increase the scanner s decode speed decreases Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from 1 to 4 Linear security level 1 specifies that the following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded Code Type Length Codabar All MSI Plessey 4 or less D5 of5 8 or less 12 o0f5 8 or less Linear security level 2 specifies that all types of codes must be successfully read twice before being decoded Linear security level 3 specifies that code types other than the following must be success fully read twice before being decoded The following codes must be read three times Linear security level 4 requires that all code types be successfully read three times before being decoded D 4 Code Type Length MSI Plessey 4 or less D2 of5 8 or less 12 o0f5 8 or less WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mo
374. ttings You can adjust phone settings such as the ring type and tone choose phone services such as barring calls and you can also determine network selections There are a number of ways you can access phone settings Inthe Navigation Bar tap on the Phone Settings hotkey In the pop up Phone bubble tap on Settings or Tap on Start gt Settings gt Phone icon Phone Settings Hotkey mag Y 2 im E Settings ad er Y e ok Sounds CAN Rogers Wirel Ring type i NO enn Ring tone Ring WindowsMobit gt m Tap on Settings M sestinos Keypad Short tones Security J Require PIN when phone is used Change PIN Contacts STA Note If the phone keypad is opened tap on Menu gt Options to display the Phone Settings OS dialog box 2 8 3 1 Phone Tab Ring Type and Ring Tone Ring Type allows you to tailor the type of ring used for incoming calls The Ring Tone drop down menu allows you to determine the ring tone of incoming phone calls Keypad This option allows you to determine the type of sound that keypad keys emit as you tap them You can also turn off keypad sounds 26 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Managing Phone Settings 2 8 3 2 Security Tab e Settings Phone Tap in the checkbox L JV Jequire PIN when phone is used add a checkmark m uire when phone is usi to enable PIN Security This option all
375. u Choose Cut Copy Paste or Clear delete Note You can also use the softkey bar tools or the shortcuts listed in the introductory screen to help you edit a document within the Transcriber 4 10 3 Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer While the Transcriber attempts to recognize natural handwriting and transcribe it Block Recognizer and Letter Recognizer attempt to teach you how to conform your handwriting to what the hand held can recognize Block Recognizer Open a document and tap on the arrow next to the input icon Choose Block Recognizer 5 Word Mobile 4 d 6 18 ok Input Panel Recognizer Icon Bar Input Icon There are two points to remember when using Block Recognizer First limit your writing to the Block Recognizer input panel do not write in the body of the document Second write only uppercase letters with your stylus Tap on the icon in the Recognizer Icon Bar to display the Character Recognizer screen This screen provides a visual demonstration of how to enter letters that will be recognized Tap on a character in the soft keyboard for a demonstration of how to form a recognizable letter In the Block Recognizer panel write letters to the left abc and numbers to the right 123 on the input panel Remember to write using uppercase letters they will be printed on the screen as lowercase unless you follow the step below to create an upper case letter WORKABOUT PRO with Wind
376. ust be used a fuse assembly PN 19440 must be added to the extension power cable the fuse and instructions are supplied with the cable Use only a 10A slow blow UL approved fuse in the fuse assembly The Port Replicator The port replicator Model WA4005 G1 is an optional accessory that allows tethered devices as well as mounted peripherals e g bar code printers or weigh scales to be attached to the vehicle cradle The replicator can be used with or without the cradle power option The functionality of the WORKABOUT PRO tether port is replicated into RS 232 serial interfaces by the port replicator It provides the user with 3 DB9 serial interfaces as well as one Type B USB port for connecting a Host device WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 279 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Scanners And Imagers 7 32 Scanners And Imagers The WORKABOUT PRO supports a wide range of scanner imager options to address a variety of user application requirements Refer to Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet and Appendix D Bar Code Settings for details about configuring the unit installed in your hand held Scanner imagers available for your hand held include Scan Engine Kit Model Number 1D Laser SE955 WA9102 G1 WA9112 G1 WA9002 G1 1D Laser SE1223HP WA9000 G1 1D Laser SE1223LR WA9005 G1 1D Laser SE1524ER WA9009 1D Imager EV15 WA9103 G1 WA9113 G1 WA9003 G1 2D Imager HH
377. vailable only with MCF10G On Off Off Tray Icon Enables the System Tray icon Off On Off Hide Passwords On SCU as well as EAP authenti On Off Off cation dialog boxes hide passwords WEP keys and other sensitive information Admin Password that must be specified A string of up to 64 SUMMIT Password when Admin Login button is characters pressed WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Appendix A Summit Client Utility SCU Global Settings Tab Global Setting Auth Timeout Description Specifies the number of seconds that the software will wait for an EAP authentication request to succeed or fail If authentication credentials are specified in the active profile and the authentication times out then associa tion will fail Ifauthentication creden tials are not specified in the active profile and the authentication times out then the user will be re prompted to enter authentication credentials Value Default An integer from 3 to 60 8 Certs Path Directory where certificates for EAP authentication are stored Valid directory path up to 64 characters Dependent on device Ping Payload Amount of data to be transmitted on a ping Bytes 32 64 128 256 512 1024 32 Ping Timeout ms Amount of time in milliseconds that passes without a response before ping request is considered a failure Integer from 0 to 5000 30000 Ping Delay ms Amount of t
378. ver through a 10 100baseT Ethernet connection WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 51 Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO Bluetooth Radio 3 10 EA 3 10 1 Ela When a WORKABOUT PRO is properly inserted in a docking station a dock icon is dis played in the navigation bar at the top of the screen The unit also detects the presence of the Ethernet network Bluetooth Radio Note Integrated Bluetooth radios are standard on WORKABOUT PRO C and S units Keep in mind also that Bluetooth is available simultaneously with WAN and 802 11g on a single unit The WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with an on board Bluetooth radio This type of radio enables short range data communication between devices The Bluetooth also provides the capability to use a Bluetooth enabled cellular phone as a data modem exchanging informa tion with other Bluetooth devices and providing network access Refer to The Bluetooth GPRS Phone on page 210 for setup details Pairing a Bluetooth Device Note Headset pairing information is also available in the Getting Started Centre in the Today screen on your WORKABOUT PRO Turning the Bluetooth Radio On Before pairing a headset or any other Bluetooth device with your WORKABOUT PRO make certain that the Bluetooth device power is enabled it is enabled by default If for some reason it has been disabled Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab and then tap on the Power icon to display
379. vice At the greeting type You will be prompted to enter your temporary passcode A tutorial will lead you through the voice mail setup When you ve assigned your personalized passcode keep it in a secure place WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 29 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Managing Phone Settings 2 8 3 4 Network Tab 2 8 3 5 Phone Current network ROGERS Find Network Network selection Automatic h Preferred networks Cotino This dialog box identifies your current network and allows you to view available networks and determine the order in which other preferred networks will be accessed if the current one is unavailable You can also specify manual or automatic network changes and you can add a network Data Tab Phone PAP only authentication for USB This screen is used to configure the connection to the ISP You can select a network connec tion from the drop down menu By default the connection uses CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol however if your ISP does not support CHAP tapping in the box to the left of PAP only authentication for directs the connection to use PAP Password Authentication Protocol instead AN Note If your are not using PAP the hand held automatically defaults to CHAP 30 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Resetting the WORKABOUT PRO Hand Held
380. view the parameter settings C 4 10 Creating A Custom Preset A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset either a predefined preset or an ex isting custom preset To create a custom preset Highlight a preset and tap on the Add button A screen like the sample following is displayed PTS Imager Settim Y fy da ok f Preset Name Cloning from set Factory Default Enter alphanumeric string Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box Tap on OK to save your changes C 14 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Appendix C Teklogix Imagers Applet Modifying A Custom Preset The preset list is displayed the new custom preset appears at the end of the list It is marked as read and write PTS Imager Settim Y 47 fy 42 ok Camera Presets Front Imager bal Default Low light Low power Glossy surface View Add Activate Barcode Presets Matrix Postal Custom preset Activate R Read W Write 4 Active Barcoding Filter Translations LAT C 4 11 Modifying A Custom Preset The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset To ensure that it will work reliably it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset To change a parameter value Highlight the custom preset and tap on the Edit button PTS Imager Settim Y 47 fy 4 lt ok Symbology
381. w task Complete E Creating a Task e Tap in the field labelled Tap here to add a new task The text is replaced with a blink ing cursor If you prefer to type the task using the soft keyboard tap on the soft keyboard icon in the softkey bar Type your task description Tap anywhere in the blank part of the screen or press ENTER to add the task to your list 68 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Task Notification Editing a Task Tap on a task in the task list to highlight it Tap Edit in the softkey bar to display a detailed task screen where you can define task characteristics Figure 4 1 Task Details Screen d 2 02 ok Subject Conference call 8 Y Priority Normal tis Status Not Completed None Due None Occurs Once Reminder None Categories No categories Sensitivity Normal Each of the nine items in this screen when tapped displays a drop down menu where you can choose from a list of options Once you ve completed all the appropriate fields tap on OK to save your changes Note You can also tap on the Notes tab to add additional information about the task your are defining Deleting a Task e Press and hold the stylus on a task until a pop up menu is displayed e Tap on Delete Task Marking a Task as Completed Inthe Tasks list tap the checkbox next to the items that are completed Sorting Tasks Tap
382. want to assign the appointment Tap OK Your appointment is assigned to the category or categories you chose Note You can create a new category by tapping on New in the softkey bar at the bottom of a the screen 4 2 6 4 Deleting Appointments Tap and hold the stylus on the appointment you want to delete Tap on Delete Appointment in the pop up menu WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 73 Chapter 4 Working With Windows Mobile 6 1 Start Menu 4 3 Start Menu To display the Start menu Tap on the Start button in the upper left corner of the Navigation Bar Start Button gt Today R Office Mobile Custom chosen programs Most recently used programs fg scu Windows Mobile command centre PA Remote Desktop Mobile FR SimTkUI Windows Update oy a 5 20 PM Navigation Bar IB Calendar E Contacts Internet Explorer mE Messaging Phone y Programs 51 Settings F Help Contacts Tap on the Start menu item with which you want to work Note Keep in mind that if your hand held is running Windows Mobile 6 1 Classic the Phone option displayed in the sample screen above is not available this option is only offered on units running Windows Mobile 6 1 Professional 4 3 1 Customising the Start Menu You can choose the items you want to appear in the Start menu items you use most often Tap on Start gt Settings Ca App Launch Owner Informat
383. wer on sequence Switching the Unit Off Suspend Press the FN BLUE key and then press and hold down the ENTER key A Shutdown screen like the one below is displayed Each option switches off different ele ments of the WORKABOUT PRO each shutdown option displays an associated description te Shutdown 4 Shutdown Turn off the device Allow applications to run while w Contacts Choosing Suspend places the hand held into a power saving suspend state In this state all radios remain on but the display keyboard backlight and processor are switched off When the WORKABOUT PRO is turned on from this state operation resumes within a few seconds in the screen in which you were working prior to suspend If you choose Standby the display is turned off the keyboard is locked and the touchscreen is locked The processor remains on so that any running applications will continue while the WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 13 Chapter 2 Basic Checkout Connecting the WORKABOUT PRO to a PC 2 3 EA 2 4 2 4 1 hand held is in a Standby state In addition the radios remain on You should be aware that because the processor continues to run Standby mode consumes more power than Suspend mode Keep in mind that only by pressing and holding down the ENTER key until the Shutdown dialog box is displayed can you choose between Suspend and Standby Connecting the WORKABOUT PRO t
384. wice to display the letter b To choose the third letter in the sequence in this example the letter c Lock the FN ORANGE key on Press numeric key 2 three times to display the letter c Note Keep in mind that there is a timeout if you pause for one second between key presses when selecting the second third or fourth letters on a key For example suppose you want to type the letter c you would need to press the 2 key three times With the FN ORANGE key locked on if you press 2 twice and then pause between key presses for 1 second the letter b will be selected automatically Creating Uppercase Letters To display capital letters you need to first lock the SHIFT key on Press the SHIFT key twice All alpha keys are displayed in uppercase until you press the SHIFT key again to unlock switch off the function of this key Choosing Multiple Alpha Characters Lock the FN ORANGE key on Each time you press a numeric key from 2 through 9 an alpha character will be dis played on the screen Remember that you can refer to the softkey bar for a visual indication of which alpha key will be displayed on the screen Important Once you have finished typing alpha characters remember to turn off or unlock the FN ORANGE key Check the shift state indicator icon refer to Figure 3 4 on page 42 to make certain that the key is turned off 46 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with W
385. with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 7 8 7 9 A 7 9 1 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Adaptor Cable Options Adaptor Cable Options The following adaptors can be ordered for your WORKABOUT G2 Model No Adaptor Cable Description WA1002 Tether to USB device This cable is used to connect USB devices such as USB Flash memory devices WA4020 G2 Tether to RS232 This is a full RS232 port on COM2 WA4001 G2 Tether to USB Client For ActiveSync WA4010 Gl USB to Ethernet adaptor WA4015 USB RS232 adaptor This cable is used with docking station WA4003 G2 Chargers And Docking Stations Important Keep in mind when ordering a charger or docking station you must also order the appropriate power cord separately Psion Teklogix offers a variety of chargers and docking stations for the WORKABOUT PRO These include e e e AC Adaptor Model No PS1050 G1 Automotive Adaptor Model No WA3113 G2 Single Battery Charger Model No WA3001 G1 Quad Battery Charger Model No WA3004 G1 Desktop Docking Station Model No WA4003 G2 Quad Docking Station For 7527C G2 Model No WA4204 G2 Quad Docking Station For 7527S G2 Model No WA4304 G2 Installation Chargers And Docking Stations When installing a charger or docking station consider the following guidelines e Keep chargers and docking stations away from excessive dirt dust and contaminants WORKABOUT PRO with Wind
386. wo different inner methods are used with PEAP EAP MSCHAPV2 resulting in PEAP MSCHAP This is appropriate for use against Windows Active Directory and domains EAP GTC resulting in PEAP GTC This is for authentication with one time passwords OTPs against OTP data bases such as SecurelD LEAP Is an authentication method for use with Cisco WLAN access points LEAP does not require the use of server or client certificates LEAP supports Windows Active Directory and domains but requires the use of strong passwords to avoid vulnerability to off line dictionary attacks EAP FAST Is a successor to LEAP and does not require strong passwords to protect against off line dictionary attacks Like LEAP EAP FAST does not require the use of server or client certificates and supports Windows Active Directory and domains Note PEAP and EAP TLS require the use of Windows facilities for the configuration of digital certificates SCU EAP Types The following EAP types are supported by the integrated supplicant and can be configured in SCU PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC LEAP and EAP FAST With each of these four types if authentication credentials are not stored in the profile you will be prompted to enter credentials the first time the radio attempts to associate to an access point that supports 802 1X EAP Consider the following when configuring one of the EAP types PEAP GTC SCU supports static login passwords only WORKABOUT PRO with Wind
387. words are not converted properly e Press and hold the stylus on the incorrectly converted word WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 105 Chapter 5 Programs Renaming a Note In the pop up menu choose Alternative to display a list of possible alternatives to the incorrectly converted word Your handwritten version is displayed along the top of the menu Figure 5 2 Incorrect Conversions Cones T Confersio confersio Cenfersio eonfersio cenfersio eenfersio confersiv Confersiv cenfersiv conversio Tap on the correct word in the list Ifthe correct word is not listed as is the case in the sample screen above tap on the soft keyboard icon Eg to display the soft keyboard and type the correct word 5 11 3 Renaming a Note e Press and hold the stylus on the file name in the Notes screen that you want to rename In the pop up menu choose Rename Move or Tap the file name to select it and tap on Menu gt Rename Move Inthe Name field type the new name and tap OK 5 11 4 Recording Notes It s sometimes easier to record a note than to write it down just to make certain that you ve captured an idea before it drifts away To make an audio recording Tap on New to open a fresh note 106 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 5 Programs Recording Notes Tap on Menu gt View Recording Toolbar 46 4 24 lok Volume Skip to end
388. ws Mobile 6 1 User Manual D 19 Appendix D Bar Code Settings Decoded HHP D 3 Decoded HHP Scanner Settings Yi ok Scanner DESEG d Options a Advanced Options Code 39 Trioptic Code disabled Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPCA UPC E UPC EAN Shared Settings S To change a setting press space or double click opens Trazo Pome Tap on the Scanner drop down menu and choose Decoded HHP D 3 1 Options Decoded HHP Laser On Time The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 1 and 10 seconds D 3 2 Advanced Options Decoded HHP Continuous Scan Mode Setting this parameter to on keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the scanner button is pressed and held down Minimum Cancel Time The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off once the scanner trigger or button is released This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when the user quickly triggers on off D 20 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Appendix D Bar Code Settings Advanced Options Decoded HHP Low Power Timeout To extend laser life you can select the length of time
389. ws you to power your hand held and recharge your battery using power drawn from your vehicle s cigarette lighter outlet Figure 7 7 Automotive Adaptor Adaptor End Cap u DC Power Plug Automotive Adaptor Plug e Unscrew the adaptor end cap and remove the fuse inside the adaptor e Replace it with the fuse provided with your kit and screw the adaptor end cap back into position Insert the DC power plug into the DC IN socket at the base of the WORKABOUT PRO Insert the automotive adaptor plug into cigarette lighter outlet in your vehicle Single Battery Charger Model WA3001 G1 Figure 7 8 Single Battery Charger WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 269 Chapter 7 Peripheral Devices amp Accessories Inserting A Battery In The Single Battery Charger The single battery charger is designed to charge a single battery It has a DC IN socket and is equipped with one LED that indicates the status of the charge process 7 17 1 Inserting A Battery In The Single Battery Charger Insert the DC power plug into the charger Plug the AC adaptor into the AC outlet e Install the battery aligning the contacts on the battery with the contacts in the battery charge well 7 17 2 Battery Charge Duration It can take up to 4 hours to fully charge a battery The single battery charger stops applying power to the battery when it is fully charged there is no risk of overcharge if the battery remai
390. x D Bar Code Settings for details Double clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and initiate an immediate scan Note that the aiming dot is standard on long range and high visibility internal scanners Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed 7 32 4 Operating Two Dimensional 2D Imagers Ela A An imager takes a snap shot of a single bar code or multiple bar codes at one time It can find a bar code regardless of its orientation that is even a bar code printed at a 45 degree angle to the hand held will be decoded successfully Note When scanning multiple bar codes ensure that all of the desired bar codes are within the field of view of the scanner It is possible that even when all bar codes are within the field of view not all of them will be decoded Only successfully decoded bar codes are passed to the application program The application program then issues a warning asking that you scan the missing bar codes When scanning a single bar code ensure that only the desired bar code is within the field of view of the scanner Because imagers generally have a shorter depth of field than laser scanners some practise may be required to find the optimal distance from the types of bar codes being scanned Al though the imager includes illumination LEDs ambient light will help the imag
391. x D Bar Code Settings Code 16K Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 366 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 26 Code 16K The Code 16K bar code is a multiple row bar code that can encode the full ASCII charac ter set below ASCII 128 It uses existing UPC and Code 128 character set patterns Up to 77 full ASCII characters or 154 numeric characters can be encoded into 2 to 16 rows Each row is divided by a separator bar The top and bottom of the symbol also have separator bars that extend to the ends of the minimum quiet zones Enabled Set this parameter to on to enable Code 16K Minimum And Maximum Length The length of a code refers to the number of characters 1 e human readable characters in cluding check digit s Double tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths to 160 Length Restriction Refer to Length Restriction on page D 8 for details Add Remove Data Refer to Add Remove Data on page D 9 for details D 3 27 Code 49 The Code 49 bar code is a multiple row
392. xample if the bar code size is important it should be checked before any rules that might change the size are applied Translation information about the status of each case rule is displayed in the scan log file see Scan Log File on page 177 when enabled This is useful if a case fails and you are trying to determine why a rule is failing 6 33 4 Ports Tab While you cannot configure the scanner you can configure communications with a serial decoded scanner using the options in this tab Scanner Settings t Yi ok al Tether Port Sdevice COM21 Port Replicator Port A COMS Port Replicator Port B COM6 Port Replicator Port C COM7 To change a setting press space or double click Port 5 180 WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Ports Tab 6 33 4 1 Tether Port device COM21 Scanner Settings t Yi ok wi Tether Port Sdevice COM21 Enabled off Baud 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Trigger On Sequence 00 00 00 q Trigger Off Sequence 00 00 00 4 Port Replicator Port A COMS Port Replicator Port B COM6 Port Replicator Port C COM7 To change a setting press space or double click Pera Enabled This parameter allows you to turn the tether port on enable and off Baud Double tapping on this parameter displays a pop up window in which you can choose an ap propriate baud rate Scanner Settings Toi ok
393. ynchronized as part of the general synchronization process The next time you synchronize with Active Sync the e mail in Outlook on your PC will be transferred to the Messaging program on your WORKABOUT PRO 5 14 3 Changing Synchronization Settings In ActiveSync on your PC double tap the E mail item in the Sync Options tab E mail Synchronization Settings E mail Synchronization Synchronize the e mail messages on your Pocket PC with Microsoft Exchange Download the past Message format Download size limit J Include file attachments Tap on the Select Folder button E mail Synchronization Settings Select E mail Folders Check the boxes for the e mail folders you would like to be included when synchronizing Folders to synchronize s ALM OS Jan_05_Sent OA Junk E mail AA Sent Items S Sync Issues WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 113 Chapter 5 Programs Remote Desktop Mobile 5 15 5 15 1 5 15 2 5 15 3 e Add a checkmark next to the folders in this screen that you want to synchronize with your WORKABOUT PRO and tap on OK The E mail Synchronization screen is displayed again e Ifyou want to accept file attachments add a check mark next to Include file attach ments To limit the size tap on Only if smaller than and specify a size in the KB box Tap on OK Remote Desktop Mobile t Aur Remote Daskt This program allows
394. you 1l need the following information from your ISP or network adminis trator telephone number password domain name and TCP IP settings WORKABOUT PRO with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual 215 Chapter 6 Settings Modem Connection Setup If your WORKABOUT PRO does not have access to a mobile phone network insert a modem card in the unit 1 2 Tap Start gt Settings Tap on the Connections tab followed by the Connections icon To create a new connection in either My ISP or My Work Network tap on Add a new modem connection 3 In the Make New Connection screen type a name for the connection y Settings Dias Make New Connection Enter a name for the connection My Connection 1 Select a modem Hayes Compatible on COM1 4 In the drop down menu under Select a modem tap on your modem type Note Ifyour modem is not listed in the drop down menu choose Hayes Compatible on COMI 5 Tap on the Next button y Settings Dias Enter the number exactly as it should be dialed Include any extra numbers such as an outside line or credit card If you travel or change area codes often use dialing rules 216 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual Chapter 6 Settings Modem Connection Setup 6 In the next screen enter the phone number exactly as you want it dialed If for example you need to dial 9 for an outside line enter 9 at the beginning of the phone number
395. you need to make certain that the backup battery is holding at least 80 of its charge capacity This information is displayed in the Battery tab Tap on Start gt Settings gt System tab and then tap on the Power icon Check the Backup battery gas gauge to determine the battery charge remaining If the backup battery charge capacity is less than 80 Insert the WORKABOUT PRO ina docking station or cradle to top up the power supply before removing the main battery from the unit 38 WORKABOUT PRO 3 with Windows Mobile 6 1 User Manual A 3 2 4 A 3 2 4 1 A Chapter 3 Get To Know WORKABOUT PRO Charging the Battery Important Before opening the battery cover on your WORKABOUT PRO to remove the battery you must turn press the Power button to turn off the hand held Charging the Battery Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40 of capacity They must be fully charged prior to use Keep in mind also that along with the main battery the WORKABOUT PRO is equipped with an internal backup battery that preserves data stored on the unit while the main battery is swapped Important The backup battery is trickle charged from the main battery To maximize battery life avoid excessive discharging and recharging of the backup battery by keeping the main battery fully charged IF YOU ARE POWERING UP A NEW UNIT a warning message may appear on the screen indicating that the backup battery capacity is low

WORKABOUT PRO3 with Windows Mobile 6.1 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents